Home

Service Manual

1. NOTE dynamic accuracy calculation example is shown at the end of the calculation sheets S Parameter 20 dBm to 110 dBm a A 9 Name Al A2 Power Pm dB Sxy dB dB Port SxyxR Running True setting Port Char ON Char OFF dB D A D A dB y DA20 0 20 REF REF o DA25 5 20 Sxy x R DA25 Sxy x R DA20 Pm DA25 Pm DA20 DA30 10 20 Sxy x R DA30 Sxy x R DA20 Pm DA30 Pm DA20 DA30a 0 30 Adjust source power for Pm db DA30a Sxy R dB DA30a Sxy R dB DA30 DA30b 0 30 REF30 REF30 DA35 3 30 Sxy x R DA35 Sxy x R DA30b Pm DA35 Pm DA30b gt True D A Running D A dB DA35 True D A dB DA30 DA40 10 30 Sxy x R DA40 Sxy x R DA30b Pm DA40 Pm DA30b gt True D A Running D A dB DA40 True D A dB DA30 DA40a 0 40 Adjust source power for Pm db DA40a Sxy x R dB DA40a Sxy x R dB 2 DA40 DA40b 0 40 REF40 REF40 DA45 5 40 Sxy x DA45 Sxy x R DA40b Pm DA45 Pm DA40b gt True D A Running D A dB DA45 True D A dB
2. PCI PCI PCI PCI JP6 ISA mej 221222 e JP8 ISA es 6 n gt 5 Q e5070ase158 NOTE If the following jumper settings are not correct they cause particular problems as described below Be sure to set these jumpers to the correct positions JP4 Power on failure JP5 Some setup data in memory may be lost P11 Digital processing speed changes due to improper BUS clock setting Chapter 4 217 Figure 4 82 Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Step 4 Step 5 Step 6 Step 7 Step 8 Step 9 Troubleshooting To configure the A20 Digital Motherboard and BIOS JP12 LAN Ethernet interface is disabled Testing DRAM on the Motherboard When the A20 digital mother
3. To avoid possible variance in measured values do not touch or move the N N cable during measurements Press and Enter to initialize the E5070A E5071A Set System Correction function to OFF in accordance with the following procedure a Press System gt Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch CN C CY select Service Menu Enter J Confirm that the System Correction is OFF If it is ON proceed to the next c and d Press gt select System Correction Enter J The message box is displayed Then press OK button The System Correction function will be changed to OFF Press and select Log Mag from display format menu Set the test frequencies using the Segment Table as follows a 84 Press Sweep Setup CF gt CY CX Cho CH select Edit Segment Table Enter The first Start frequency entry box in the Segment Sweep table will be focused Press to enter 3 MHz as the start frequency Stop frequency will be focused Press 8 to enter 10 MHz as the stop frequency Points will be automatically set to 2 Press lt gt S to focus on the Start frequency of the second segment Chapter 2 Performance Tests 8 UNCORRECTED SYSTEM PERFORMANCE TEST e Press to enter 50 MHz The Stop frequency w
4. Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Step 4 Replacement Procedure Refer to Figure A 7 for this procedure Remove the CPU and CPU fan as described in CPU Removal on page 292 Remove the DIMM modules as described in DIMM Module Removal on page 294 Disassemble the guide plate item 9 from rear side of the mother board Cut the cable tie item 10 holding the USB cable to the digital motherboard Appendix A 341 jenuey V Step 5 Step 6 Step 7 Step 8 Step 9 Step 10 Manual Changes Change 1 Unsolder the USB cables Solder the USB cables to the new board Hold the USB cable to the new board by a cable tie Remove a screw item 11 from a serial connector Place the guide plate to the rear side of the new board Install the new board by the reverse procedure of removal 342 Appendix A lt o oj E 2 o z lt System Recovery This appendix describes how to recover the operating system Windows 98 when the operating system has damage 343 System Recovery System Recovery for the E5070A E5071A System Recovery for the E5070A E5071A If something unusual happens to the Windows operating system or E5070A E5071A firmware resulting in failure to start up normally or in unstable operations execute system recovery Executing system recovery affects data in
5. OSL m m m Chapter 2 Figure 2 60 e5070ase044 Figure 2 61 e50 0ase042 Performance Tests 8 UNCORRECTED SYSTEM PERFORMANCE TEST Thru calibration setup for uncorrected system performance test Opt 313 314 E5070A 5071A oC 0000 CODD 0000 aa 20000 lt aod OO OO aaa O Q um N m N m Cable O S L calibration setup for uncorrected system performance test Opt 413 414 E5070A 5071A lt N m N m Cable Orc OSL m m m Chapter 2 97 D s 3 D 5 Figure 2 62 e5070ase014 Figure 2 63 e5070ase043 Performance Tests 8 UNCORRECTED SYSTEM PERFORMANCE TEST Thru calibration setup for uncorrected system performance test Opt 413 414 E5070A 5071A aao 9000 oo 7 OO 0000 aa 04 0000 go lt gt oua N m N m Cable O S L calibration setup for uncorrected system performanc
6. Table 4 1 Internal tests failure troubleshooting information Test Test group First failed test Test point objective Probable faulty board assembly No Al A6 A2 Receiver A7 Att Source Sw T cont 14 17 57 ATT R 5dB R 0dB Source attenuatoron A7 HHH A7 Opt 21 58 4 314 414 R 10dB R 0dB Source attenuatoron A7 THE HHH s only R 15dB R 0dB Source attenuator on A7 n HHH 60 R 20dB R 0dB Source attenuatoron A7 THE HHH 61 R 25dB R 0dB Source attenuatoron A7 HHH 62 R 30dB R OdB Source attenuator on A7 THE HHH 63 R 35dB R 0dB Source attenuatoron A7 THE HHH Most suspicious assembly Suspicious assembly Possible faulty assembly NOTE Internal tests from item number 1 to 44 are common to the power on self test NOTE When the internal test for a specific receiver port fails identify the faulty A2 receiver board as shown in Figure 4 21 Figure 4 21 Test port configuration A1 Source E5070A 5071A p j t O O 2 Receiver Lower e6070ase006 Test port configuration Test port failed in the test Port 1 Port 2 Port 3 Port 4 2 port Opt 213 214 Upper Upper 3 port Opt 313 314 Lower Upper Upper 4 port Opt 413 414 Lower Upper Upper e5
7. e5070ase020 52 Td Chapter 2 Performance Tests 6 SYSTEM DYNAMIC RANGE TEST Figure 2 20 Isolation calibration setup for system dynamic range test Opt 313 314 5070 5071 D 3 D 5 5070 284 Figure 2 21 Isolation calibration setup for system dynamic range test Opt 413 414 E5070A 5071A aa anon aa 2500 9000 aa Hoa 0000 oo GY OOO 00 mE e5070ase286 Step 2 Press Preset and Enter J to initialize the 5070 5071 Step 3 Press and select Lin Mag from display format menu Chapter 2 53 Step 4 Step 5 Step 6 NOTE Table 2 8 Step 7 Step 8 Step 9 Step 10 Performance Tests 6 SYSTEM DYNAMIC RANGE TEST Set the controls as follows Control settings Key strokes IF Bandwidth 10 Hz Avg J Enter 1 Averaging ON C CF C4 select Averaging Averaging factor now is set to 16 preset value Number of points 101 Sweep Setup J AD Go Go
8. 270 en ao s 271 Keyboard Ce ee IEEE 272 LCD and Inverter 2 1 273 Standby Switch Assembly 0 274 Cover Assembly au iu Seder n nim a 275 Cover Assembly Reeth ese ae ES 276 Labelon Rear dad ua uyaywa yas belt od ee ate cet a 277 Other Parts a a a ee det 278 6 Replacement Procedure 10 Replacing an Assembly 2 ot Cau odes 280 Required Tools pct RR Dex qe e Oy ea ee RR 281 Outer Cover Removal shi etre ees are Ree ae a eee AI EIN ERE ee 282 Tools Required REGUM le be WAS 282 ProCedUrens sau ves moss seppur Eos de DU ler thee dee ele pu ger bass 282 Front Panel Removal ros a x Re PLE ITA Oa SS 284 Tools required a ODE MENS OU IS VES SCAN VADO AM Ue UU ue 284 Procedure URL UAE RU pe APRES MEME I dE 284 A27 Mass Storage Disk Drive Replacement 285 Tools Required res gu ee Ep REX PER ee 285 Removal Proced re avi B DUDEN UU ERE V OUS 285 Replacement Procedure d casei REIR aie EY EE 285 Restore Backup Files onto th
9. 137 4 Troubleshooting Introduction Bie SE SORTIERT 140 How to exit from the E5070A E5071A Measurement View 141 To Troubleshoot the Instrument llis rs 142 Primary Trouble 1 142 No Display troubleshooting uz upi a pn bass eee s oh VARIA EUER e 144 Booting Process s 147 Troubleshooting Using Internal Test 1 156 Power On Self Test Ee E E edd Ede ed s edu e e e exa 156 Contents PLE unlock sm ya ete atu f oe tdt ud 156 External reference signal phase unlock Opt 1 5 156 the Internat Test ez sua yu an hua 157 Internal Test Failure 2 160 Function Specific 8 165 To Check the Driver ayu y ety inch on e PA ANA OE eR EMO Ves 166 To Ch ck the Front us INA Shee 167 To Check the Touch Panel Option 016 only 168 ECD 4 eed a Thales anette cod de 169 T
10. 246 Front View Miscellaneous 1 7 24 247 Front View Semirigid Cables Opt 213 248 Front View Semirigid Cables Opt 214 249 Front View Semirigid Cables Opt 313 250 Contents Front View Semirigid Cables Opt 314 252 Front View Semirigid Cables Opt 413 254 Front View Semirigid Cables Opt 414 256 Fr ntiPanel db ip ets lt ______ __ EN 258 imu EMI o aaa aan ae e tel a 260 Side VIEW ss ox SIUE CARRERA RUE Pina bee eR EP Re Ria E NEN REUS Du 261 Cover Assembly ince Sa V eere vn OPE UE uen nS 262 A28 EDD Assembly 12 MAU mead bbe EH CU See 263 A27 Mass Storage Disk Drive Assembly 264 ASRESwitch Assembly ex tpe NC E eee HASC EY tton ee else es ENDE 266 A7 Source Step Attenuator Assembly Opt 214 314 414 267 A2 Receiver Board Assembly rrii mere Mv WU RR ER ERE P 268 Receiver Module Assembly Opt 31 41 269 Analog Mother Board Assembly
11. 376 Ses E E aviae WAGE GG 376 D en 377 deeds neds etek eda eu WE eC ER EC tg 378 aa 378 Warning Message gs ebur ae 379 Messages indicating the internal status of the 380 Messages indicating measurement 380 Messages indicating the results or current status 381 13 Contents 14 0 5 6 3 3 D pum 5 General Information The Service Manual is a guide to servicing the 5070 5071 ENA Series Network Analyzer The manual contains information requisite to do performance tests adjustments troubleshooting and repairs 15 NOTE General Information Precautions Precautions This section describes cautions that must be observed in operating the E5070A E5071A Software Installed The Windows operating system installed in this machine is customized for more effective operation and has different functions that are not part of the Windows operating system for ordinary PCs personal computers
12. 364 Power Requirements asa ERES PER NP e EG 364 Power Cables vise eth Mwst b SUPERI BU itu oar bate Des dita sto sus 364 Turning the Power ON and OFF 366 12 Contents Turning the power ON s esu LA Lo 366 Turing the power OFF arse taya e ARR RUP ee oes Hebets edid Rees 366 F Messages a CAL 369 369 Bii Lite OOE 369 Dreck ur CER exe ene CER doge ERU 369 D ere RE nn 370 E Con t vede 370 yu ahay cues Dt AL 371 C a det t bote aru be E een rte 372 Hiss fb ending dna d ately de hte Rose Mae ale ee 372 arise A puya S ech ee ae iS ee 372 DU 373 tid E 373 E 373 sua 374 Pr 374 P EM Es 375
13. Chapter 2 Performance Tests 7 DYNAMIC ACCURACY TEST Figure 2 36 Dynamic accuracy test setup Opt 313 314 E5070A 5071A ay 0050 7 0000 0000 lt ooo 000 Qo V J 6dB Fixed Attenuation N m N m Cable Z5623A H01 L Power Sensor 5070 027 GPIB Controller Interface Cable Power Meter Figure 2 37 Dynamic accuracy test setup Opt 313 314 E5070A 5071A n i sl 6dB Fixed Attenuation Z5623A H01 f Power Sensor e5070ase026 Chapter 2 GPIB Controller Power Meter 79 159 4 Performance Tests 7 DYNAMIC ACCURACY TEST Figure 2 38 Dynamic accuracy test setup Opt 413 414 E5070A 5071A GPIB Controller Od aano lt gt aa pa r o0 aag aa oo aaa L d 6dB Fixed Att
14. 1 1 4 19 Required nd a Re OE UP a ee ae 20 2 Performance Tests Introduction o core OA RE uqa oe S as ones RR td pnr tts 24 Test Equipment Required sie rp RR ERRARE HW e 25 1 FREQUENCY ACCURACY TEST e eR Re rx ERR RR ERE EE EE 26 Description eR i SR UE ERE NE 26 Specification 55 vasos bep ob ueber reU PUT RET osi deos 26 Testequipment i5 elites uS EGG EX GAG m NR Leda s 26 Procedure ous xps EUNT eA OM apt Els d ER t em 26 2 RF OUTPUT LEVEL ACCURACY AND FLATNESS 5 29 Descriptiobi o coe oa dete Pees VOTE DU SED SU otio suse saq gus 29 Nut 29 Test equipment puce M de 229 Procedure 2 epo CPP A eK OR EARS 29 3 RF OUTPUT LEVEL LINEARITY 8 32 Description 245 CA NER WERE 32 ED 32 Test equipment 32 Procedure Wai cos OO aty 32 4 TRACE NOISE CW TEST eR e ed ih uY 35 Description EE E ORs a E qu mk a ur uo 35 Specification u cc
15. Frequency range Hz IF bandwidth Hz Test limit dB Test result dB 3 156 10 lt 120 156 360 10 lt 122 3 156 3k lt 95 15G 3G 3k lt 97 Direction 532 Options 313 314 413 414 only Frequency range Hz IF bandwidth Hz Test limit dB Test result dB 3M 1 5G 10 lt 120 15G 3G 10 lt 122 3M 1 5G 3k lt 95 156 360 3k lt 97 Direction 523 Options 313 314 413 and 414 only Frequency range Hz IF bandwidth Hz Test limit dB Test result dB 3M 1 5G 10 lt 120 1 5G 3G 10 lt 122 3M 1 5G 3k lt 95 1 5G 3G 3k lt 97 Direction 541 Options 413 and 414 only Frequency range Hz IF bandwidth Hz Test limit dB Test result dB 3 156 10 lt 120 1156 36 10 lt 122 3M 1 5G 3k lt 95 1 5 9 34 3k lt 97 Direction 514 Options 413 and 414 only Frequency range Hz IF bandwidth Hz Test limit dB Test result dB 3M 1 5G 10 lt 120 1 5 9 34 10 lt 122 1 54 3k lt 95 Chapter 2 111 D 3 D 5 Performance Tests E5070A Performance Test Record Frequency range Hz IF bandwidth Hz Test limit dB Test result dB 1 5G 3G 3k lt 97 Dynamic Accuracy Test Reference power level 2
16. n Post Repair Procedures Post Repair Procedures Table 7 1 Post Repair Procedures Replaced Required Adjustments Verification Assembly or Part Correction Constants CC A22 Front Panel No adjustment needed Troubleshooting Using Internal Test on Keyboard page 156 To Check the Front Panel on page 167 A23 Handler I O Board No adjustment needed Troubleshooting Using Internal Test on page 156 A24 GPIB Board No adjustment needed To Check the GPIB on page 176 A26 Display Board No adjustment needed Inspect the Booting Process Troubleshooting Using Internal Test on page 156 To Check the Video output on page 170 A27 Mass Storage Perform HDD in Spot Adjustment of Inspect the Booting Process Disk Drive the program Calibration of the Touch Screen for opt 016 A28 FDD No adjustment needed To Check the FDD on page 170 50 Power Supply No adjustment needed Inspect the Booting Process Assembly A51 LCD Not adjustment needed Inspect the Booting Process Troubleshooting Using Internal Test on page 156 To Check the LCD on page 169 Touch panel for Calibration of the Touch Screen Inspect the Booting Process Opt 018 Troubleshooting Using Internal Test on page 156 To Check the LCD on page 169 A52 Inverter Board No adjustment needed Inspect the Booting Process Troubleshooting
17. Table 5 23 A2 Receiver Board Assembly Ref Agilent Part Number C D Qty Description Desig 1 5071 61014 2 1 14 RECEVER BOARD Opt 21x 5071 69014 8 1 14 BOARD Exchange 2 0515 1403 2 3 SCREW MACH 0 x 6 T15 Opt 21x 3 5071 66517 0 1 17 RECEIVER IF BOARD Opt 21x 4 0515 1403 2 4 SCREW MACH M4 0 x 6 FN T15 Opt 21x 1 E5071 61014 2 2 14 RECEIVER RF BOARD Opt 31x 41x 5071 69014 8 1 14 BOARD Exchange 2 0515 1403 2 SCREW MACH 4 0 x 6 FN 15 Opt 31x 41x 3 5071 66517 0 2 17 RECIEVER IF BOARD Opt 31x 41x 4 0515 1403 2 8 SCREW MACH M4 0 x 6 FN T15 Opt 31x 41x 268 Chapter 5 Replaceable Parts Replaceable Parts List Receiver Module Assembly Opt 1 41x Figure 5 25 Module Assembly Opt 31 41x 5070 063 5 24 Receiver Module Assembly Opt 31x 41x Ref Agilent Part Number C D Qty Description Desig 1 5070 20031 6 2 BLOCK 2 0515 1864 9 8 SCREW MACH M3 0 x 22 FL T10 3 5070 25031 6 4 TERMAL e 2 e D D v D zi Chapter 5 269 Replaceable Parts Replaceable Parts List Analog Mother Board Assembly Figure 5 26 Analog Mother Board Assembly e5070ase291 Table 5 25 Analog Mother Board Assembly Ref Agilent Part Number C D Qty Description Desig 1 5070 66510
18. 4 For example this error occurs when with the start and stop frequency are set 1 MHz and 2 MHz respectively the sweep type is changed to logarithmic sweep Set the stop frequency to more than four times as many as the start frequency And then select logarithmic sweep M 109 Missing parameter The number of parameters is less than that required for the command or the parameter has not been entered For example the command SENS 1 6 SWE POIN requires one more parameter Therefore when a message SENS1 SWE POIN is sent to a correct program message SENS1 SWE POIN 201 this instrument receives the former message as an invalid one because all parameters have not been entered Enter command parameters correctly N 120 Numeric data error An error resulting from the numeric value data including numeric value data having no decimal point representation has occurred A numeric value error other than Errors 121 through 129 has occurred Appendix F 373 128 200 225 220 108 41 220 221 Messages Numeric data not allowed Numeric data not allowed numeric value data element not violating the standard has been received at a position where this instrument does not accept one O Option not installed The command received has been ignored because of the mismatch between the contents of an option for this instrument and the command For example this error occ
19. Sxy x R DA95 Sxy x R DA90b Pm DA95 Pm DA90b gt True D A Running D A dB DA95 True D A dB DA90 DA100 10 90 N D 3 D 5 o Sxy x R DA100 Sxy x R DA90b Pm DA100 Pm DA90b True D A Running D A dB DA100 True D A dB 4 DA90 DA100a 0 100 Adjust source power for Pm db DA100a Sxy R dB DA100a Sxy x R dB DA100 DA100b 0 100 REF 100 REF100 DA105 5 100 Sxy x R DA105 Sxy x R DA100b DA105 Pm DA100b gt True D A Running D A dB DA105 True D A dB DA100 DA110 10 100 Sxy x R DA110 Sxy x R DA100b Pm DA110 DA100b gt True D A Running D A dB DA110 True D A dB DA100 DA20 10 10 REF10 REF10 DA15 5 10 Sxy x R DA15 Sxy x R DA20 Pm DA15 Pm DA20 DA10 0 10 E Sxy x R DA10 Sxy x R DA20 Pm DA10 Pm DA20 DA10a 10 0 Adjust source power for Pm db DA10a Sxy x R dB DA10a Sxy x R dB DA10 DA10b 10 0 REFO REFO DAS 5 0 Sxy x R DA5 Sxy x R DA10b Pm DA5
20. 331 View Miscellaneous Parts page 240 333 Rear a eed tM h ace RR NETS 335 Table 6 1con pape 2816 usai rona p uted wel deb dew Z a se 336 Outer Cover Removal Q CS ees 337 A50 ATX Power Supply Assembly Removal page 290 339 A20 Digital Motherboard Replacement page 295 340 B System Recovery System Recovery for the 5070 5071 344 Operating Steps sce ee ee A ta ete lew lt A ek 344 C Firmware Update Firmware Update uu yuy nutu keg SAU inane tas Se CR ES 348 Required Equipment ad a wend ev ean a Qa su Bee 348 How to make E5070A E5071A Firmware Installation Disk 348 How to update 5070 5071 firmware 349 D Computer Virus Check Computer Virus Check science RR saa hac pea lea R eles 354 Requimred equipmient SA pte Reet oe els 354 How to check the drive C and D 5070 5071 354 E Power Requirement Preparation for Power Supply
21. NOTE Figure 4 70 NOTE Table 4 17 e5070bse127 b Select the S parameters for the test by clicking the check boxes Then click Start Test button The instruction dialog box opens as shown in Figure 4 70 Follow the instruction Clicking Select button checks all the check boxes Clicking Select button clears all the check boxes Click Exit to return to the External Test dialog box SHORT all ports dialog box Connect SHORTs to All Ports e5070bse128 c Connecttype N Short terminations to all the test ports For more information on the Dynamic Range tests setup see Table 4 17 Dynamic Range tests setup Test parameter Connect Short Sweep freq span IFBW Nop and terminations to RF power settings Automatic 512 the test ports 3 MHz to 3 GHz 5070 3 MHz to 8 5 GHz 5071 S21 3 kHz BW 101 0 dBm S23 Opt 313 314 413 414 S31 Opt 313 314 413 414 S32 Opt 313 314 413 414 S34 Opt 413 414 S41 Opt 413 414 S43 Opt 413 414 202 Chapter4 Troubleshooting Troubleshooting Using External Test d Click OK button to run the test program The dialog box displays Now testing while the Dynamic Range tests are in progress When the tests are completed the dialog box displays Pass Fail for each test as shown in Figure 4 71 Figure 4 71 Dynamic Range test results examp
22. N m N m Cable GPIB Interface Cable Power Meter Power Sensor 5070 5 025 68 Chapter 2 Performance Tests 7 DYNAMIC ACCURACY TEST Figure 2 34 Dynamic accuracy test setup Opt 413 414 E5070A 5071A GPIB Controller lL Citi aa aanp 90000 OO lt gt 0000 aa 0000 lt 000 2900 7 i too 00 Fixed Attenuation N m N m Cable GPIB Interface Cable Pd 25623 01 Power Meter 159 4 Power Sensor e5070ase028 NOTE To avoid possible variance in measured values do not touch or move the N N cable during measurements NOTE Do not touch the power sensor during measurements Power meter zero adjustment NOTE This adjustment is required to subtract residual noise power of the Z5623A from the subsequent signal power measurements Step 3 Setthe first attenuator A1 of the Z5623A to 11 dB and the second attenuator A2 to 110 dB by executing the following GPIB control command GPIB OUTPUT 712 amp_in OUTPUT 71
23. 1 2 12 316 Tools 316 Procedure si aie teh Ma 316 52 Inverter Board 1 2 318 11 Contents Tools Required a Rk os eee eb eet tete et eee 318 Procedure PM X HE 318 51 LCD Display 21 320 Tools puyupa Pu ies 320 Procedure a Che t 320 Calibration of the Touch 1 321 LED Backlight Removal 1 EID Se SA een NIRE Gane 322 Tools Requifed s 322 Removal 2 4 322 c uay a boy ewe toh mente 323 Pools Required eee ua ca eee NR Rog se 323 Removal Procedure ne Say BR bee BEY IU ea Sea RE HE 323 7 Post Repair Procedures Post Repait Procedures SU URN ARR CU UY D E NE C OLED 326 A Manual Changes Manual Changes d ERO da RUE CE TR ERN Sad e v EAE 330 pr LM rd 331 View Major Assemblies on page 236
24. 4882 SCPI CALCulate 1 PARameter 1 SELect Val I SCPI CALCulate 1 SELected DATA FDATa Next I For J 0 To 201 X J 1 0 2 2 Next J For J 0 To 201 For I 1 To 15 X J X J Val I J 2 Next I Y J Sqr X J 16 Next J Rms CVar Y SCPI CALCulate 1 SELected DATA FDATa Rms Chapter 2 63 D s bus 3 D 5 Pe rformance Tests 6 SYSTEM DYNAMIC RANGE TEST SCPI TRIGger SEQuence SINGl 5 4882 Ver E5070A Then SCPI CALCulate 1 PARameter 1 SELect SCPI CALCulate 1 SELected Function TYPE MAX SCPI CALCulate 1 SELected Function DOMain STARt 30000004 SCPI CALCulate 1 SELected Function DOMain STOP 1500000000 SCPI CALCulate 1 SELected Function DOMain STATe True SCPI CALCulate 1 SELected Function EXECute MaxValA SCPI CALCulate 1 SELected Function DATA SCPI CALCulate 1 SELected Function DOMain STARt 15000000004 SCPI CALCulate 1 SELected Function DOMain STOP 30000000004 SCPI CALCulate 1 SELected Function DOMain STATe True SCPI CALCulate 1 SELected Function EXECute MaxValB SCPI CALCulate 1 SELected Function DATA 64 frmDynamicRangel tx
25. Direction S23 Options 313 314 413 and 414 only Frequency range Hz IF bandwidth HzJ Test limit dB Test result dB 3M 1 5G 10 lt 120 15G 4G 10 lt 122 4G 6G 10 lt 120 6 G 7 5 G 10 lt 117 7 5 G 8 5 G 10 lt 110 3M 1 5G 3k lt 95 L5G 4G 3k lt 97 4G 6G 3k lt 95 66 756 3k lt 92 7 5 G 8 5 G 3k lt 85 Chapter 2 125 D 3 D 5 o Performance Tests E5071A Performance Test Record Direction S41 Options 413 and 414 only Frequency range Hz IF bandwidth Hz Test limit dB Test result dB 3 156 10 lt 120 1 5 G 4G 10 lt 122 4G 6G 10 lt 120 6G 7 5 G 10 lt 117 75G 85G 10 lt 110 1 54 3k lt 95 15G 4G 3k lt 97 4G 6G 3k lt 95 6G 7 5 G 3k lt 92 756 8506 3k lt 85 Direction S14 Options 41 3 and 414 only Frequency range Hz IF bandwidth Hz Test limit dB Test result dB 3M 1 5G 10 lt 120 15G 4G 10 lt 122 4G 6G 10 lt 120 68 7 5 G 10 lt 117 7 5 8 8 5 G 10 lt 110 3M 1 5G 3k lt 95 15G 4G 3k lt 97 4G 6G 3k lt 95 6G 7 5 G 3k lt 92 7 5 8 8 5 G 3k lt 85 Dynamic Accuracy Test Reference power level 20 dBm Direction S21 Power level dBm Test limit dB Test result dB Measurement uncertainty dB 0
26. o 0 o gt e o 2 Q Enabled Enabled Enabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled 223 Table 4 24 Figure 4 87 Table 4 25 Troubleshooting To configure the A20 Digital Motherboard and BIOS D800 16k shadow Disabled DC00 16k shadow Disabled Advanced Chipset Setup Advanced Chipset Setup options are displayed by choosing Advanced Chipset Setup using 1 and 1 keys and by pressing key at the BIOS Setup Utility main menu Then the window as shown in Figure 4 87 appears Compare the actual BIOS option settings with the default settings shown in Table 4 25 If there is any difference select it using and keys and change the option setting by pressing and J keys so that it becomes the same as the default setting If you want to exit from this page and return to main menu press Ee key Advanced Chipset Setup window AMIBIOS SETUP ADVANCED CHIPSET SETUP C 1998 American Megatrends Inc All Rights Reserved Available Options J House Legacu Support Disabled 64 68 Emulation Enabled SERR PERR HSC Handshake USHC Write Post BX GX Master L Multi Trans 32 PCI1 to PCIB Access Disabled Aperture Access Global Enable Disabled PCIO Agent To Aperture Access Menory Autosizing Support DRAM Integrity Mode DRAM Refresh Rate Menory Hole SDRAM CAS Latency SDRAM RASH to CASH delay ESC Exit 7 5 1 SDRAM RAS Precharge PgUp PgDn Modify SDRAM Precharge Control F2 F3 C
27. Cover Assembly Figure 5 18 Cover Assembly Table 5 17 Cover Assembly Ref Agilent Part Number C D Qty Description Desig 1 5070 60032 5 1 COVER ASSY 2 0515 1382 6 4 SCREW MACH M3 5 x 6FL 15 3 0515 0430 3 4 SCREW MACH M3 0 x 6 PN T10 262 Chapter 5 Replaceable Parts Replaceable Parts List A28 FDD Assembly Figure 5 19 A28 FDD Assembly e5070ase057 Table 5 18 A28 FDD Assembly Ref Agilent Part Number C D Qty Description Desig 1 E5070 01203 1 HOLDER FDD 2 0950 3334 1 A28 FDD 3 5 3 5070 04005 COVER FDD 4 0515 2146 4 SCREW MACH M3 0 x 4 FL T10 5 0515 2146 2 SCREW MACH M3 0 x 4 FL T10 e 2 e D D v D zi n Chapter 5 263 Replaceable Parts Replaceable Parts List A27 Mass Storage Disk Drive Assembly Figure 5 20 A27 Mass Storage Disk Drive Assembly e5070ase055 Table 5 19 A27 Mass Storage Disk Drive Assembly Ref Agilent Part Number C D Qty Description Desig 1 E5070 65030 1 A27 MASS STRAGE DISK DRIVE HDD 2 E5070 01205 1 HOLDER HDD 3 E5070 66530 DISK DR N o 4 0515 0372 2 SCREW MACH M3 0 x 8 PN T10 264 Chapter 5 Replaceable Parts Replaceable Parts List Figure 5 21 A27 Mass Storage Disk Drive Mount Assembly e5070ase056 Table 5 20 A27 Mass Storage Disk Drive Mount Assembly Ref Agilent Part Number C D Qty Description Desig
28. D s 3 D 5 o Performance Tests E5071A Performance Test Record Power level dBm Test limit dB Test result dB Measurement uncertainty dB 70 0 125 0 019 75 0 151 0 021 80 0 189 0 021 85 0 248 0 023 90 0 346 0 023 95 0 509 0 024 100 0 785 0 024 105 1 248 0 026 110 2 008 0 026 Uncorrected System Performance Test Port 1 System Frequency range Hz Test limit dB Test result dB performance Directivity 3M 3G lt 10 Directivity 3G 6G lt 6 Directivity 6G 85G lt 4 Source match 3M 3G lt 15 Source match 3G 6G lt 10 Source match 66 856 lt 10 Load match 3M 3G lt 17 Load match 3G 6G lt 12 Load match 6G 85G lt 12 Port 2 System Frequency range Hz Test limit dB Test result dB performance Directivity 3M 3G lt 10 Directivity 3G 6G lt 6 Directivity 6G 8 5G lt 4 Source match 3M 3G lt 15 130 Chapter 2 Performance Tests E5071A Performance Test Record System Frequency range Hz Test limit dB Test result dB performance Source match 3G 6G lt 10 Source match 6G 85G lt 10 Load match 3M 3G lt 17 Load match 3G 6G lt 12 Load match 6G 85G lt 12 Port 3 Options 313 314 413 and 414 only Sys
29. N m N m Cable e5070ase037 Chapter 2 91 Figure 2 58 e5070ase041 Step 30 Step 31 NOTE Step 32 Step 33 Performance Tests 8 UNCORRECTED SYSTEM PERFORMANCE TEST O S L calibration setup for uncorrected system performance test Opt 413 414 5070 5071 0000 9 0000 00 0900 aa 0000 lt gt 000 O aaa N m N m Cable OSL m m m Perform the full 2 port calibration Step 9 through 26 in accordance with Table 2 18 Perform Step 28 and 29 Record the directivity source match and load match values in the performance test record Port 2 table Options 313 314 413 and 414 only Perform Step 32 and 33 for the option 313 314 413 and 414 instruments only Perform the full 2 port calibration Step 6 through 26 in accordance with Table 2 18 Perform Step 28 and 29 Record the directivity source match and load match values in the performance test record Port 1 through Port 3 tables for Option 313 314 and Port 1 through Port 4 tables for Option 413 414 92 Chapter 2 Performance Tests 8 UNCORRECTED SYSTEM PERFORMANCE TEST Table 2 18
30. Test parameter Connect Sweep freq span IFBW Nop and RF power settings System correction Automatic Source match Open to Port 1 Full span 100 Hz BW 201 0 dBm System Short to Port 1 correction OFF Reflection tracking Load to Port 1 e Click button to continue the test The Error Term port 1 dialog box displays Now calibrating for a few seconds Wait until SHORT port 1 dialog box opens Chapter 4 191 es o 6 o gt e o 2 Q Figure 4 54 NOTE Troubleshooting Troubleshooting Using External Test f Connect an N type Short termination to Port 1 Click OK button to continue the test and wait until LOAD port 1 dialog box opens ge Connect a 50 Load termination to Port 1 i Click OK button to continue the test and wait for a few seconds j When the tests are completed the Error Term port 1 dialog box displays Pass or Fail for each test as shown in Figure 4 54 Error Term port 1 test results example E5071A Error Term x lt 8 5GHz Source Match Pass Pass Pass Directivity Pass Pass Pass lt 3GHz 7 5GHz lt 8 5GHz Reflection Tracking Pass Pass Pass Pass Pass Test Exit k Ifatleastone of the Error Term port 1 tests failed refer to Table 4 20 External Test Failure Troubleshooting Information 1 return to the External Test dialog box click Exit button 1
31. Power Gain 1 and A2 511 50 2 Source power Ref channel receiver gain for Port 1 Hit Hit S11 3GHz Source power and Ref channel receiver gain for Port 1 Hit HE HE S11 6GHz Source power and Ref channel receiver gain for Port 1 E5071A THE THE THE S22 50MHz Source power and Ref channel receiver gain for Port 2 HE S22 3GHz Source power and Ref channel receiver gain for Port 2 H THE S22 6GHz Source power and Ref channel receiver gain for Port 2 E5071A Hit HE 533 50 2 Source power Ref channel receiver gain for Port 3 Opt 313 314 413 414 THE THE S33 3GHz Source power and Ref channel receiver gain for port 3 Opt 313 314 413 414 THE THE THE S33 6GHz Source power and Ref channel receiver gain for Port 3 E5071A Opt 313 314 413 44 HE HE HE S44 50MHz Source power and Ref channel receiver gain for Port 4 Opt 413 414 THE S44 3GHz Source power and Ref channel receiver gain for Port 4 Opt 413 414 H THE S44 6GHz Source power and Ref channel receiver gain for Port 4 E5071A Opt 413 414 Hit Chapter 4 163 o 6 o gt e o 2 Q Troubleshooting Troubleshooting Using Internal Test
32. Performance Tests 8 UNCORRECTED SYSTEM PERFORMANCE TEST Table 2 18 Test setup Select Ports settings and calibration sequence Option Select Test setup Calibration Termination and cable connection Ports Figure for calibration 413 414 1 2 Figure 2 43 Port 1 Open Short Load and Same as Opt 213 214 N N cable Port 2 Open Short Load connected to Port 2 Refer to Step 9 through 26 for the details Figure 2 46 Thru N N cable between Port 1 and Port 2 Perform Step 28 and 29 Response Stimulus Port of Directivity Source match Load match test are as follows Response Port 1 Stimulus Port 2 Record the test results in the performance test record port 1 1 2 Figure 2 58 Port 1 Open Short Load and Same as Opt 213 214 N N cable Port 2 Open Short Load connected to Port 1 Figure 2 46 Thru N N cable between Port 1 and Port 2 Perform Step 28 and 29 Response Stimulus Port of Directivity Source match Load match test are as follows Response Port 2 Stimulus Port 1 Record the test results in the performance test record port 2 3 4 Figure 2 61 Port 3 Open Open to Port 3 Port 3 Short Short to Port 3 Port 3 Load Load to Port 3 Port 4 Open Open to the tip of N N cable Port 4 Short Short to the tip of N N cable Port 4 Load Load to the tip of N N cable Figure 2 62 Thru N N cable between Port 3 and Port 4 Perform Step 28 and 29 Response Stimulus
33. DA35 5 30 OUTPUT 712 amp in OUTPUT 712 at 5 OUTPUT 712 at b 30 DA40 10 30 OUTPUT 712 amp in OUTPUT 712 at a 10 OUTPUT 712 at b 30 DA40a 0 40 OUTPUT 712 amp in OUTPUT 712 at 0 OUTPUT 712 at b 40 DA45 5 40 OUTPUT 712 amp in OUTPUT 712 at 5 OUTPUT 712 at b 40 DASO 10 40 OUTPUT 712 amp_in OUTPUT 712 at_a 10 OUTPUT 712 at_b 40 DA50a 0 50 OUTPUT 712 amp in OUTPUT 712 at 0 OUTPUT 712 at b 50 DAS5 5 50 OUTPUT 712 amp in OUTPUT 712 at 5 OUTPUT 712 at 50 DA60 10 50 OUTPUT 712 amp in OUTPUT 712 at a 10 OUTPUT 712 at b 50 74 Chapter 2 Performance Tests 7 DYNAMIC ACCURACY TEST Table 2 13 Z5623A attenuator settings 1 setting A2 setting GPIB command dB dB DA60a 0 60 OUTPUT 712 amp_in OUTPUT 712 at 0 OUTPUT 712 at_b 60 DA65 5 60 OUTPUT 712 amp_in OUTPUT 712 at 5 OUTPUT 712 at_b 60 DA70 10 60 OUTPUT 712 amp_in OUTPUT 712 10 OUTPUT 712 at_b 60 DA70a 0 70 OUTPUT 712 amp_in OUTPUT 712 at 0 OUTPUT 712 at_b 70 D 3 D 5 75 5 70 OUTPUT 712 amp in OUTPUT 712 at 50 OUTPUT 712 at b 70 DA80 10 70 OUTPUT 712 amp in OUTPUT 712 at a 10 OUTPUT 712 at b 70 DA80a 0 80 OUTPUT 712 amp in OUTPUT 712 at 0 OUTPUT 712 at b 80
34. R o 6 o gt e o 2 Q Troubleshooting Troubleshooting Using Internal Test Table 4 1 Internal tests failure troubleshooting information Test Test group First failed test Test point objective Probable faulty board assembly ba Al A6 A2 Receiver A7 Att Source Sw T cont A14 A17 31 Al ALC SAV DAC100 Source level control on Al 32 SAV DAC2000 Source level control Al 33 SOP f 300k Source ALC 1 THE 34 LOP f 300k Local ALC on Al HHH 35 SOP f 1 3G Source ALC 1 HHH 36 LOP f 1 3G Local ALC on 1 HHH 37 SOP f 1 31G Source ALC on 1 HHH 38 LOP f 1 31G Local ALC on Al HHH 39 SOP f 2 1G Source ALC 1 HHH 40 LOP f 2 1G Local ALC on A1 HHH 41 SOP f 2 11G Source ALC 1 HHH 42 LOP f 2 11G Local ALC on A1 HHH 43 SOP f 4 25G Source ALC 1 HHH 44 LOP f 4 25G Local 1 HHH 162 Chapter 4 Table 4 1 Troubleshooting Troubleshooting Using Internal Test Internal tests failure troubleshooting information Test No Test group First failed test Test point objective Probable faulty board assembly Al Source A6 A2 Receiver Sw T cont 14 17 A7 Att 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56
35. The source power now is set to 0 dBm preset value Press C gt and to make a Single sweep measurement s dev standard deviation value will be displayed in the upper left corner of the graphic display Chapter 2 37 Table 2 4 Step 8 Step 9 Step 10 NOTE Step 11 Step 12 Step 13 Step 14 NOTE Step 15 Performance Tests 4 TRACE NOISE CW TEST Record the s dev value in the calculation sheet s dev column for the trace noise CW test Calculate the dB value of the trace noise level using the following equation and record the calculated value in the calculation sheet Trace noise level dB rms column Trace noise level 20 log 1 s dev x 10 6 Change the 5070 5071 center frequency in accordance with Table 2 4 and perform Step 7 through 9 for each frequency Trace noise CW test frequencies Center frequency setting E5070A E5071A 1 3 GHz 2 1 GHz 3 GHz 5071 only 4 25 GHz 7 5 GHz 8 5 GHz The CW trace noise level is tested at the minimum and maximum frequencies of the specified frequency range the frequencies where an internal frequency divider works between 1 3 GHz and 2 1 GHz and the frequency where the signal source frequency band is switched 4 25 GHz Record the calculated values of the trace noise level the performance test record Test result dB rms column for the trace noise CW test Press and
36. ae seni oye Mattoon 82 Contents Test Equipments ut eoe edes kd tle t eot t ue 82 Procedure a xe e quere oe eos e 82 E5070A E5071A Performance Test Calculation 99 Intioduction eoe RIS ieee aaa Seed eed re dee aS 99 2 RF Output Level Accuracy and Flatness 99 3 RE Output Level Linearity Test onere Cake OST idee REINO De 100 4 Tr ce Noise C W Test repe c TD eet me 102 7T Dynamic Accuracy 9s LLRRen UC See CU PR eu eH SEHE HI CR S 103 E5070A Performance Test 1 106 Frequency Accuracy Test e eere eu els ace o RU RR AL ENTER E 106 RF Output Level Accuracy and Flatness 106 RF Output Level Linearity Test 1 107 Trace Noise CW Test Magnitude 1 2 108 Crosstalk RI NUR RAMIS qu 110 System Dynamic Range Test ieu RERO E 110 Dynamic Accuracy Test 12125204 kutaka CHER MEI ERES 112 Uncorrected System Performance Test 115 E5071 A Performance Test Recordes rrr ov usuta LCS ROUEN ERBEN E CU ep
37. 1 My Computer 1 Insert the disk1 1 of 4 into the FDD of your computer 2 the Windows Explorer click 3 1 2 Floppy A and confirm the files 3 Right click on 3 1 2 Floppy A then click Properties The Properties dialog box appears 348 Appendix C Firmware Update Firmware Update 4 Enter the Label name in the Label box of properties dialog box General for the disk1 as shown in Figure C 2 and press the OK button Figure C 2 Properties Dialog Box example 3 Floppy A Properties 2 1x1 General Tools Compression cas Label DISK 1 Type 3 Inch Floppy Disk File system FAT Wi Used space 1 253 888 bytes 1 19MB Free space 203 776 bytes 199KB Capacity 1 457 664 bytes 1 38MB Drive OK Cancel af e5070ase221 5 Perform 1 through 4 for each disk NOTE If the label name is not assigned the firmware update for the E5070A E5071A will not be done correctly How to update the E5070A E5071A firmware It is possible to update the E5070A E5071A firmware bu not the following software by this procedure OS Operating System VBA Visual Basic for Application Calibration Constant Data The following is the procedure to update the E5070A E5071A firmware Step 1 Prepare the E5070A E5071A firmware installation disks four disks Step 2 Connect the mouse and the keyboard to the E5070A E5071A rear panel Then turn the E5070A E5071A on Step 3 Exit fr
38. 5071 Step 3 Press and select Lin Mag from display format menu Step 4 Set the controls as follows Control settings Key strokes IF Bandwidth 10 Hz C Avg Enter J W Averaging ON O Cf CH select Averaging Enter Averaging factor now is set to 16 preset value Number of points 101 Sweep Setup C gt C gt C gt C gt select Points Enter J 1 0 1 1 The source power now is set to 0 dBm preset value Response calibration Step 5 Press CHD D H CV and to select Cal Kit Step 6 Press lt gt F gt C gt and Enter to select 85032F NOTE If Cal Kit is set to 85032F press lt gt QC Cv to Chapter 2 43 Step 7 Step 8 Step 9 Step 10 Table 2 6 Step 11 Step 12 Step 13 Step 14 Step 15 Step 16 Performance Tests 5 CROSSTALK TEST select Restore Cal Kit Press C and to select Calibrate function Press lt gt C and to select Response Thru calibration Press to go down to Select Ports menu Select 2 1 S21 for the option 213 214 313 314 instruments and 3 2 S32 for the option 413 414 instruments as shown in the first row in Table 2 6 Select Ports settings for response calibration Option 213 214 313 314 413 414 1 2 1 S21 2 1 S21 3 2 S32 2 1 2 S12 1 2 S12 2 3 S23 3 Not required 3 2 S32 4 1 541 4 Not required 2 3 S23 1 4 S14 Press gt
39. Description Desig 1 E5070 61645 4 1 RF CABLE ASSY SRGD 2 E5070 61603 4 1 RF CABLE ASSY SRGD 3 E5070 61606 7 1 RF CABLE ASSY SRGD 4 E5070 61605 6 1 RF CABLE ASSY SRGD 5 E5070 61604 5 1 RF CABLE ASSY SRGD 6 E5070 61602 3 1 RF CABLE ASSY SRGD 7 0955 0208 5 1 U WAVE ATTN 4DB 8 E5070 61601 2 1 RF CABLE ASSY SRGD 9 1810 0118 1 2 TERMINATION COAX 248 Chapter5 Replaceable Parts Replaceable Parts List Front View Semirigid Cables Opt 214 Figure 5 10 Front View Semirigid Cables Opt 214 i e p Ieee cs Supe SS 5070 075 Table 5 9 Front View Semirigid Cables Opt 214 Ref Agilent Part Number C D Qty Description Desig 1 5070 61645 4 1 RF CABLE ASSY SRGD 2 E5070 61603 4 1 RF CABLE ASSY SRGD 3 E5070 61606 7 1 RF CABLE ASSY SRGD 4 E5070 61605 6 1 RF CABLE ASSY SRGD 5 E5070 61604 5 1 RF CABLE ASSY SRGD 6 E5070 61608 9 1 RF CABLE ASSY SRGD 7 0955 0208 5 1 U WAVE ATTN 4DB 8 E5070 61607 8 1 RF CABLE ASSY SRGD 9 1810 0118 1 2 TERMINATION COAX e 2 2 D D v 42 5 249 Replaceable Parts Replaceable Parts List Front View Semirigid Cables Opt 313 Figure 5 11 Front View Semirigid Cables Opt 313 TURPE ble eee NM sami 2 e5070ase076 250 9 L Tuff sm RE 7 950 04 Chapter5 Replaceable Parts
40. Disconnect the following cables Connected from the A28 FDD item 1 Connected from the mass storage disk assembly item 2 Connected from the A21 Analog Interface Board item 3 Connected to the A32 USB connector item 4 5 Remove two screws fastening the plate item 6 Remove two screws fastening the cover item 7 then remove the cover Disconnect the cable from the connector on the rear panel if the option 016 is installed Remove seven screws item 8 fastening the digital motherboard Lift the digital motherboard Chapter 6 295 Replacement Procedure A20 Digital Motherboard Replacement Figure 6 9 A20 Digital Motherboard Removal e5070ase236 Replacement Procedure Refer to Figure 6 9 for this procedure Step 1 Remove the CPU and CPU fan as described in CPU Removal on page 292 Step 2 Remove the DIMM modules as described in DIMM Module Removal on page 294 Step 3 Disassemble the guide plate item 9 from rear side of the mother board Step 4 Cut the cable tie item 10 holding the USB cable to the digital motherboard Step 5 Unsolder the USB cables Step 6 Solder the USB cables to the new board Step 7 Hold the USB cable to the new board by a cable tie Step 8 Remove a screw item 11 from a serial connector Step 9 Place the guide plate to the rear side of the new bo
41. aain 0000 og 0000 gt 0000 aqa aano oo lt gt oon ooo 00 aaa kL J N m N m Cable 86 Chapter2 Performance Tests 8 UNCORRECTED SYSTEM PERFORMANCE TEST Figure 2 45 Thru calibration setup for uncorrected system performance test Opt 313 314 E5070A 5071A CIC ae C9 aat 0000 0000 aa 04 aono lt D 3 D 5 N m N m Cable e5070ase011 Figure 2 46 Thru calibration setup for uncorrected system performance test Opt 413 414 E5070A 5071A N m N m Cable e5070ase013 Step 22 Press C gt and to select Transmission calibration and to go down to its menu Step 23 Press to perform Port 1 2 Thru calibration Step 24 Perform Return Step 25 Press lt gt C gt Enter to Perform Done Step 26 Press and verify that the Correction function is set to ON Chapter 2 87 Performance Tests 8 UNCORRECTED SYSTEM PERFORMANCE TEST Directivity source match and load match test Step 27 Press Load Project Open uncorrected system test vba NOTE The prog
42. replace the faulty board assembly as shown in Table 4 20 Table 4 20 External test failure troubleshooting information Test Test group First failed Test objective Probable faulty board assembly No test Al A6Sw T A2 Receiver A23 Source cont Hnd 14 17 1 Power Gain S12 50MHz Source power THE THE THE A1 and A2 for Port 2 and receiver gain for Port 1 2 S12 3GHz Source power THE THE THE for Port 2 and receiver gain for Port 1 3 S12 6GHz Source power THE THE THE for Port 2 and receiver gain for Port 1 E5071A 4 521 50 2 Source power THE THE HH for Port 1 and receiver gain for Port 2 5 S21 3GHz Source power THE H THE for Port 1 and receiver gain for Port 2 6 S21 6GHz Source power THE THE THE for Port 1 and receiver gain for Port 2 E5071A R o 0 o gt e o 2 Chapter 4 209 Table 4 20 Troubleshooting Troubleshooting Using External Test External test failure troubleshooting information Test No Test group First failed test Test objective Probable faulty board assembly Al Source A6Sw T cont A2 Receiver A23 Hnd 14 17 10 11 12 S31 50MHz Source power for Port 1 and receiver gain for Port 3 Opt 313 314 413 41 4 HH HH S31 3GHz Source power for Port 1 and receiver gain
43. 192 168 0 2 255 255 0 IP Address Subnet Mask 5070 276 Step 9 By restarting the 5070 5071 the LAN settings take effect Verify the E5070A E5071A LAN settings and response to a command from the external computer as follows a On the external computer click Start button in the Windows Start menu bar using a mouse b Click Programs and MS DOS Prompt or Command Prompt to open the DOS Command Prompt window Type a ping command followed by the 5070 5071 IP address as ping XXX XXX XXX XXX where is the IP address such as 192 168 0 1 assigned in step 6 d Press key on the keyboard d The external computer displays a message of ping command response from the E5070A E5071A Figure 4 31 shows an example of normal result that indicates the IP address packet size and a response time counted by the computer The ping command is repeated 4 times Figure 4 31 MS DOS Prompt Example of normal ping command test result Je 0 1 C NWINDOW S gt _ 174 Chapter4 Figure 4 32 Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Step 4 Step 5 Step 6 Step 7 Troubleshooting Function Specific Troubleshooting Ifthe E5070A E5071A doesn t return the response the external computer displays a message of Request timed out as shown in Figure 4 32 In this case a failure in the A20 digital motherboard is suspected E
44. 308 Chapter 6 Replacement Procedure 7 Source Step Attenuator Removal Option 214 314 and 414 Figure 6 18 7 Source Step Attenuator Removal 2 o 3 5 X 1 e50 0ase230 Chapter 6 309 Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Step 4 Step 5 Step 6 Step 7 Replacement Procedure A10 Analog Motherboard Removal A10 Analog Motherboard Removal Tools Required Pozidriv screwdriver pt size 2 medium where Pozidriv screws are in use TORX screwdriver T10 715 T20 where TORX screws in use Flat edge screwdriver Open end wrench 5 16 inch and 5 8 inch Open end torque wrench 5 16 inch set to 10 in Ib for reconnecting SMA connector Procedure Remove the outer cover as described in Outer Cover Removal on page 282 Remove the front frame as described in Front Panel Removal on page 284 Remove the source board as described in A1 Source Board Removal on page 297 Remove the receiver board as described 2 Receiver Board Removal on page 299 Remove the receiver board as described in A50 ATX Power Supply Assembly Removal on page 290 Disconnect the cables connected to the A10 analog motherboard Remove the nine T10 screws fastening the A10 analog mother board 310 Chapter 6 e5070ase246 kas Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Step 4 Figure 6 19 Replacement Procedure A21 Analog Interface Board
45. Front View Analog Figure 5 7 Front View Analog e5070ase283 Table 5 6 Front View Analog Ref Agilent Part Number C D Qty Description Desig 1 E5071 66551 2 1 Al SOURCE BOARD E5071 69551 8 1 Al SOURCE BOARD Exchange 2 See Table 5 23 1 A2 RECEIVER BOARD 3 See Table 5 23 1 A2 RECEIVER BOARD Opt 31x 41x 4 See Table 5 21 1 8 RFSWITCH ASSEMBLY 5 5087 7137 7 1 8 SWITCH RF SPDT Opt 31x 41x 6 See Table 5 22 1 STEP ATTENUATOR ASSEMBLY Opt 214 314 414 246 Chapter 5 Replaceable Parts Replaceable Parts List Front View Miscellaneous Parts Figure 5 8 Front View Miscellaneous Parts e5070ase125 Table 5 7 Front View Miscellaneous Parts Ref Agilent Part Number Qty Description Desig 1 0515 1410 1 2 SCREW MACH M3 0 x 20 PN T10 2 0515 0372 2 4 SCREW MACH M3 0 x 8 PN T10 3 0515 0372 2 2 SCREW MACH M3 0 x 8 PN T10 4 0515 0372 2 2 SCREW MACH M3 0 x 8 PN T10 Opt 31x 41x 5 0515 0372 2 2 SCREW MACH M3 0 x 8 T10 6 E5070 01212 5 1 PLATE e 2 e D D v D n Chapter 5 247 Figure 5 9 e5070ase074 Replaceable Parts Replaceable Parts List Front View Semirigid Cables Opt 213 Front View Semirigid Cables Opt 213 e X 225 h Oa i Table 5 8 Front View Semirigid Cables Opt 213 Ref Agilent Part Number C D Qty
46. Go DH select Points Enter 1 9 1 x1 The source power now is set to 0 dBm preset value Response Thru calibration Press C gt CD gt and to select Cal Kit Press C gt C gt C and to select 85032F If Cal Kit is set to 85032F press CY gt QC Co Cb to select Restore Cal Kit Press C and to select Calibrate function Press C gt C gt and to select Response Thru calibration Press to go down to Select Ports menu Select 2 1 21 for the option 213 214 instruments and 3 2 S32 for the option 313 314413 414 instruments as shown in the first row Table 2 8 Select Ports settings for response calibration Option 213 214 313 314 413 414 1 2 1 S21 3 2 S32 3 2 S32 2 1 2 S12 2 3 S23 2 3 S23 3 Not required 2 1 S21 4 1 541 4 Not required 1 2 S12 1 4 514 Step 11 Press lt gt lt gt and to perform Isolation calibration Step 12 Disconnect the load and connect the N N cable as shown following figures Opt 213 214 Figure 2 22 Opt 313 314 Figure 2 23 Opt 413 414 Figure 2 24 54 Chapter2 Figure 2 22 e5070ase010 Figure 2 23 e5070ase012 Performance Tests 6 SYSTEM DYNAMIC RANGE TEST Thru calibration setup for system dynamic range test setup Opt 213 214 E5070A 5071A N m N m
47. Ref Agilent Part Number C D Qty Description Desig 1 0515 0372 2 5 SCREW MACH M3 0 x 8 PN T10 2 0515 1946 8 2 SCREW MACH M3 0 x 6 FL T10 3 0515 1946 8 3 SCREW MACH M3 0 x 6 FL T10 4 0515 0430 3 3 SCREW MACH M3 0 x 6 PN T10 5 0515 1382 6 4 SCREW MACH M3 5 x 6 FL T10 6 0515 0372 2 4 SCREW MACH M3 0 x 8 PN T10 7 0515 1946 8 3 SCREW MACH M3 0 x 6 FL T10 Opt 1 5 8 0515 2216 7 4 SCREW MACH MA 0 x 40 PN T20 9 0515 0964 8 4 SCREW MACH 0 x 45 PN 10 0380 4832 0 2 SPACER 334 Appendix A Manual Changes Change 1 Rear View Figure A 4 Rear View gt e5070ase054 S Table A 5 Rear View 5 Ref Agilent Part Number C D Qty Description 9 Desig 1 0515 0372 2 2 SCREW MACH M3 0 x 8 T10 2 0515 0372 2 4 SCREW MACH M3 0 x 8 PN T10 3 1250 0252 6 1 BNC CONNECTOR Opt 1 5 2950 0035 8 1 NUT HEX DBL CHAM Opt 1 5 2190 0102 8 1 WSHR LK INTL Opt 1 5 6960 0041 1 1 PLUG HOLE 4 2950 0054 1 2 NUT HEX DBL CHAM 2190 0054 9 2 WSHR LK INTL T 5 0515 1402 5 4 SCREW MACH M3 5 x 8 PN T15 6 5070 04004 9 1 COVER CONNECTOR 7 2200 0155 4 2 SCREW 4 40 Appendix 335 Table
48. Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Step 4 Troubleshooting Function Specific Troubleshooting To Check the FDD Procedure Connect the external keyboard to the E5070A E5071A rear panel connector Turn the instrument on Insert a 1 44 MB floppy disk formatted in DOS format into the FDD slot Press key and click Save State in the menu bar Click File Dialog to open the Save As dialog box Select 3 1 2 Floppy from Save in pull down menu Enter e5070a in the file name box from the keyboard Click Save button Press key and click Recall State in the menu bar Click File Dialog to open the Open dialog box Select 3 1 2 Floppy from Look in pull down menu Select e5070a file from the file menu or enter e5070a in the file name box Click Open button If the file save or recall operation fails a failure in the A28 FDD or the flat cable between the A28 and A20 digital motherboard is suspected To Check the Video output Procedure Connect an external VGA color monitor to the Video output port on the E5070A E5071A rear panel Turn the external monitor on Verify that the monitor screen view 15 the same as the display on the LCD If the monitor screen view 15 abnormal a failure seems in the A26 LCD interface card To Check the External Trigger Input Procedure Press key to initialize the 5070 5071 Press key Click Trigger Source and then External in t
49. Tested by Frequency Accuracy Test Without Option 1 5 Frequency Hz Testlimit Hz Test result Hz Measurement uncertainty Hz 50M 250 11 3G 15 k 0 64k With Option 1 5 Frequency Hz Testlimit Hz Test result Hz Measurement uncertainty Hz 50M 50 11 3G 3 00 k k 0 64 Output Level Accuracy and Flatness Test Level Accuracy Test Port 1 Power level Frequency Test limit Test result Measurement dBm Hz dB dB uncertainty dB 0 50M 0 65 0 13 Level Flatness Test Port 1 at 0dBm relative to 50 MHz reference Frequency Hz Test limit dB Test result dB Measurement uncertainty dB 10M 1 0 0 30 550 M 1 0 0 14 1 05 G 1 0 0 14 1 55G 1 0 0 14 Chapter 2 117 D s bus 3 D 5 o Performance Tests E5071A Performance Test Record Frequency Hz Testlimit dB Test result dB Measurement uncertainty dB 2 05 G 1 0 0 16 3 00 G 1 0 0 16 4 25G 1 0 0 21 5 05 G 1 0 0 21 6 05 G 1 0 0 26 7 05 G 1 0 0 26 8 05 G 1 0 0 26 8 50G 1 0 0 26 RF Output Level Linearity Test CW Frequency 10 MHz relative to 0 dBm reference Power level dBm Test limit dB Test result dB Measurem
50. Therefore do not attempt to use the system in ways other than those described in this manual or to install Windows based software including anti virus software for ordinary PCs as doing so may cause malfunctions Also note the followings Donot update the Windows operating system installed in this machine to the Windows operating system for ordinary PCs Doing so will cause malfunctions Do not attempt to update VBA Visual Basic for Applications software installed in this machine to its equivalent developed for ordinary PCs Doing so will cause malfunctions Do not allow any computer virus to infect the system This machine has no virus check function nor anti virus software installed Agilent Technologies will not be held liable for any failure or damage arising from negligence regarding these prohibitions and warnings If the pre installed software is damaged somehow resulting in errant behavior by the machine perform a system recovery For further details of system recovery refer to Appendix B 16 Chapter 1 General Information Organization of Service Manual Organization of Service Manual O 0 0 y 2 3 o 5 Tabs are used to divide the major chapter and appendix of this manual The contents of each chapter and appendix in this manual is as follows Chapter 1 General Information The Service Manual is a guide to servicing the E5070A E5071A ENA Series Ne
51. 0 207 0 015 126 Chapter 2 Performance Tests E5071A Performance Test Record Power level dBm Test limit dB Test result dB Measurement uncertainty dB 5 0 075 0 015 10 0 042 0 012 15 0 031 0 012 25 0 030 0 0087 30 0 035 0 0087 35 0 040 0 012 40 0 045 0 012 45 0 056 0 015 50 0 067 0 015 55 0 078 0 017 60 0 091 0 017 65 0 106 0 019 70 0 125 0 019 75 0 151 0 021 80 0 189 0 021 85 0 248 0 023 90 0 346 0 023 95 0 509 0 024 100 0 785 0 024 105 1 248 0 026 110 2 008 0 026 Direction S12 Power level dBm Test limit dB Test result dB Measurement uncertainty dB 0 0 207 0 015 5 0 075 0 015 10 0 042 0 012 15 0 031 0 012 25 0 030 0 0087 Chapter 2 127 D s 3 D 5 o Performance Tests E5071A Performance Test Record Power level dBm Test limit dB Test result dB Measurement uncertainty dB 30 0 035 0 0087 35 0 040 0 012 40 0 045 0 012 45 0 056 0 015 50 0 067 0 015 55 0 078 0 017 60 0 091 0 017 65 0 106 0 019 70 0 125 0 019 75 0 15
52. 1 1410 1580 5 1 BUSHING 2 E5070 24011 0 4 SPACER 3 0515 0665 6 4 SCREW MACH M3 0 x 14 PN T10 4 E5070 01206 7 1 BRACKET HDD 5 0515 0374 4 4 SCREW MACH M3 0 x 10 PN T10 Chapter 5 265 e 2 2 D D v D 42 Replaceable Parts Replaceable Parts List AS RF Switch Assembly Figure 5 22 8 RF Switch Assembly e5070aseD58 Table 5 21 8 RF Switch Assembly Ref Agilent Part Number C D Qty Description Desig 1 5087 7137 7 1 SWITCH RF SPDT Opt 21x 31x 41x 2 0515 1410 1 2 SCREW MACH M3 0 x 20 10 Opt 21x 31x 41x 3 5087 7137 7 1 SWITCH SPDT Opt 31x 41x 4 0515 1410 1 2 SCREW MACH M3 0 x 20 PN T10 Opt 31x 41x 5 E5070 01209 0 1 PLATE SWITCH 266 Chapter5 Replaceable Parts Replaceable Parts List 7 Source Step Attenuator Assembly Opt 214 314 414 Figure 5 23 7 Source Step Attenuator Assembly Opt 214 314 414 5070 059 Table 5 22 Source Step Attenuator Assembly Opt 214 314 414 Ref Agilent Part Number C D Qty Description Desig 1 33321 60059 8 1 7 Source Step Attenuator 2 E5070 01213 6 1 PLATE 3 0515 0372 2 2 SCREW MACH M3 0 x 8 PN T10 e 2 D D o n Chapter 5 267 Figure 5 24 25070 0 Replaceable Parts Replaceable Parts List A2 Receiver Board Assembly A2 Receiver Board Assembly
53. 1 5 GHz to 3 GHz IFBW 10 Hz 5071 95 dB 23 5 3 MHz to 1 5 GHz IFBW 3 kHz 97 dB 23 5 1 5 GHz to 4 GHz IFBW 3 kHz 95 dB 23 5 C 4 GHz to 6 GHz IFBW 3 kHz 92 dB 23 5 C 6 GHz to 7 5 GHz IFBW 3 kHz 85 dB 23 5 C 7 5 GHz to 8 5 GHz IFBW 3 kHz 120 dB 23 5 C 3 MHz to 1 5 GHz IFBW 10 Hz 122 dB 23 5 C 1 5 GHz to 4 GHz IFBW 10 Hz 120 dB 23 5 4 GHz to 6 GHz IFBW 10 Hz 117 dB 23 5 C 6 GHz to 7 5 GHz IFBW 10 Hz 110 dB 23 5 7 5 GHz to 8 5 GHz IFBW 10 Hz NOTE The specification applies when the response and isolation calibration is performed and averaging factor is 16 Test equipment Coaxial cable with Type N m connectors 61 cm 24 in N6314A p n 8120 8862 Chapter 2 51 Performance Tests 6 SYSTEM DYNAMIC RANGE TEST Type N m 50 Q Load termination 2 ea part of 85032F 54D 33E 50D with Type N adapter Procedure Step 1 Connect a load termination to each test port as shown in the following figures Opt 213 214 Figure 2 19 Opt 313 314 Figure 2 20 Opt 413 414 Figure 2 21 Figure 2 19 Isolation calibration setup for system dynamic range test Opt 213 214 E5070A 5071A aa 0000 aa 2900 0000 aa ed 0000 oo OOO pn PT Gree Q Q
54. 120 3G 6G 10 lt 110 6G 7 5 G 10 lt 100 7 5 G 8 5 G 10 lt 90 System Dynamic Range Test Direction S21 Options 213 214 313 and 314 only Frequency range Hz IF bandwidth Hz Test limit dB Test result dB 3M L5G 10 lt 120 15G 4G 10 lt 122 4G 6G 10 lt 120 66 756 10 lt 117 75G 85G 10 lt 110 3M 1 5G 3k lt 95 1 5G 4G 3k lt 97 4G 6G 3k lt 95 6G 7 5G 3k lt 92 7 586 8 5 G 3k lt 85 Direction S12 Options 21 3 214 313 and 314 only Frequency range Hz IF bandwidth Hz Test limit dB Test result dB 3M 1 5G 10 lt 120 1 5G 4G 10 lt 122 4G 6G 10 lt 120 6G 7 5G 10 lt 117 7 5 G 8 5 G 10 lt 110 124 Chapter 2 Performance Tests E5071A Performance Test Record Frequency range Hz IF bandwidth HzJ Test limit dB Test result dB 3M 1 5G 3k lt 95 15G 4G 3k lt 97 4G 6G 3k lt 95 66 756 3k lt 92 7 5 G 8 5 G 3k lt 85 Direction S32 Options 313 314 413 414 only Frequency range Hz IF bandwidth HzJ Test limit dB Test result dB 3M 1 5G 10 lt 120 15G 4G 10 lt 122 4G 6G 10 lt 120 6 G 7 5 G 10 lt 117 7 5 G 8 5 G 10 lt 110 3M 1 5G 3k lt 95 15G 4G 3k lt 97 4G 6G 3k lt 95 66 756 3k lt 92 7 5 G 8 5 G 3k lt 85
55. 279 Replacement Procedure Replacing an Assembly Replacing an Assembly The following steps show the sequence to replace an assembly in a E5070A E5071A RF Network Analyzer 1 Identify the faulty group Refer to Chapter 4 Troubleshooting 2 Order a replacement assembly Refer to Chapter 5 Replaceable Parts 3 Replace the faulty assembly and determine what adjustments are necessary Refer to This chapter and Chapter 7 Post Repair Procedures 4 Perform the necessary adjustments Refer to Chapter 3 Adjustment 5 Perform the necessary performance tests Refer to Chapter 2 Performance Tests WARNING These servicing instructions are for use by qualified personnel only To avoid electrical shock do not perform servicing unless you qualified to so WARNING The opening of covers or removal of parts is likely to expose dangerous voltages Disconnect the instrument from its power supply CAUTION Many of the assemblies in this instrument are very susceptible to damage from ESD electrostatic discharge Perform the following procedures only at a static safe workstation and wear a grounding strap 280 Chapter 6 Replacement Procedure Required Tools 2 o 3 5 X Required Tools The following tools are required for rep
56. 5 8 amp 2 x 2 5 gt 7 o e o e Fi 5 x g o 5 2 2 Source Board 4 4 gt 2 Receiver RF Board A 4 o E Receiver IF Board V Switch 4 4 Crystal Oven Opt 1 5 Attenuator Opt 214 314 and 414 4 Hard Disk Drive Analog Interface Board 4 Writing ID This item writes the serial number and the option structure into the 5070 5071 Required equipment for the writing ID None Frequency Reference Adjustment The purpose of this procedure is to adjust the 10 MHz frequency reference on the source board Chapter 3 135 Adjustment Required Adjustment after Replacing Assembly Required equipment for frequency reference adjustment Description Recommended Model Frequency Counter Agilent 53181A Opt 010 Frequency Standard Agilent 5071 BNC m BNC m Cable 61 cm Agilent p n 8120 1839 Oven Reference Adjustment The purpose of this procedure is to adjust the frequency of the crystal oven on the crystal oven assembly Required equipment for the oven reference adjustment Description Recommended Model Frequency Counter Agilent 53181A Opt 010 Frequency Standard Agilent 5071A BNC m BNC m Cable 61 cm Agilent p n 8120 1839 IF Range Gain Phase Adjustment The purpose of this procedure is to adjust difference of the gain and phase between
57. 5071 test port output signal The level accuracy is checked for an output power level setting of 0 dBm at 50 MHz using a power meter The frequency flatness is tested by measuring the power level at 12 frequency points from 10 MHz to 8 5 GHz and calculating the differences of the power meter readings from the level at 50 MHz Specification Level accuracy lt 0 65 dBm 23 5 C 50 MHz 0 dBm Flatness E5070A lt 1dBm 23 5 C 10 MHz to 3 GHz 0 dBm relative to 50 MHz 5071 lt dBm 23 5 C 10 MHz to 8 5 GHz 0 dBm relative to 50 MHz The level accuracy and flatness specifications apply to Port 1 only The levels for other ports are given as supplemental performance characteristic Step 1 Step 2 Test equipment Power meter Agilent E4419A B Power sensor Agilent E4412A Procedure Connect the power sensor to the power meter Calibrate the power meter for the power sensor used Connect the test equipment as shown in Figure 2 3 Chapter 2 29 D 3 D 5 Figure 2 3 Performance Tests 2 OUTPUT LEVEL ACCURACY AND FLATNESS TEST RF output level accuracy and flatness test setup 5070 5071 e5070ase009 NOTE Step 3 Step 4 Step 5 Step 6 Power Sensor Figure 2 3 shows the test se
58. 85033E 85050D with Type N adapter Procedure Perform the following procedure after step 11 a Click Dynamic Range in the pull down menu of the Test List box b Click Test button in the dialog box to open the Dynamic Range tests dialog box The dialog box displays a matrix of S parameter settings and test frequency ranges as shown in Figure 4 46 The Dynamic Range tests are performed sequentially for all the test ports receiver channels Dynamic Range tests dialog box example E5071A Opt 413 414 Dynamic Range x lt 1 5GHz lt 7 5GHz lt 8 5GHz 512 NotDone Not Done NotDone NotDone 513 NotDone NotDone NotDone Not Done 514 NotDone NotDone Not Done Not Done 521 NotDone NotDone Not Done Not Done 523 NotDone NotDone NotDone Not Done 531 NotDone NotDone NotDone Done 532 NotDone NotDone NotDone Not Done 534 NotDone NotDone NotDone Done 541 NotDone NotDone Not Done 543 Done Done Exit Click Test button in the dialog box Then SHORT all ports dialog box opens as shown in Figure 4 47 SHORT all ports dialog box Connect SHORTS to all ports d Connect N type Short terminations to all the test ports Chapter 4 o 0 o gt e o 2 187 NOTE Table 4 9 Figure 4 48 Troubleshooting Troubleshooting Using External Test For more information on the Dynamic Range tests
59. Cable Thru calibration setup for system dynamic range test setup Opt 313 314 E5070A 5071A N m N m Cable Chapter 2 55 D 3 D 5 Figure 2 24 e5070ase018 NOTE Step 13 Step 14 Step 15 Step 16 Step 17 Step 18 Step 19 Step 20 Step 21 Performance Tests 6 SYSTEM DYNAMIC RANGE TEST Thru calibration setup for system dynamic range test setup Opt 413 414 E5070A 5071A aa 0000 oa 2000 QQ lt gt 9050 aa 0000 gt onog aaa aaa um N m N m Cable To avoid possible variance in measured values do not touch or move the N N cable during measurements Press 4 gt and Enter to perform Thru calibration Press C gt lt gt to perform Done Press C gt C4 CH to select Select Ports in reference to the position of Done and press Enter Change Select Ports setting as shown in the second row in Table 2 8 Press gt to perform Thru calibration Disconnect the N N cable and connect the Load termination to each test port as shown in the following figures Opt 213 214 Figure 2 19 Opt 313 314 Figure 2 20 Opt 413 414 Figure 2 21 Press gt and Enter to per
60. Click OK button and wait for about 40 seconds to exit the Measurement View Then windows desktop screen appears with 4 icons My Computer Recycle Bin Network Neighborhood and Restart as Instr If you wish to return to the Measurement View double click Restart as Instr icon Then click OK button in Restart as Instr dialog box If you need to shut down the E5070A E5071A and again turn on perform in accordance with the following procedure a To get Start menu bar displayed move the pointer to the bottom of the screen with mouse b Click Start and Shut Down in the pull up menu Shut Down Windows dialog box opens Click Shut down button in the dialog box d Click OK button in the dialog box Chapter 4 141 5 o 6 o gt e o 2 Q Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Step 4 NOTE Troubleshooting To Troubleshoot the Instrument Troubleshoot the Instrument This section describes basic procedural flow of troubleshooting when servicing the 5070 5071 The primary procedural tool in this section is the flowchart The flowchart contains entire troubleshooting path from a failure symptom to the isolation of faulty assembly and will direct you to the completion of repair in an ordinary manner through the possible failure symptoms Reference letters Yes No on the flowcharts point to procedural steps that briefly explain the troubleshooting method to b
61. DA40 50 10 40 Sxy x R DA50 Sxy x R 4 DA40b Pm DA50 Pm DA40b gt True D A Running D A dB 50 True D A dB DA40 Chapter 2 103 Performance Tests E5070A E5071A Performance Test Calculation Sheet Name Al 2 Power Pm dB Sxy dB dB Port SxyxR Running True setting Port Char ON Char OFF dB D A D A dB 50 0 50 Adjust source power for Pm db 0 Sxy x R dB 50 Sxy x R dB DA50 DA50b 0 50 REF50 REF50 DA55 5 50 Sxy x R DASS Sxy x R DA50b Pm DA55 Pm DA50b gt True D A Running D A dB DA55 True D A dB DA50 DA60 10 50 Sxy x R DA60 Sxy x R DA50b Pm DA60 DA50b gt True D A Running D A dB DA60 True D A dB DA50 DA60a 0 60 Adjust source power for Pm db DA60a Sxy x R dB DA60a Sxy x R dB DA60 DA60b 0 60 REF60 REF60 DA65 5 60 Sxy x R DA65 Sxy x R DA60b Pm DA65 Pm DA60b True D A Running D A dB DA65 True D A dB DA60 DA70 10 60 Sxy x R D
62. Figure 2 16 Opt 413 414 Figure 2 17 Figure 2 15 Crosstalk test setup Opt 213 214 E5070A 5071A 0000 0000 aa eda 2000 an lt aaa aaa Q Q Ill SHORT 5070 015 Figure 2 16 Crosstalk test setup Opt 313 314 5070 5071 e5070ase016 46 Chapter 2 Figure 2 17 e5070ase019 Step 20 NOTE Step 21 Table 2 7 Step 22 Performance Tests 5 CROSSTALK TEST Crosstalk test setup Opt 413 414 E5070A 5071A 9 aa 0000 GQ lt 0000 aa lt 00 aaa aaad Q V N SHORT D s 3 D 5 Program download test program shown Program 2 1 Also set a UserForm window to enable the test result output data to be displayed An example of the UserForm window i
63. Ignore ESC Exit 74 5 1 Device 1 Primary slave IDE Ignore PgUp PgDn Modify Device 2 Secondary master IDE Ignore F2 F3 Color Power Management Mode APM Power Management APM Enabled Power Button Function On Off Green PC monitor Power State Off Video Power Down Mode Disabled 226 Chapter 4 Table 4 26 Troubleshooting To configure the A20 Digital Motherboard and BIOS Hard Disk Power Down Mode Disabled Hard Disk Time Out Minute Disabled Power Saving Type Sleep Standby Suspend Timer Unit 4 Standby Time Disabled Suspend Time Out Disabled Slow Clock Ratio 50 62 5 Display Activity Ignore Device 6 Serial port 1 Ignore Device 7 Serial port 2 Ignore Device 8 Parallel port Ignore Device 5 Floppy Disk Ignore Device 0 Primary master IDE Ignore Device 1 Primary slave IDE Ignore Device 2 Secondary master IDE Ignore Device 3 Secondary slave IDE Ignore LAN Wake Up Disabled PCI Plug and Play Setup PCI Plug and Play Setup options are displayed by choosing PCI Plug and Play Setup using J and keys and by pressing key at the BIOS Setup Utility main menu Then the window as shown in Figure 4 89 appears Compare the actual BIOS option settings with the default settings shown in Table 4 27 If there is any difference select it using and 1 keys and change the option setting by pressing and keys so that it becomes the same as the default setting If you want to exit from this page and return to main me
64. Refer to Figure A 6 for this procedure Remove the outer cover as described in Outer Cover Removal on page 282 Remove the handler I O board as described in Post Repair Procedures on page 326 Disconnect two flat cables item land 2 from the analog mother board Disconnect the power supply cables item 3 4 and 5 Release all cables clamped on the power supply holder Remove the screws item 6 fastening the power supply holder Remove the screws item 7 from the rear panel Slide the power supply assembly toward front side with the mount then lift them Cut the cable tie item 8 if you replace the power supply gt amp 5 3 amp 5 2 Don t forget to clamp cables after replacement Appendix A 339 Figure A 6 e5070ase265 Manual Changes Change 1 Power Supply Assembly Removal Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 A20 Digital Motherboard Replacement on page 295 Change as follows Tools Required Pozidriv screwdriver pt size 2 medium where Pozidriv screws are in use TORX screwdriver T10 T15 T20 where TORX screws in use Flat edge screwdriver Plier Cutting plier or scissors Soldering iron Removal Procedure Refer to Figur
65. SELected FUNCtion DO SCPI CALCulate 1 SELected FUNCtion DO SCPI CALCulate 1 SELected FUNCtion EXE MaxValE SCPI CALCulate 1 SELected FU frmCrossTalk2 txtVall Text CSng 20 frmCrossTalk2 txtVal2 Text CSng 20 frmCrossTalk2 txtVal3 Text CSng 20 frmCrossTalk2 txtVal4 Text CSng 20 frmCrossTalk2 Show End If End Sub Function 10910 X 10410 Log X Log 10 End Function 50 Cute NCtion DATA ain STARt 75000000004 ain STOP 8500000000 ain STATe True Cute NCtion DATA 10910 MaxValB 0 Log10 MaxValC 0 D 0 10910 MaxValE 0 10910 MaxVal Chapter 2 Performance Tests 6 SYSTEM DYNAMIC RANGE TEST 6 SYSTEM DYNAMIC RANGE TEST Description This test checks the system dynamic range for the receiver ports of the E5070A E5071A The system dynamic range is tested by performing an Isolation measurement 16 times with 101 sweep points for specified frequency ranges after the response and isolation calibrations are performed and calculating the RMS deviation value from the 16 N measurement data for each sweep frequency point The maximum RMS deviation value in 0 each frequency range is extracted determine the system dynamic range performance d E S Specification 5070 95 dB 23 5 3 MHz to 1 5 GHz IFBW 3 kHz 97 dB 23 5 C 1 5 GHz to 3 GHz IFBW 3 kHz 120 dB 23 5 C 3 MHz to 1 5 GHz IFBW 10 Hz 122 dB 23 5 C
66. Step 5 Disconnect the three cables item 5 6 and 7 from the front panel NOTE Keep the mylar cable connected Figure 6 2 Front Panel Removal 5070 231 284 Chapter 6 Replacement Procedure A27 Mass Storage Disk Drive Replacement A27 Mass Storage Disk Drive Replacement 2 o 3 5 X R Tools Required Pozidriv screwdriver pt size 2 medium where Pozidriv screws are in use TORX screwdriver T10 T15 T20 where TORX screws in use Removal Procedure Refer to Figure 6 3 for this procedure Step 1 Remove the outer cover as described in Outer Cover Removal on page 282 Step 2 Remove the four TORX T10 screws item 1 fastening the A27 mass storage disk drive Step 3 Lift the mass storage disk drive Figure 6 3 A27 Mass Storage Disk Drive Removal e5070ase226 Replacement Procedure Step 1 Reverse the order of the removal procedure Restore Backup Files onto
67. button to continue the test and wait for a few seconds i Repeat step form to h for all of the selected test ports j When the tests are completed the Error Term dialog box displays Pass or Fail for each test as shown in Figure 4 77 Error Term test results example E5071A lt 1 5GHz lt 8 56 2 Port 1 Source Match Pass Pass Pass Pass Directivity Pass Pass Pass Pass Refl Tracking Pass Pass Pass Pass Port 2 Source Match Pass Pass Pass Pass Directivity Pass Pass Pass Pass Tracking Pass Pass Pass Pass Port 3 Source Match Pass Pass Pass Pass Directivity Pass Pass Pass Pass Refl Tracking Pass Pass Pass Pass Port4 Source Match Pass Pass Pass Pass Directivity Pass Pass Pass Pass Tracking Pass Pass Pass Pass Select All Select None Exit e5070bse134 k Ifat least one of the Error Term tests failed refer to Table 4 20 External Test Failure Troubleshooting Information 1 return to the External Test dialog box click Exit button 7 Handler I O Board tests These tests check the function of Handler I O board for interfacing with an external component handler The tests are performed using a handler I O test kit as a substitute for the handler Required equipment Description Recommended model 5 Handler I O test kit E5070 65001 o Procedure 5 Q Perform the following procedure after Step 11 a
68. gt 9 9 Q Figure 4 85 Standard CMOS Setup window AMIBIOS SETUP STANDARD CMOS SETUP C 1998 American Megatrends Inc All Rights Reserved late mm dd yyyy Sun 06 2902 Base Memory 648 KB Time Chh mm ss 18 16 44 Extd Memory 383 MB Floppy Drive A 1 44 MB 3 Floppu Drive Not Imstalled LBA Blk PIO 32Bit Tupe Size Culn Head HPcom Sec Hode Hode Hode Hode Pri Haster uto 9598 n 4 n Pri Slave Not Installed Sec Master Not Installed Sec Slave Not Installed Boot Sector Virus Protection Disabled Month Jan Dec ESC Exit 74 5 1 Day 81 31 PgUp PgDn i fy Year 1981 2899 F2 F3 Color Advanced CMOS Setup Advanced CMOS Setup options are displayed by choosing Advanced CMOS Setup using 1 J and 1 keys and by pressing key at the BIOS Setup Utility main menu Then the window as shown in Figure 4 86 appears Compare the actual BIOS option settings with the default settings shown in Table 4 24 If there is any difference select it using and keys and change the option setting by pressing and J keys so that it becomes the same as the default setting If you want to exit from this page and return to main menu press Figure 4 86 Advanced CMOS Setup window AMIBIOS SETUP ADVANCED CMOS SETUP Enabled Available Options ARMD Emulated as uto Disabled gt ARMD Emulated as uto Enabled ARMD Emulated as Auto Slave ARMD E
69. modules 15 installed at each socket Unlatch the two clips and remove the DIMM memory To replace the DIMM memory reverse the above procedure Install the DIMM memory in the socket and latch the clips 294 Chapter 6 Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Step 4 Step 5 Step 6 Step 7 Step 8 Step 9 Replacement Procedure A20 Digital Motherboard Replacement 20 Digital Motherboard Replacement 2 o 3 gt X R Tools Required Pozidriv screwdriver pt size 2 medium where Pozidriv screws are in use TORX screwdriver T10 T15 T20 where TORX screws are in use Flat edge screwdriver Cutting plier or scissors Soldering iron Removal Procedure Refer to Figure 6 9 for this procedure Remove the mouse the external keyboard and the parallel printer cable if they are connected to the rear panel Remove the outer cover as described in Outer Cover Removal on page 282 Remove the following assemblies 23 Handler I O board refer A23 Handler I O Board Removal on page 289 21 Analog Interface board refer to 21 Analog Interface Board Removal page 311 A24 GPIB board refer to A24 GPIB Card Replacement on page 314 A26LCD Interface Card refer to 26 LCD Interface Card Removal on page 312 50 ATX Power Supply refer to 50 Power Supply Assembly Removal page 290
70. 0584 6 1 MOUNT CABLE TIE 10 1400 0886 7 1 CLAMP CABLE Chapter 5 239 e 2 e D D v D 142 Replaceable Parts Replaceable Parts List Top View Miscellaneous Parts Figure 5 4 Top View Miscellaneous Parts e5070ase071 240 Chapter5 Replaceable Parts Replaceable Parts List Table 5 3 Top View Miscellaneous Parts Ref Agilent Part Number C D Qty Description Desig 1 0515 0372 2 5 SCREW MACH M3 0 x 8 PN T10 2 0515 1946 8 2 SCREW MACH M3 0 x 6 FL T10 3 0515 1946 8 3 SCREW MACH M3 0 x 6 FL T10 4 0515 0430 3 3 SCREW MACH M3 0 x 6 PN T10 5 0515 1382 6 4 SCREW MACH M3 5 x 6 FL T15 6 0515 0372 2 4 SCREW MACH M3 0 x 8 PN T10 7 0515 1946 8 3 SCREW MACH M3 0 x 6 FL T10 Opt 1 5 8 0515 2216 7 4 SCREW MACH 0 x 40 T20 9 0515 0964 8 4 SCREW MACH M3 0 x 6 FL T10 10 E5070 24012 1 2 STAND OFF 0515 0430 5 2 SCREW MACH M3 0 x 6 PN T10 2190 0584 0 2 WASHER 11 5070 01219 2 1 ANGLE 12 0515 1946 8 2 SCREW MACH M3 0 x 6 FL T10 e 2 e D D v D E n Chapter 5 241 Replaceable Parts Replaceable Parts List Top View Under Power Supply Figure 5 5 Top View Under Power Supply e5070ase073 242 Chapter 5 Replaceable Parts Replaceable Parts List Table 5 4 Top View Under Power Supply Ref A
71. 13 3 0 0 17 14 3 0 0 17 15 3 0 0 17 CW Frequency 8 5 GHz relative to 0 dBm reference Power level dBm Test limit dB Test result dB Measurement uncertainty dB 1 1 5 0 17 2 1 5 0 17 3 19 0 17 4 1 5 0 17 5 1 5 0 17 6 1 5 0 17 7 1 5 0 17 8 EIs 0 17 9 EIS 0 17 10 1 5 0 17 11 t3 0 0 17 12 3 0 0 17 13 3 0 0 17 14 t3 0 0 17 15 t3 0 0 17 Trace Noise CW Test Magnitude Direction S21 CW frequency IF bandwidth Test limit dB rms Test result dB rms Hz Hz 3M 3k 0 001 1 3G 3k 0 001 2 1 G 3k lt 0 001 120 2 Performance Tests E5071A Performance Test Record CW frequency IF bandwidth Test limit dB rms Test result dB rms Hz Hz 3G 3k lt 0 001 4 25G 3k lt 0 003 7 5 G 3k lt 0 003 8 5 G 3k lt 0 005 Direction 512 d zy 9 CW frequency IF bandwidth Test limit dB rms Test result dB rms B Hz Hz o 3M 3k lt 0 001 D 1 3 G 3k lt 0 001 216 3k lt 0 001 3G 3k lt 0 001 4 25 G 3k lt 0 003 7 5 G 3k lt 0 003 8 5 G 3k lt 0 005 Direction S23 Option 313 and 314 only CW frequency IF bandwidth Test limit dB rms Test result dB rms Hz Hz 3M 3k lt 0 001 1 3 G 3k lt 0 001 2 1 G 3
72. 2 Step 1 Performance Tests 4 TRACE NOISE CW TEST 4 IRACE NOISE CW TEST Description This test checks the trace noise level for each test port of the E5070A E5071A The trace noise level is quantified by performing a through measurement 32 times at 3 MHz 1 3 GHz 2 1 GHz 3 GHz 4 25 GHz 7 5 GHz and 8 5 GHz with a cable connected between two test ports Standard deviation of the measured values at each frequency is calculated and then translated into a noise level expressed in dB rms Specification E5070A lt 1 mdB rms 23 5 C 3 MHz to 3 GHz IFBW 3 kHz 0 dBm through 5071 lt 1 mdB rms 23 5 C 3 MHz to 4 2 GHz IFBW 3 kHz 0 dBm through lt 3 rms 23 5 C 4 2 GHz to 7 5 GHz IFBW 3 kHz 0 dBm through lt 5 mdB rms 23 5 7 5 GHz to 8 5 GHz IFBW 3 kHz 0 dBm through Test equipment Coaxial cable with Type N m connectors 61 cm 24 in N6314A p n 8120 8862 Procedure Connect test equipment N N cable as shown the following figures Opt 213 214 Figure 2 5 Opt 313 314 Figure 2 6 Opt 413 414 Figure 2 7 Chapter 2 35 D s 3 D 5 o Performance Tests 4 TRACE NOISE CW TEST Figure 2 5 Trace noise CW test setup Opt 213 214 E5070A 5071A N m N m Cable e5070ase010 Figure 2 6 Trace noise CW test setup Opt 313 314
73. 2 85 D 3 D 5 Figure 2 44 e5070ase010 Step 9 Step 10 Step 11 Step 12 Step 13 Step 14 Step 15 Step 16 Step 17 Step 18 Step 19 Step 20 Step 21 Performance Tests 8 UNCORRECTED SYSTEM PERFORMANCE TEST select Restore Cal Kit Press C and to select Calibrate function Press C gt lt gt lt gt C and Enter to select 2 Port Cal Press to go down to Select Ports menu Select 1 2 preset ports Press gt and Enter to select Reflection calibration and to go down to its menu Connect Open termination to the Port 1 and perform Port 1 Open calibration Perform Port 1 Short calibration with Short termination connected to the Port 1 Perform Port 1 Load calibration with Load termination Connected to the Port 1 Connect Open termination to the tip of the N N cable connected to the Port 2 and perform Port 2 open calibration Perform Port 2 Short calibration with Short termination connected to the tip of the N N cable Perform Port 2 Load calibration with Load termination connected to the tip of the N N cable Perform Return Connect the N N cable between the selected test ports Port 1 and Port 2 as shown in the following figures Option 213 214 Figure 2 44 Option 313 314 Figure 2 45 Option 413 414 Figure 2 46 Thru calibration setup for uncorrected system performance test Opt 213 214 E5070A 5071A
74. 65 0 106 0 019 70 0 125 0 019 75 0 151 0 021 80 0 189 0 021 85 0 248 0 023 90 0 346 0 023 95 0 509 0 024 100 0 785 0 024 105 1 248 0 026 110 2 008 0 026 Uncorrected System Performance Test Port 1 System Frequency range Hz Test limit dB Test result dB performance Directivity 3M 3G lt 10 Source match 3M 3G lt 15 Load match 3M 3G lt 17 Port 2 System Frequency range Hz Test limit dB Test result dB performance Directivity 3M 3G lt 10 Source match 3M 3G lt 15 Load match 3M 3G lt 17 Chapter 2 115 D s 3 D 5 o Performance Tests E5070A Performance Test Record Port 3 Options 313 314 413 and 414 only System Frequency range Hz Test limit dB Test result dB performance Directivity 3M 3G lt 10 Source match 3M 3G lt 15 Load match 3M 3G lt 17 Port 4 Options 413 and 414 only System Frequency range Hz Test limit dB Test result dB performance Directivity 3M 3G lt 10 Source match 3M 3G lt 15 Load match 3M 3G lt 17 116 Chapter 2 Performance Tests E5071A Performance Test Record 5071 Performance Test Record Agilent Technologies E5071A RF Network Analyzer Serial Number Option Temperature C Test Date Humidity
75. Chapter 2 33 Table 2 3 NOTE Step 7 Step 8 Step 9 Step 10 Step 11 Step 12 Performance Tests 3 RF OUTPUT LEVEL LINEARITY TEST value of the level linearity test levels listed in Table 2 3 RF output level linearity test conditions Test 5070 5071 5071 only frequency 10 MHz 3 GHz 4 25 GHz 8 5 GHz Power level 0 dBm reference level 1 dBm 2 dBm 3 dBm 4 dBm 5 dBm 6 dBm 7 dBm 8 dBm 9 dBm 10 dBm dBm 12 dBm 13 dBm 14 dBm 15 dBm The RF output level linearity is tested at the minimum maximum and proper frequencies other than the source adjustment frequencies within the specified frequency range Press C gt and to make a Single sweep measurement Wait for the power meter reading to settle Then record the reading in the calculation sheet Power meter reading column for the level linearity test Change the E5070A E5071A power level setting in accordance with Table 2 3 and perform Step 7 and 8 for each power level to 15 dBm Set the power level to 0 dBm and change the E5070A E5071A center frequency to the next level linearity test frequency in accordance with Table 2 3 Perform Step 4 through 10 for each frequency Calculate test results using the equation given in the calculation sheet Record the calculated test results in the performance test record Test result column for the level linearity test 34 Chapter
76. Chapter 6 305 Figure 6 16 e5070ase228 Step 1 NOTE Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 NOTE Step 4 Step 5 Step 6 Replacement Procedure A8 RF Switch Replacement 8 RF Switch source board side Replacement Replacement Procedure Replace the switch by inverse procedure of removal Fasten the semi rigid cable using a torque wrench for replacement AS RF Switch receiver board side Removal Procedure Refer to Figure 6 17 for this procedure Remove the outer cover as described in Outer Cover Removal on page 282 Remove the front panel as described in Front Panel Removal on page 284 Disconnect the all semi rigid cables from the switch on the left side refer to the figure as shown in Table 6 4 on page 305 The label on the semi rigid cable show the last two digits of the part number Release the switch cable from the cable clamp item 1 Remove the two screws fastening the switch holder item 2 Disconnect the switch cables from the switches 306 Chapter 6 Replacement Procedure A8 RF Switch Replacement Step 7 Remove the screws fastening the switches Figure 6 17 8 RF Switch receiver board side Replacement 2 o 3 5 X 1 Opt 21x Label on bottom Opt 31x Label on top Opt 41x Label on top Opt 31x 41x 5070 229 Replacement Procedure Step 1 Fasten the switch as shown in Fi
77. Done Not Done Not Done Tracking Not Done Not Done Not Done Mot Done Start Test Select All Select None e5070bse133 b Select the test ports for the test by clicking the check boxes Then click Start Test button The instruction dialog box opens as shown in Figure 4 76 Follow the instruction Clicking Select button checks all the check boxes Clicking Select None button clears all the check boxes Click Exit to return to the External Test dialog box OPEN port 1 dialog box Connect OPEN to Port 1 eee e5070bse132 Connectan type N Open termination to the specified port For more information on Error Term tests setup see Table 4 19 Error Term tests setup Test parameter Connect Sweep freq span IFBW Nop and RF power settings System correction Automatic Source match Open Full span 1 kHz BW 201 5 dBm System correction OFF Directivity Short Load Reflection tracking d Click OK button to continue the test The Error Term dialog box displays Now calibrating for a few seconds Wait until SHORT dialog box opens e Connect an type N Short termination to the specified test port f Click OK button to continue the test and wait until LOAD dialog box opens 206 Chapter 4 Figure 4 77 Troubleshooting Troubleshooting Using External Test g Connecta 50 Load termination to the specified test port h Click OK
78. Handler I O Board Removal A23 Handler I O Board Removal 2 o 3 5 X R Tools Required Pozidriv screwdriver pt size 2 medium where Pozidriv screws are in use TORX screwdriver T10 T15 T20 where TORX screws in use Procedure Refer to Figure 6 6 for this procedure Remove the outer cover as described in Outer Cover Removal on page 282 Disconnect the flat cable item 1 from the A23 handler I O board Remove the two TORX T10 screws item 2 fastening the A23 handler I O board Slide the A23 handler I O board toward backward A23 Handler I O Board Removal Chapter 6 289 Replacement Procedure A50 ATX Power Supply Assembly Removal 50 Power Supply Assembly Removal Tools Required Pozidriv screwdriver pt size 2 medium where Pozidriv screws are in use TORX screwdriver T10 T15 T20 where TORX screws in use cutting plier or scissors Procedure Refer to Figure 6 7 for this procedure Step 1 Remove the outer cover as described in Outer Cover Removal on page 282 Step 2 Remove the handler I O board as described in 23 Handler I O Board Removal on page 289 Step 3 Disconnect two flat cables item land 2 from the analog mother board Step 4 Disconnect the power supply cables item 3 4 and 5 Step 5 Release all cables clamped on the power supply holder Step 6 Remove the two TORX T10 sc
79. Hz Maxval dB 3M to 3G Hz 3 G to 6 G Hz 6 G to 8 5 G Hz e5070ase259 i Record the displayed values in the performance test record Test results dB column in Port 1 table for the uncorrected system performance test Test procedure for other test setups Step 29 Connect the N N cable as shown in the following figures Option 213 214 Figure 2 56 Option 313 314 Figure 2 57 Option 413 414 Figure 2 58 NOTE The test setups and Select Ports settings for each option configuration are described in Table 2 18 90 Chapter 2 Performance Tests 8 UNCORRECTED SYSTEM PERFORMANCE TEST Figure 2 56 O S L calibration setup for uncorrected system performance test Opt 213 214 5070 5071 0000 2000 65 4 nanp lt 500 Q N m N m Cable N D 3 D 5 SL m m m 5070 5 035 Figure 2 57 O S L calibration setup for uncorrected system performance test Opt 313 314 E5070A 5071A aa aa Qa aa Ma DO QO C
80. MHz to 1 5 GHz and 1 5 GHz to 3 GHz 2 ranges 5071 3 MHz to 1 5 GHz 1 5 GHz to 4 GHz 4 GHz to 6 GHz 6 GHz to 7 5 GHz and 7 5 GHz to 8 GHz 5 ranges The maximum deviation value in each frequency range is represented in dB and displayed in the VBA UserForm window as shown in the display example below Chapter 2 57 D s 3 D 5 Figure 2 25 Step 26 Step 27 Step 28 Step 29 Step 30 Step 31 Figure 2 26 e5070ase285 Performance Tests 6 SYSTEM DYNAMIC RANGE TEST VBA UserForm window display example SYSTEM DYNAMIC RANGE TEST X Frequency Ranges Hz MaxVal dB 3M to 1 5 G Hz 1 5 G to 4 6 Hz 4 G to 6 6 Hz 6 G 7 56 Hz 7 5 G to 8 5 6 Hz Record the maximum RMS deviation values in the performance test record Test result dB column for the system dynamic range test Press Exit button on the SYSTEM DYNAMIC RANG TEST window Press Enter 3 to change the IF Bandwidth setting to 3 kHz and perform Step 25 through 27 Press Avg Enter J 0 to change the IF Bandwidth setting to 10 Hz change the S parameter setting as shown in the second row in Table 2 9 and perform Step 25 through 28 For the option 313 314 413 414 proceed to Step 31 Response Thru calibration for options 313 314 413 and 414 only Connect the Load termination to each test port as shown in Figure 2 26 Opt 313 314
81. Port of Directivity Source match Load match test are as follows Response Port 3 Stimulus Port 4 Record the test results in the performance test record port 3 Chapter 2 95 D s bus 3 D 5 o Performance Tests 8 UNCORRECTED SYSTEM PERFORMANCE TEST Table 2 18 Test setup Select Ports settings and calibration sequence Option Select Test setup Calibration Termination and cable connection Ports Figure for calibration 3 4 Figure 2 63 Port 3 Open Open to the tip of N N cable Port 3 Short Short to the tip of N N cable Port 3 Load Load to the tip of N N cable Port 4 Open Open to Port 4 Port 4 Short Short to Port 4 Port 4 Load Load to Port 4 Figure 2 62 Thru N N cable between Port 3 and Port 4 Perform Step 28 and 29 Record the test results in the performance test record port 4 Response Stimulus Port of Directivity Source match Load match test are as follows Response Port 4 Stimulus Port 3 Record the test results in the performance test record port 4 Figure 2 59 O S L calibration setup for uncorrected system performance test Opt 313 314 5070 039 5070 5071 m E oo 2005 2005 lt gt 0000 aa 0000 oo lt Q O l 96 N m N m Cable
82. Q Table 1 1 Recommended Test Equipment 5 Equipment Critical specifications Recommended Model Qty Use o Personal Computer Windows 95 98 NT4 or 2000 1 P A S with GPIB board VEES5 0 or 6 0 1 P Performance Tests A Adjustment T Troubleshooting 2 Opt 050 and Opt 124 can be substituted for Opt 030 In this case a N m BNC f adapter is necessary Table 1 2 Alternative Test Equipment Equipment Critical specifications Model Qty Use Frequency Counter Frequency 50 MHz to 3 GHz 53131 2A with Opt 010 and 1 P A 2 Accuracy lt 2 5 ppm 030 Power Meter No Substitute E4418A B 1 Short Type N m 11512 4 Load Type N m 909F Opt 012 4 P 1 P Performance Tests A Adjustment T Troubleshooting 2 Opt 050 Opt 124 can be substituted for Opt 030 In this case a N m BNC f adapter is necessary Chapter 1 21 General Information Required Equipment 22 Chapter 1 D s bus 3 D 5 Performance Tests This chapter provides information on how to verify the E5070A E5071A performance 23 NOTE NOTE NOTE NOTE Table 2 1 Performance Tests Introduction Introduction This literature provides the performance test procedures for the Agilent E5070A E5071A RF Network Analyzers The performance test names are listed in Table 2 1 The test procedures are descr
83. R DA20 Pm 4 DA25 Pm DA20 The records for 20 dBm are used as the reference values in the dynamic accuracy calculation Record the calculated value in the calculation sheet Running D A 48 column for DA25 Record the same value in the True D A dB column in the calculation sheet Set the first attenuator A1 of the Z5623A to 10 dB by executing the following GPIB control command GPIB OUTPUT 712 amp in OUTPUT 712 at 10 OUTPUT 712 at b 20 The total attenuation for the A1 and A2 attenuators is 30 dB Perform Step 13 through 24 Calculate the dynamic accuracy for 30 dBm using the following equation D A Sxy x R DA30 Sxy x R DA20 Pm DA30 Pm DA20 Record the calculated value in the calculation sheet Running D A dB and True D A dB columns for DA30 Set the first attenuator A1 of the Z5623A to 0 dB and the second attenuator 2 to 30 dB by executing the following GPIB control command GPIB OUTPUT 712 amp in OUTPUT 712 at 0 OUTPUT 712 at b 30 This attenuator state is named DA30a The following steps 35 through 37 are performed to equalize the receiver port input levels for the DA30 and DA30a Perform Step 13 through 24 Calculate the difference in Sxy x R dB values for the DA30 and DA30a by using the following equation Sxy x R dB Sxy x R dB DA30a Sxy x R dB DA30 Adjust the source power for
84. Subnet Mask 255 255 0 0 5070 276 Step 6 Connect drive of 5070 5071 to the check the drive using anti virus software 1 Click Programs Window Explorer on the Start Menu to start up the Explorer Click Tools Map Network Drive on the menu of the Explorer 2 Select a suitable drive name enter the network path as shown in Figure D 9 and then press the OK button For example the network path e507x c is for drive C e507x user is for the drive D Figure D 9 Map Network Drive Dialog Box Map Network Drive HE Drive jos Path Se e Cancel Reconnect at logon 25070 25242 When drive D 15 selected the Enter Network Password dialog box will appear Enter the password e507xa and press the OK button 3 The network path will appear on the PC s Explorer Confirm that the network path you enter is connected to the PC 4 Execute the anti virus software on the PC and the menu for the anti virus software will appear Check the drive you entered on 2 of Step 4 For the operation of anti virus software refer to its manual 5 Check if the drives C and D are infected Step 7 Disconnect the drives of 5070 5071 from the 1 Click Programs Window Explorer on the Start Menu to start up the PC s Explorer Appendix D 359 9 3 lt n gt 9 o NOTE Step 8 Figure D 10 Step 9 Step 10 Comp
85. Term port 1 tests These tests check the reflection tracking directivity and source match for Port 1 190 Chapter 4 Figure 4 52 Figure 4 53 NOTE Table 4 12 Troubleshooting Troubleshooting Using External Test Required equipment Description Recommended model Calibration kit N type Open Short and 500 Load 85032F terminations Procedure Perform the following procedure after step 11 a Click Error Term port 1 in the pull down menu of the Test List box b Click Test button in the dialog box to open the Error Term port 1 tests dialog box The dialog box displays some test frequency ranges where the source match directivity and reflection tracking are tested as shown in Figure 4 52 Error Term port 1 tests dialog box example E5071A Error Term port1 x lt 8 5GHz Source Match Not Done Not Done Not Done Directivity Not Done Not Done Not Done lt 3MHz lt 1 5GHz lt 3GHz 7 5GHz lt 8 5GHz Reflection Tracking Not Done Not Done NotDone Not Done Exit c Click Test button to run the test program The dialog box displays Now testing for a few seconds Then OPEN port 1 dialog box opens as shown in Figure 4 53 OPEN port 1 dialog box Connect OPEN to Porti d Connect an N type Open termination to Port 1 For more information on Error Term port 1 tests setup see Table 4 12 Error Term port 1 tests setup
86. Test Window External Test Rev A 03 00 x Tch Power Gain Not Done IF Ranging NotDone Test Receiver Linearity Not Done Test Dynamic Range Not Done Test Trace Noise Not Done Test Error Term Not Done Test Handler I O Board Not Done Test Copyright c 2002 Agilent Technologies Inc e5070bse118 Step 11 To perform the individual tests in each test group refer to the procedure described below Step 12 To end the external test click Exit button in the dialog box 1 Tch Power Gain tests These tests check the source output power along with the test channel receiver gain for each test port Required equipment Description Recommended model Coaxial cable with N type m connectors 61 cm 24 in N6314A Procedure Perform the following procedure after Step 11 a Click Test button in the right of Tch Power Gain in the window to open the Tch Power Gain window The window displays the S parameters and frequencies as the test points Their results are displayed in the matrix Figure 4 59 Figure 4 59 Tch Power Gain tests dialog box example E5071A Opt 413 414 512 NotDone Not Done Not Done es o 6 o gt e o 2 Q 521 NotDone NotDone Not Done 531 NotDone NotDone Not Done v 541 NotDone Not Done Not Done Select All Select None Exit e5070bse119 b Selectthe S parameter for the test by clicking t
87. Test limit dB Test result dB Measurement uncertainty dB 2 05 G 1 0 0 16 3 00 G 1 0 0 16 RF Output Level Linearity Test Port1 CW Frequency 10 MHz relative to 0 dBm reference Power level dBm Test limit dB Test result dB Measurement uncertainty dB 1 0 75 0 17 2 0 75 0 17 3 0 75 0 17 4 0 75 0 17 5 0 75 0 17 6 0 75 0 17 7 0 75 0 17 8 0 75 0 17 9 0 75 0 17 10 0 75 0 17 11 0 75 0 17 12 0 75 0 17 13 0 75 0 17 14 0 75 0 17 15 0 75 0 17 CW Frequency 3 GHz relative to 0 dBm reference Power level dBm Test limit dB Test result dB Measurement uncertainty dB 1 0 75 0 17 2 0 75 0 17 3 0 75 0 17 4 0 75 0 17 5 0 75 0 17 Chapter 2 107 D s 3 D 5 o Performance Tests E5070A Performance Test Record Power level dBm Test limit dB Test result dB Measurement uncertainty dB 6 0 75 0 17 7 0 75 0 17 8 0 75 0 17 9 0 75 0 17 10 0 75 0 17 11 0 75 0 17 12 0 75 0 17 13 0 75 0 17 14 0 75 0 17 15 0 75 0 17 Trace Noise CW Test Magnitude Direction 521 CW frequency IF bandwidth Test limit dB rms Test result dB
88. and Enter to perform Thru calibration Wait until the calibration is completed Press CV gt C gt and to perform Done Change Select Ports setting as shown in the second row in Table 2 6 Perform Step lland 12 For the option 213 214 instruments skip to Step 18 For the option 313 314 413 414 proceed to Step 16 Response calibration for options 313 314 413 and 414 only Connect the test equipment N N cable as shown in Figure 2 13 Opt 313 314 and Figure 2 14 Opt 413 414 44 Chapter 2 Performance Tests 5 CROSSTALK TEST Figure 2 13 Response calibration setup for crosstalk test Opt 313 314 E5070A 5071A N m N m Cable e5070ase012 Figure 2 14 Response calibration setup for crosstalk test Opt 413 414 E5070A 5071A N m N m Cable e5070ase017 Step 17 Perform the response calibration for each of the Select Ports settings shown in the third and fourth rows in Table 2 6 Crosstalk measurement Step 18 Press and verify that Correction is set to ON Step 19 Disconnect the N N cable and connect an N type coaxial Short termination to each test port as shown in the following figures Chapter 2 45 D s 3 D 5 Performance Tests 5 CROSSTALK TEST Opt 213 214 Figure 2 15 Opt 313 314
89. and Port 3 50 MHz 0 Hz 1 kHz BW 101 15 dBm S41 T4 Mag S41 T4 Phase S14 R4 Mag S14 R4 Phase IF signal level ranging operation oftest channel receiver for Port 4 Opt 413 414 Port 1 and Port 4 50 MHz 0 Hz 1 kHz BW 101 15 dBm Click button to run the test program dialog box displays Now testing while the Tch IF Ranging tests are in progress f When the tests are completed the dialog box displays Pass or Fail for each test as shown in Figure 4 42 184 Chapter4 Troubleshooting Troubleshooting Using External Test Figure 4 42 Tch IF Ranging test results display example 5070 5071 Opt 413 414 512 T1 Mag Pass 512 T1 Phase Pass 521 R1 Mag Pass Ds 521 R1 Phase Pass 521 T2 Mag Pass 521 T2 Phase Pass 12 R2 Mag Pass Test 512 R2 Phase Pass 531 T3 Mag Pass 531 T3 Phase Pass 513 R3 Mag Pass 513 R3 Phase Pass 541 T4 Mag Pass 541 T4 Phase Pass 514 R4 Mag Pass 514 R4 Phase Pass g Ifat least one of the Tch IF Ranging tests failed refer to Table 4 20 External Test Failure Troubleshooting Information h To return to the External Test dialog box click Exit button 3 Receiver Linearity tests These tests check the linearity gain compression of test channel receiver for each test port Required equipment Description Recommended model Coaxial ca
90. attenuator and an N type m coaxial cable in series between the test ports in accordance with Table 4 7 Make the connection as shown in Figure 4 41 o 0 o gt e o 2 Q Chapter 4 183 Figure 4 41 e5070ase159 Table 4 7 Troubleshooting Troubleshooting Using External Test 10 dB attenuator and cable connection E5070A E5071A Opt 413 414 E5070A 5071A aoa Cc aa aaon aao 0000 0000 aa eo 2000 XY aaa QooOo 1 4 10dB Fixed Attenuation Tch Power Gain tests setups k J N m N m Cable Test name Objective of the test Connect a 10 dB attenuatorandan N cable between Center Span freq IFBW Nop and RF power settings Automatic 512 Mag 512 Phase 521 Mag 521 Phase IF signal level ranging operation of test channel receiver for Port 1 Port 1 and Port 2 50 MHz 0 Hz 1 kHz BW 101 15 dBm S21 T2 Mag S21 T2 Phase S12 R2 Mag S12 R2 Phase IF signal level ranging operation of test channel receiver for Port 2 Port 1 and Port 2 50 MHz 0 Hz 1 kHz BW 101 15 dBm S31 T3 Mag S31 T3 Phase S13 R3 Mag S13 R3 Phase IF signal level ranging operation oftest channel receiver for Port 3 Opt 313 314 413 414 Port 1
91. been filled for example Invalid character An invalid character exists the program message character string Invalid character data An invalid character is found in the character data element or the parameter received is not valid 372 Appendix F Messages Invalid character in number 121 Invalid character in number A character that is invalid for the data type subject to syntactic analysis has been received For example a letter is found in a decimal numeric value or a numeric character 9 in octal data 171 Invalid expression The expression data element is invalid see 7 7 7 2 IEEE488 2 Parentheses are not paired or illegal characters are used for example 103 Invalid separator The parser a syntactic analysis program had been expecting a delimiter but a character that is not a delimiter has been sent 151 Invalid string data Character string data has been expected but the character string data that appears is invalid for some reason see 7 7 5 2 IEEE488 2 The END message is received before the ending quotation mark character appears for example 131 Invalid suffix The suffix does not comply with the syntax defined in 7 7 3 2 IEEE488 2 Or it does not suit 5070 5071 L 53 Log sweep requires 2 octave minimum span The span of sweep range is not satisfied the requirement for logarithmic sweep The sweep type is automatically changed to linear sweep when this error occurs
92. board Ifnothing is displayed even on the external monitor the problem seems in the A20 digital motherboard or A26 LCD interface card Check if the A26 board is securely connected to the A20 board Checking flat cable Check a flat cable between the A26 and A31 LCD connector Check around the backlight Check 52 inverter board and a cable between the 52 and A26 Also check the cables between the A51 LCD and 52 If the cables are normal check the A51 LCD 146 Chapter4 Troubleshooting Booting Process Troubleshooting Booting Process Troubleshooting Figure 4 5 represents the booting process flow in the E5070A E5071A If the E5070A E5071A stops in the booting process troubleshoot using the following step by step procedure A R 0 n gt 5 Q Chapter 4 147 Troubleshooting Booting Process Troubleshooting Figure 4 5 Booting process flowchart 1 VIDEO BIOS Title Screen BIOS Logo and RAM Counting DEL Key Pressed BIOS Setup Menu System Configuration Display Searching for Boot Record from IDE 0 Agilent Logo Screen Did it Shutdown Propery Scan Disk Check Revision and Option Information Display E5070A E5071A Measurement View E5070A E5071A Power On Self Test 5070 157 Step 1 Video BIOS booting Video BIOS title screen shown in Figure 4 6 is displayed first when the E5070A E5071A 148 Chapter4 Troubleshooting Booting Process Trouble
93. box click Exit button 6 Error Term tests These tests check the reflection tracking directivity and source match for all test ports Required equipment Description Recommended model Calibration kit type N Open Short and 500 Load 85032F terminations Procedure Perform the following procedure after Step 11 a Click Test button in the right of Error Term in the window to open the Error Term window The window displays the port number and frequencies as the test points The result for each test port is displayed as the 4x3 matrix Figure 4 75 R o 0 o gt e o 2 Q Chapter 4 205 Figure 4 75 Troubleshooting Troubleshooting Using External Test Error Term port 1 tests dialog box example E5071A NOTE Figure 4 76 NOTE Table 4 19 lt 1 SGHz lt 8 SGHz Port 1 Source Match Done Not Done Not Done Mot Done Directivity Done Not Done Not Done Not Done Tracking Not Done Not Done Not Done Not Done Port 2 Source Match Not Done Not Done Not Done Not Done Directivity Not Done Not Done Not Done Not Done Refl Tracking Not Done Not Done Not Done Not Done Port 3 Source Match Not Done Not Done Not Done Mot Done Directivity Not Done Not Done Not Done Not Done Tracking Not Done Not Done Not Done Not Done Port 4 Source Match Not Done Not Done Not Done Not Done Directivity Not Done Not
94. box to open the Tch Power Gain tests dialog box The dialog box displays the names of 12 independent tests included in the Tch Power Gain tests as shown in Figure 4 36 Tch Power Gain tests dialog box example E5071A Opt 413 414 S12 50MHz Not Done S12 3GHz Not Done S12 6GHz Not Done S21 50MHz Not Done S21 3GHz Not Done S21 6GHz Not Done S31 50MHz Not Done S31 3GHz Not Done S31 6GHz Not Done S41 50MHz Not Done S41 3GHz Not Done S41 6GHz Not Done Exit c Click the small Test button associated with each test THRU 1 amp 2 or THRU 1 amp 3 or THRU 1 amp 4 dialog box opens as shown in Figure 4 37 180 Chapter 4 Troubleshooting Troubleshooting Using External Test Figure 4 37 THRU 1 amp 2 dialog box Connect THRU between Port1 amp Port2 d Connect an N type m coaxial cable to the test ports in accordance with Table 4 6 Table 4 6 Tch Power Gain tests setups Test name Objective of the test Connect an N Center Span freq and cable between IFBW settings Automatic S12 50MHz Source power for 2 Port 1 and Port2 50 MHz 0 Hz 10 kHz BW and test channel S12 3GHz receiver gain for port 1 3 GHz 0 Hz 10 kHz BW S12 6GHz E5071A 6GHz 0Hz 10 kHz BW 521 50 2 Source power for port 1 Port 1 and Port 2 50 MHz 0 Hz 10 kHz BW and test channel S21 3GHz receiver gain for port 2 3 GHz 0
95. eK E E Reese 305 Tools Required DUE Saa Sen be ee NIC EN DE ER AEN V 305 8 RF Switch source board side 305 A8 RF Switch receiver board 10 306 A7 Source Step Attenuator Removal Option 214 314 and 414 308 Tools Requied erkennt se anam 308 Procedure ve ap WU CR 308 A10 Analog Motherboard 1 21 1 1 310 Tools Required yg y Mace pe h awan EE Sate 310 Procedures of att MAU EU Re n 310 A2 Analog Interface Board 1 1 1 10 4 7 311 15 5 a La tan SASS ht VeL 311 Procedure Piece a ety els thee dore Nem anka Pes ere Cae ae p a ete Roh 311 A26 LCD Interface Card 1 4 312 ToolstRequited s Eie 312 Procedure zu ok eee ets LLL Ici diee A anu Lapan asa 312 ard Replacement epe E e eee 314 Tools u y SE eu e uet EE qum 314 Removal Procedures Sk cen assess 314 Replacement Procedure AL 314 A22 Front Panel Keyboard
96. ede 117 Frequency Accuracy lest ire e Oyu a plone oie an eed gn 117 RF Output Level Accuracy and Flatness 117 RF Output Level Linearity Test 1 118 Trace Noise CW Test Magnitude 120 Crosstalk est ce anu pm suu eg 123 System Dynamic Range 2 124 Dynamic Accuracy Test i e esee oleh a lage et an ecd uen cde eget 126 Uncorrected System Performance Test 130 3 Adjustment Safety Considerations ess S d fs ee ve DU PEU e Utd See EN ua Shu p a S 134 Warm up for Adjustment sus esos esu 134 Required Equipment Vus ee RB Be Lob CODES TG AW OR OE 134 Required Adjustment after Replacing 135 Waone EU eO Tende wale na ete 135 Frequency Reference 135 Oven Reference s X ee ES 136 IF Range Gain Phase 4 136 Source Adjustment q L a kiwisa 136 Test Ports Characteristics Adjustment
97. for Port 3 Opt 313 314 413 41 4 S31 6GHz Source power for Port 1 and receiver gain for Port 3 5071 Opt 313 314 413 41 4 541 50 2 Source power for Port 1 and receiver gain for port 4 Opt 413 414 HH S41 3GHz Source power for Port 1 and receiver gain for port 4 Opt 413 414 HH THE THE SA1 6GHz Source power for Port 1 and receiver gain for Port 4 E5071A Opt 413 414 HH THE 210 Chapter4 Troubleshooting Troubleshooting Using External Test Table 4 20 External test failure troubleshooting information Test Test group First failed Test objective Probable faulty board assembly No test Al A6Sw T A2 Receiver A23 Source cont Hnd Al4 A17 13 Tch IF S12 T1 Mag IF signal level HH 2 512 1 Phase ranging S21 R1 Mag operation of S21 R1 Phase receiver Port 1 14 S21 T2 Mag IF signal level HHH S21 T2 Phase ranging S12 R2 Mag operation of S12 R2 Phase receiver for Port 2 15 S31 T3 Mag IF signal level HHH S31 T3 Phase ranging S13 R3 Mag operation of S13 R3 Phase receiver for Port 3 Opt 313 314 413 41 4 16 S41 T4 Mag IF signal level HH S41 T4 Phase ranging S14 R4 Mag operation of S14 R4 Phase receiver for Port 4 Opt 413 414 17 Receiver S12 Mag Receiv
98. in the softkeys c Click Power On Test to restart the test Wait until the power on test ends d The test result OK or Failed is displayed in the Power On Test key PLL unlock When a PLL of the frequency synthesizers is unlocked not the Power on self test failed but Phase lock loop unlocked message is displayed If it occurs Al Source board may be faulty There is also a low possibility that A17 ADC part of A2 Receiver board is faulty External reference signal phase unlock Opt 1E5 If the ExtRef in the instrument status bar is displayed in gray not turning blue in using the high stability time base Opt 1 5 A5 Crystal Oven board or the interconnection cable between rear panel Ref Oven and Ref In connectors may be faulty Also check whether the Ready in the instrument status bar is displayed in blue the warm up in the instrument is completed If it is in gray wait until the Ready turns blue 156 Chapter 4 NOTE NOTE Figure 4 14 Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Step 4 Step 5 Step 6 Step 7 Step 8 Step 9 Step 10 Troubleshooting Troubleshooting Using Internal Test Execute the Internal Test To isolate faulty board assembly in analog section execute the internal test in accordance with the following procedure The test procedure needs to be performed using a mouse in addition to the front panel keys To perform the internal test properly the following conditions must b
99. key Remove the two TORX T10 screws item 9 fastening the inverter assembly Remove the six screws item 10 fastening the A22 front panel keyboard Separate the keyboard into the board and the rubber key Insert the whole jut of the rubber key into the hole on the board as shown in Figure 6 24 when replacing the A22 front panel keyboard 316 Chapter 6 Replacement Procedure A22 Front Panel Keyboard Removal Figure 6 24 A22 Front Panel Keyboard Removal 2 o 3 5 X e5070ase239 Chapter 6 317 Replacement Procedure A52 Inverter Board Removal A52 Inverter Board Removal Tools Required Pozidriv screwdriver pt size 2 medium where Pozidriv screws are in use TORX screwdriver T8 and T10 T15 T20 where TORX screws in use Flat edge screwdriver Procedure Refer to Figure 6 25 for this procedure Step 1 Remove the front panel as described in Front Panel Removal on page 284 Step 2 Release the clamped cables from the clamp item 1 on the cover Step 3 Disconnect the cables item 2 and 3 fr
100. m coaxial cable between the test ports in accordance with Table 4 16 Table 4 16 Receiver Linearity test setups Test name Objective of the test Connect an N Sweep freq span IFBW cable between Nop and RF power settings Automatic S12 Receiver linearity for Port 1 Port 1 and 2 Full span 10 kHz BW 201 10 dBm and 0 dBm S21 Receiver linearity for Port 2 Port 1 and Port 2 Full span 10 BW 201 10 dBm and 0 dBm S31 Receiver linearity for Port 3 Port 1 and Port 3 Full span 10 kHz BW 201 Opt 313 314 413 414 10 dBm and 0 dBm S41 Receiver linearity for Port4 Port 1 and 4 Full span 10 kHz BW 201 Opt 413 414 10 dBm and 0 dBm d Click OK button to run the test program The dialog box displays Now testing while the Receiver Linearity tests are in progress e When the tests are completed the dialog box displays Pass or Fail for each test as 200 Chapter4 Troubleshooting Troubleshooting Using External Test shown in Figure 4 68 Figure 4 68 Receiver Linearity test results example E5070A E5071A Opt 413 414 512 Mag Pass Pass Pass Pass Phase Pass Pass Pass Pass 521 Mag Pass Pass Pass Pass Phase Pass Pass Pass Pass 531 Mag Pass Pass Pass Pass Phase Pass Pass Pass Pass 541 55 Pass Pass Pass Phase Pass Pass Pass Pass Start Test Select All Select None e5070bse125 f Ifat least one of the Receiver Lin
101. mass storage verify whether or not the E5070A E5071A system detects the mass storage correctly using this BIOS option If you want to exit from this page and return to main menu press EJ key Auto Detect Hard Disks window AMIBIOS SETUP STANDARD CMOS SETUP 0218998 American Megatrends Inc All Rights Reserved Date mm ddvyyyy Sun TES 86 2882 Base Memory 648 KB Time Chh mm ss 18 19 57 Extd Memory 383 MB Floppy Drive A 1 44 MB 3 Floppu Drive Not Imstalled LBA Blk PIO 32Bit Size Cyln Head HPcom Sec Mode Mode Mode Mode Pri Master Auto 9598 On On 4 On Pri Sle Not Installed Not Installed Not Imstalled Boot Sector Virus Protection Disabled Month Jan Dec ESC Exit 4 5 1 Day 91 31 PgUp PgDn Modify Year 1981 2899 F2 F3 Color Change Supervisor Password A password needs to be entered to execute the BIOS setup utility If a password has not been assigned in the E5070A E5071A set the password using this BIOS setup utility as follows a Select Change Supervisor Password using and keys at the BIOS Setup Utility main menu and press key b Enter the password of e507xa Never set another password c Press key d Ifa message of New supervisor password installed Press any key to continue is Chapter 4 231 AR D 5 Troubleshooting To configure the A20 Digital Motherboard and BIOS displayed press key Save S
102. n Replaceable Parts Replaceable Parts List Front View Semirigid Cables Opt 414 Figure 5 14 Front View Semirigid Cables Opt 414 F Gua SE LACE TITLE Sp A EESE f w Q ti di ET 5070 290 256 Replaceable Parts Replaceable Parts List Table 5 13 Front View Semirigid Cables Opt 414 Ref Agilent Part Number C D Qty Description Desig 1 E5070 61643 2 1 CABLE ASSY SRGD 2 E5070 61645 1 CABLE ASSY SRGD 3 E5070 61644 3 1 RF CABLE ASSY SRGD 4 E5070 61648 7 1 RF CABLE ASSY SRGD 5 5070 61632 9 1 CABLE ASSY SRGD 6 E5070 61654 5 1 CABLE ASSY SRGD 7 E5070 61647 6 1 CABLE ASSY SRGD 8 E5070 61646 5 1 CABLE ASSY SRGD 9 E5070 61631 8 1 RF CABLE ASSY SRGD 10 E5070 61651 2 1 RF CABLE ASSY SRGD 11 E5070 61650 1 1 RF CABLE ASSY SRGD 12 E5070 61649 8 1 RF CABLE ASSY SRGD 13 0955 0301 9 1 U WAVE ATTN 2DB 14 E5070 61607 8 1 RF CABLE ASSY SRGD 15 E5070 61656 7 1 RF CABLE ASSY SRGD 16 1810 0118 1 1 TERMINATION COAX Chapter 5 257 e 2 e D D v D E n Replaceable Parts Replaceable Parts List Front Panel Figure 5 15 Front Panel e5070ase080 258 Chapter5 Replaceable Parts Replaceable Parts List Table 5 14 Front Panel Ref Agilent Part Number C D Qty Description Desig 1 E5070 66522
103. not known to a remote environment such as a GPIB This message is not displayed when another error against a red background has already been displayed in the instrument message Warning area The warning messages for this instrument are as follows Peak not found This warning message is displayed when with the tracking turned on the peak specified by the marker search has not been found by the time the sweep is finished with the tracking executed Segment table changed This warning message is displayed when the setting specified segment by segment in the segment table is automatically changed by a change in the other setting For example this warning message is displayed when with the power specified segment by segment in the segment table the power setting for a segment is adjusted by a change in the power range setting Target value not found This warning message is displayed when with the tracking turned on the target specified by the marker search has not been found by the time the sweep is finished with the tracking executed 4 This warning message is displayed also when with the bandwidth marker displayed the setting for the bandwidth marker is changed at the end of the sweep or when with the active marker changed or moved the bandwidth is not found Transform Gate not allowed This warning message is displayed when the gating transform function of time domain function is turned on n
104. of test channel receiver for Port 3 15 dBm Opt 313 314 413 414 Port 4 IF signal level ranging operation Port 1 and Port 4 50 MHz 0 Hz 1 kHz BW 101 of test channel receiver for Port 4 15 dBm Opt 413 414 d Click OK button to run the test program The dialog box displays Now testing while the Tch IF Ranging tests are in progress 198 Chapter 4 Figure 4 65 Troubleshooting Troubleshooting Using External Test e When the tests are completed the dialog box displays Pass or Fail for each test as shown in Figure 4 65 Tch IF Ranging test results display example E5070A E5071A Opt 413 414 IF Ranging x Rch Tch Porti Pass Pass Phase Pass Pass Port2 Mag Pass Pass Phase Pass Pass Port3 Mag Pass Pass Phase Pass Pass Port4 Pass Pass Phase Pass Pass Start Test Select All Select None e5070bse124 f Ifat least one ofthe Tch IF Ranging tests failed refer to Table 4 20 External Test Failure Troubleshooting Information g return to the External Test dialog box click Exit button 3 Receiver Linearity tests These tests check the linearity gain compression of test channel receiver for each test port Required equipment Description Recommended model Coaxial cable with type N m connectors 61 cm 24 in N63 14A Procedure Perform the following procedure after Step 11 a Click Test button in t
105. removed To avoid injuries always disconnect power and discharge circuits before touching them DO NOT Service Or Adjust Alone Do not attempt internal service or adjustment unless another person capable of rendering first aid and resuscitation is present DO NOT Substitute Parts Or Modify Instrument Because of the danger of introducing additional hazards do not install substitute parts or perform unauthorized modifications to the instrument Return the instrument to a Agilent Technologies Sales and Service Office for service and repair to ensure that safety features are maintained Dangerous Procedure Warnings Warnings such as the example below precede potentially dangerous procedures throughout this manual Instructions contained in the warnings must be followed Dangerous voltages capable of causing death are presenting this instrument Use extreme caution when handling testing and adjusting this instrument Safety Symbol General definitions of safety symbols used on the instrument or in manuals are listed below Instruction Manual symbol the product is marked with this symbol when it is necessary for the user to refer to the instrument manual Alternating current Direct current On Supply Off Supply SCL In position of push button switch Out position of push button switch WARNING CAUTION NOTE Frame or chassis terminal A connection to the frame chassis of t
106. result dB Measurement uncertainty dB 0 t 0 207 0 015 5 0 075 0 015 10 0 042 0 012 15 0 031 0 012 Chapter 2 113 D s 3 D 5 o Performance Tests E5070A Performance Test Record Power level dBm Test limit dB Test result dB Measurement uncertainty dB 25 0 030 0 0087 30 0 035 0 0087 35 0 040 0 012 40 0 045 0 012 45 0 056 0 015 50 0 067 0 015 55 0 078 0 017 60 0 091 0 017 65 0 106 0 019 70 0 125 0 019 75 0 151 0 021 80 0 189 0 021 85 0 248 0 023 90 0 346 0 023 95 0 509 0 024 100 0 785 0 024 105 1 248 0 026 110 2 008 0 026 Direction 541 Options 413 and 414 only Power level dBm Test limit dB Test result dB Measurement uncertainty dB 0 t 0 207 0 015 5 0 075 0 015 10 0 042 0 012 15 0 031 0 012 25 0 030 0 0087 30 0 035 0 0087 35 0 040 0 012 40 0 045 0 012 114 2 Performance Tests E5070A Performance Test Record Power level dBm Test limit dB Test result dB Measurement uncertainty dB 45 0 056 0 015 50 0 067 0 015 55 0 078 0 017 60 0 091 0 017
107. rms Hz Hz 3M 3k lt 0 001 136 3k lt 0 001 2 1 G 3k lt 0 001 3k lt 0 001 Direction S12 CW frequency IF bandwidth Test limit dB rms Test result dB rms Hz Hz 3M 3k lt 0 001 136 3k lt 0 001 2 1 G 3k lt 0 001 3G 3k lt 0 001 108 Chapter 2 Direction S23 Option 313 and 314 only Performance Tests E5070A Performance Test Record CW frequency IF bandwidth Test limit dB rms Test result dB rms Hz Hz 3M 3k lt 0 001 1 3 G 3k lt 0 001 216 3k lt 0 001 3G 3k lt 0 001 Direction 532 Option 313 and 314 only CW frequency IF bandwidth Test limit dB rms Test result dB rms Hz Hz 3M 3k lt 0 001 136 3k lt 0 001 216 3k lt 0 001 3G 3k lt 0 001 Direction 543 Option 413 and 414 only CW frequency IF bandwidth Test limit dB rms Test result dB rms Hz Hz 3M 3k lt 0 001 136 3k lt 0 001 216 3k lt 0 001 3G 3k lt 0 001 Direction S34 Optio n 413 and 414 only CW frequency IF bandwidth Test limit dB rms Test result dB rms Hz Hz 3M 3k lt 0 001 136 3k lt 0 001 216 3k lt 0 001 3G 3k lt 0 001 Chapter 2 109 D s 3 D 5 Performance Tests E5070A Performance Test Record Crosstalk Test Direction S21 Options 213
108. sales office listing visit our web site http www agilent com find tmdir You can also contact one of the following centers and ask for a test and measurement sales representative 11 29 99 United States fax 61 3 9272 0749 Agilent Technologies tel 0 800 738 378 New Zealand Test and Measurement Call Center fax 64 4 802 6881 P O Box 4026 Englewood CO 80155 4026 Asia Pacific tel 1 800 452 4844 Agilent Technologies 24 F Cityplaza One 1111 King s Road Canada Taikoo Shing Hong Kong Agilent Technologies Canada Inc tel 852 3197 7777 5150 Spectrum Way fax 852 2506 9284 Mississauga Ontario L4W 501 tel 1 877 894 4414 Europe Agilent Technologies Test amp Measurement European Marketing Organization P O Box 999 1180 AZ Amstelveen The Netherlands tel 31 20 547 9999 Japan Agilent Technologies Japan Ltd Call Center 9 1 Takakura Cho Hachioji Shi Tokyo 192 8510 Japan tel 81 426 56 7832 fax 81 426 56 7840 Latin America Agilent Technologies Latin American Region Headquarters 5200 Blue Lagoon Drive Suite 950 Miami Florida 33126 U S A tel 305 267 4245 fax 305 267 4286 Australia New Zealand Agilent Technologies Australia Pty Ltd 347 Burwood Highway Forest Hill Victoria 3131 tel 1 800 629 485 Australia
109. system doesn t detect them a message box is displayed In this case install the device driver Chapter 4 153 Figure 4 12 Step 6 NOTE Step 7 Troubleshooting Booting Process Troubleshooting Revision and option information The firmware revision and hardware option information along with copyright declaration is displayed as shown in Figure 4 12 The E5070A E5071A firmware quickly starts up just before this display appears While the revision and option information is displayed the applications of various devices in the system are initialized Firmware revision and option information 01 01 00 15 Build 29 2002 01 29 59 Option 213 Copyright 2001 2002 Agilent Technologies Inc Portions C Copyright 1996 Microsoft Corporation All rights reserved If the display whited out entirely blued or appeared with a dialog box a mass storage problem is suspected Try to perform the mass storage recovery procedure If a message of Will Shut Down in Five Seconds is displayed in place of Initializing and the shutdown occurs the A21 board fails in starting up The following message may be displayed before the shutdown occurs Fatal Error Failed to Initialize DSP Driver or Fatal Error Failed to Initialize DSP This message indicates that the A21 board doesn t work or is not properly connected to the A20 When the firmware is revision 1 0 or 1 1 the problem may possibly be in the
110. test is completed the dialog box displays Pass or Fail for each test group as an example shown in Figure 4 17 158 Chapter 4 Troubleshooting Troubleshooting Using Internal Test Figure 4 17 Internal test result display example rev A 01 02 or earlier Internal Test Rev A 01 02 gt A2MasterDC Pass Detail A2 Slave DC Pass Detail a6 DC Pass Detail a1 DC Pass Detail At PLL Pass Detail Pass Detail Power Gain Pass Detail M Pass Detail Select All Select None Clear Exit Copyright 2001 Agilent Technologies Inc Figure 4 18 Internal test result display example rev A 03 00 or later A2 Master DC Pass A2 Slave DC Pass Detail A6 DC Pass Detail A1DC Pass Detail At PLL Pass Detail At ALC Pass Detail 220 Rch Power Gain Pass Detail Step Attenuator Pass Detail Start Test Select Select None Exit Copyright c 2002 Agilent Technologies Inc 5070 5 299 If any of the test groups failed click Detail button of that test group to look into the breakdown of the test results Figure 4 19 shows a breakdown test result example Figure 4 19 Breakdown test result display example rev A 01 02 or earlier 3 Analog GND Pass D Analog 10 9 Pass 5 Analog 4v 4V Pass Analog SV Pass a Digital 5 Pass Digital 3 3V Pass TEMPA Pass Pass Chapte
111. the following value on the power meter display Target value Pm db DA30a A Sxy x R dB It will be possible to promptly approximate the source power to the target value by decreasing the source power setting by A Sxy x R from that for the DA30 72 Chapter 2 NOTE Step 38 Step 39 Step 40 Step 41 Step 42 Step 43 NOTE Performance Tests 7 DYNAMIC ACCURACY TEST After this adjustment is performed the state is named DA30b Perform Step 13 through 24 Set the first attenuator A1 of the Z5623A to 5 dB by executing the following GPIB control command GPIB OUTPUT 712 amp_in OUTPUT 712 at_a 5 OUTPUT 712 at_b 30 Perform Step 13 through 24 Calculate the dynamic accuracy for 35 dBm using the following equation D 3 D 5 o D A Sxy x R DA35 Sxy x R DA30b Pm DA35 Pm DA30b Record the calculated D A in the calculation sheet Running D A dB column for DA35 Calculate the true dynamic accuracy using the following equation True D A Running D A dB DA35 True D A dB DA30 When the A2 decade attenuator setting is increased from X dB to X 10 dB calculate the True D A value as follows True D A X 10 Running D A X 10 True D A X Where True D A X 10 True D A value when A2 X 10 dB Running D A X 10 Running D A value when A2 X 10 dB True D A X True D A value when A1
112. to 63 Hz Maximum power consumption 350 WARNING 1 Switched automatically by the E5070A E5071A in conformity to the voltage Power Cable In accordance with international safety standards this instrument is equipped with a three wire power cable When connected to an appropriate ac power outlet this cable grounds the instrument frame The type of power cable shipped with each instrument depends on country of destination Refer to Figure E 1 for the part numbers of the power cables available For protection from electrical shock the power cable ground must not be defeated The power plug must be plugged into an outlet that provides a protective earth ground connection 364 Appendix E Power Requirement Preparation for Power Supply Figure E 1 Power cable options OPTION 900 OPTION 902 United Kingdom Plug BS 1363 250V 10 Cable 8120 1351 Continental Europe Plug CEE7 Standard Sheet VII 250V 10A Cable 8120 1689 OPTION 904 OPTION 912 U S Canada Plug NEMA 6 15P 250V 6A Cable 8120 0698 Denmark OPTION 903 OPTION 906 OPTION 917 OPTION 920 U S Canada Plug NEMA 5 15P 125V 10A 2 8120 1378 Switzerland Plug SEV 12 250V 10 Cable 8120 2104 India Republic of S Africa gt Plug IEC 83 B1 250V 10A Cable 8120 4211 Argentina u uu iinb z 43 Plug SR 107 2 D 250V 10A Pl
113. with your finger automatically concludes the touch screen calibration 286 Chapter 6 Replacement Procedure A27 Mass Storage Disk Drive Replacement NOTE With no operation on the touch screen calibration screen for a preset time it automatically closes and the previous measurement screen reappears 2 o 3 5 X Chapter 6 287 Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Step 4 CAUTION Figure 6 5 Step 5 Step 6 Step 7 Replacement Procedure A28 FDD Floppy Disk Drive Removal 28 FDD Floppy Disk Drive Removal Tools Required Pozidriv screwdriver pt size 2 medium where Pozidriv screws are in use TORX screwdriver T10 T15 T20 where TORX screws in use Procedure Refer to Figure 6 5 for this procedure Remove the outer cover as described in Outer Cover Removal on page 282 Disconnect the cable item 1 connected from the power supply Remove three TORX T10 screws item 2 Slide the A28 FDD assembly backward Slide the assembly slowly to prevent tension from cables Disconnect the flat cable item 3 from the FDD Remove the four TORX T10 screws item 4 fastening the FDD to the mount Remove the two TORX T10 screws item 5 fastening the plate A28 FDD Removal e5070ase227 288 Chapter 6 Figure 6 6 e5070ase232 Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Step 4 Replacement Procedure 23
114. 0 Error Term port 2 tests 11 Error Term port 3 tests 12 Error Term port 4 tests These tests check the reflection tracking directivity and source match for Port 2 Port 3 and Port 4 Error Term port 3 tests apply to Option 313 314 413 414 instruments only Error Term port 4 tests apply to Option 413 414 instruments only Required equipment Same as the Error Term port 1 tests Procedure Perform the same test procedure as the Error Term port 1 tests The port number of the dialog boxes and the test port where the Open Short and Load terminations are connected change as shown in Table 4 13 Table 4 13 Error Term tests setups and procedures Test item Port number of dialog boxes Connect Open Short and Load terminations to Error Term port 2 port 2 Port 2 Error Term port 3 port 3 Port 3 Error Term port 4 port 4 Port 4 192 Chapter 4 Figure 4 55 Figure 4 56 Troubleshooting Troubleshooting Using External Test 13 Handler I O Board tests These tests check the function of Handler I O board for interfacing with an external component handler The tests are performed using a handler I O test kit as a substitute for the handler Required equipment Description Recommended model Handler I O test kit E5070 65001 Procedure Perform the following procedure after step 11 a Click Handler I O Board in the pull down menu of the Test List bo
115. 0 dBm Direction S21 Power level dBm Test limit dB Test result dB Measurement uncertainty dB 0 t 0 207 t 0 015 5 0 075 t 0 015 10 0 042 0 012 15 0 031 0 012 25 0 030 0 0087 30 0 035 0 0087 35 0 040 0 012 40 0 045 0 012 45 0 056 0 015 50 0 067 0 015 55 0 078 0 017 60 0 091 0 017 65 0 106 0 019 70 0 125 0 019 75 0 151 0 021 80 0 189 0 021 85 0 248 0 023 90 0 346 0 023 95 0 509 0 024 100 0 785 0 024 105 1 248 0 026 110 2 008 0 026 112 Chapter 2 Direction S12 Performance Tests E5070A Performance Test Record Power level dBm Test limit dB Test result dB Measurement uncertainty dB 0 0 207 0 015 5 0 075 0 015 10 0 042 0 012 15 0 031 0 012 25 0 030 0 0087 30 0 035 0 0087 35 0 040 0 012 40 0 045 0 012 45 0 056 0 015 50 0 067 0 015 55 0 078 0 017 60 0 091 0 017 65 0 106 0 019 70 0 125 0 019 75 0 151 0 021 80 0 189 0 021 85 0 248 0 023 90 0 346 0 023 95 0 509 0 024 100 0 785 0 024 105 1 248 0 026 110 2 008 0 026 Direction 531 Options 313 314 413 and 414 only Power level dBm Test limit dB Test
116. 0 dBm on the power meter display Wait for power meter reading to settle when verifying the adjustment result Since the source power resolution is 0 05 dB adjust for the nearest possible value to 0 dBm Press lt gt to make Single sweep measurement Record the value of the source power setting in the calculation sheet Power setting dB column for the dynamic accuracy test The record starts from DA20 row Record the power meter reading in the calculation sheet Pm dB column Read the mean value of the S21 displayed in the upper left corner of the graphic display 70 Chapter 2 Step 17 Step 18 Step 19 Step 20 Step 21 Step 22 NOTE Step 23 NOTE Step 24 NOTE Step 25 Step 26 Performance Tests 7 DYNAMIC ACCURACY TEST and record it in the calculation sheet Sxy dB column Set Port Char function to OFF in accordance with the following procedure a Press System C gt CY 5 W CD GD W CA 5 CY select Service Menu Enter J b Press gt gt C gt C gt C gt select Service Functions Enter J 5070 5071 will once prompt you a password entry for the access to the Service Functions Enter the password kid Press CV C select System Calibration Enter e Press gt gt select Port Char to set the Port Char to OFF Perform Return and press 4 gt 4 select
117. 00 1 Power Gain 2 IF Ranging Chapter 4 177 R o 0 o gt e o 2 Troubleshooting Troubleshooting Using External Test Table 4 4 External test group menu rev A 03 00 3 Receiver Linearity 4 Dynamic Range 5 Trace Noise 6 Error Term 7 Handler I O Board Test equipment required for external test Table 4 5 shows the equipment required for performing the external test Table 4 5 Required equipment Required test equipment Qty Recommended model Coaxial cable with N type m connectors 61 cm 24 in 1 N6314A Fixed attenuator 10 dB N m N f 1 8491A B C Calibration kit 1 85032 N type coaxial Short termination 3 part of 85032F 85054D or part of 85033E 85050D with Type N adapter Handler I O test kit 1 E5070 65001 NOTE Required quantity of Short termination is 3 in addition to one included in the calibration kit To Execute the External Test rev A 01 01 or earlier To isolate faulty board assembly in analog section execute the external test rev A 01 01 or earlier in accordance with the following procedure The test procedure needs to be performed using a mouse in addition to the front panel keys NOTE To perform the external test properly the following conditions must be met 1 Environmental temperature 23 C 5 C 2 Warm up status indicator in the instrument status ba
118. 070 61651 2 1 CABLE ASSY SRGD 9 E5070 61650 1 1 RF CABLE ASSY SRGD 10 E5070 61649 8 1 CABLE ASSY SRGD 11 0955 0301 9 1 U WAVE ATTN 2DB 12 E5070 61607 8 1 RF CABLE ASSY SRGD 13 5070 61656 7 1 CABLE ASSY SRGD 14 1810 0188 1 2 TERMINATION COAX Chapter 5 253 e 2 e D D v D E n Replaceable Parts Replaceable Parts List Front View Semirigid Cables Opt 413 Figure 5 13 Front View Semirigid Cables Opt 413 IT WU VU b Qe eee ae 658 4 e5070ase289 254 Chapter5 Replaceable Parts Replaceable Parts List Table 5 12 Front View Semirigid Cables Opt 413 Ref Agilent Part Number C D Qty Description Desig 1 E5070 61643 2 1 CABLE ASSY SRGD 2 E5070 61645 1 CABLE ASSY SRGD 3 E5070 61644 3 1 RF CABLE ASSY SRGD 4 5070 61648 7 1 CABLE ASSY SRGD 5 5070 61632 9 1 CABLE ASSY SRGD 6 E5070 61654 5 1 CABLE ASSY SRGD 7 E5070 61647 8 1 RF CABLE ASSY SRGD 8 E5070 61646 5 1 CABLE ASSY SRGD 9 E5070 61631 8 1 RF CABLE ASSY SRGD 10 E5070 61651 2 1 RF CABLE ASSY SRGD 11 E5070 61650 1 1 RF CABLE ASSY SRGD 12 E5070 61649 8 1 RF CABLE ASSY SRGD 13 5070 61642 1 1 RF CABLE ASSY SRGD 14 0955 0301 9 1 U WAVE ATTN 2DB 15 E5070 61641 0 1 RF CABLE ASSY SRGD 16 1810 0118 1 1 TERMINATION COAX Chapter 5 255 e 2 e D D v D
119. 070ase282 164 The upper and lower A2 boards have the same part number Board location inside cabinet Pee eA A2 Receiver Upper Chapter4 Troubleshooting Function Specific Troubleshooting Function Specific Troubleshooting If the E5070A E5071A exhibits a failure symptom that is related to a specific function or control such as a front panel key control display data storage remote control interface printer interface external trigger external keyboard or mouse isolate the trouble using the Function Specific Troubleshooting procedures described below The major functions of the E5070A E50714 and the troubleshooting procedure for each function are shown in Table 4 2 Table 4 2 Major functions and troubleshooting procedures Function Description Troubleshooting Front panel keys All the E5070A E50714 functions except for Refer to To Check the Front and service functions can be set and Panel on page 167 controlled via the front panel keys Touch panel The E5070A E50714A equipped with option 016 Refer to To Check the has a touch screen display that allows all the Touch Panel Option 016 functions in the menu bars setup windows and only on page 168 dialog boxes to be set by a touch to the screen panel LCD display Almost all the information including the Refer to To Check the measurement value setup state result data LCD on page 169 processing menu bar softkey label and o
120. 1 0 021 80 0 189 0 021 85 0 248 0 023 90 0 346 0 023 95 0 509 0 024 100 0 785 0 024 105 1 248 0 026 110 2 008 0 026 Direction 531 Options 313 314 413 414 only Power level dBm Test limit dB Test result dB Measurement uncertainty dB 0 0 207 0 015 5 0 075 0 015 10 0 042 0 012 15 0 031 0 012 25 0 030 0 0087 30 0 035 0 0087 35 0 040 0 012 40 0 045 0 012 45 0 056 0 015 128 Chapter 2 Performance Tests E5071A Performance Test Record Power level dBm Test limit dB Test result dB Measurement uncertainty dB 50 0 067 0 015 55 0 078 0 017 60 0 091 0 017 65 0 106 0 019 70 0 125 0 019 75 0 151 0 021 80 0 189 0 021 85 0 248 0 023 90 0 346 0 023 95 0 509 0 024 100 0 785 0 024 105 1 248 0 026 110 2 008 0 026 Direction 541 Options 413 and 414 only Power level dBm Test limit dB Test result dB Measurement uncertainty dB 0 0 207 0 015 5 0 075 0 015 10 0 042 0 012 15 0 031 0 012 25 0 030 0 0087 30 0 035 0 0087 35 0 040 0 012 40 0 045 0 012 45 0 056 0 015 50 0 067 0 015 55 0 078 0 017 60 0 091 0 017 65 0 106 0 019 Chapter 2 129
121. 1 WIRE ASSY W STANDBY SWITCH 2 0515 2028 9 2 SCREW MACH M2 5 x 6 FL T8 274 Chapter 5 Replaceable Parts Replaceable Parts List Cover Assembly Figure 5 31 Cover Assembly e5070ase067 Table 5 30 Cover Assembly Ref Agilent Part Number C D Qty Description Desig 1 E5070 61657 8 1 FLAT CBL ASSY Opt 016 2 0515 0374 2 SCREW MACH M3 0 x 10 PN T10 Opt 016 3 5183 4184 1 CNTR TOUCH PANEL Opt 016 4 0515 0430 2 SCREW MACH M3 0 x 6 PN T10 Opt 016 5 1400 3156 2 SADDLE EDGE Opt 016 6 E5070 00601 1 COVER N N N 7 0515 0430 4 SCREW MACH M3 0 x 6 PN T10 e 2 e D D v D n Chapter 5 275 Replaceable Parts Replaceable Parts List Cover Assembly Figure 5 32 Cover Assembly e5070ase068 Table 5 31 Cover Assembly Ref Agilent Part Number C D Qty Description Desig 1 E5070 61628 3 1 WIRE ASSY 2 1400 1334 6 2 CLAMP CABLE 3 E5070 6653 1 7 1 LCD ADAPTER 4 1400 0611 0 1 CLAMP CABLE 5 1400 0611 0 1 CLAMP CABLE 6 E5070 61622 7 1 FLAT CABLE ASSY 276 Chapter 5 Figure 5 33 e5070ase293 Label Rear Face Label Rear Face Windows 98 Replaceable Parts Replaceable Parts List Table 5 32 Label Rear Face Ref Agilent Part Number C D Qty Description Desig 1 E5070 87102 2 LABEL E5070A 5071 87101 LABEL
122. 1 for each of the S parameters shown in the first and second rows in Table 2 5 40 Chapter 2 Performance Tests 5 CROSSTALK TEST 5 CROSSTALK TEST Description This test checks the crosstalks between test ports of the E5070A E5071A The crosstalk is tested by performing through measurements with two test ports connected together and short ended isolation measurements with the test ports terminated with N type Short devices A through calibration is performed to have the through measurement data as the N reference to which the isolation measurement data is compared With a setting of 101 0 sweep points for a specified frequency range a swept measurement with the short ended 5 test ports 15 repeated 16 times and the measurement data is averaged The worst crosstalk value is determined from the peak value of the average data a y Specification DA E5070A 120 dB 23 5 3 MHz to 3 GHz IFBW 10 Hz 0 dBm 5071 120 dB 23 5 3 MHz to 3 GHz IFBW 10 Hz 0 dBm 110 dB 23 5 SC 3 GHz to 6 GHz IFBW 10 Hz 0 dBm 100 dB 23 5 6 GHz to 7 5 GHz IFBW 10 Hz 0 dBm 90 dB 23 5 C 7 5 GHz to 8 5 GHz IFBW 10 Hz 0 dBm The crosstalk specification applies when response calibration is performed Test equipment Coaxial cable with Type N m connectors 61 cm 24 in N6314A p n 8120 8862 Type N m coaxial Short termination 4 ea part of 85032F 54D 3 3E 50D w
123. 10 dB and A2 X dB Step 44 Step 45 Step 46 Step 47 Step 48 Step 49 Record the true D A in the calculation sheet True D A column for DA35 Set the first attenuator of the Z5623A to 10 dB by executing the following GPIB control command GPIB OUTPUT 712 amp_in OUTPUT 712 at_a 10 OUTPUT 712 at_b 30 Perform Step 13 through 24 Calculate the dynamic accuracy for 40 dBm using the following equation D A Sxy x R DA40 Sxy x R DA30b DA40 Pm DA30b Record the calculated D A in the calculation sheet Running D A dB column for DA40 Calculate the true dynamic accuracy using the following equation Chapter 2 73 Table 2 13 Step 50 Step 51 Performance Tests 7 DYNAMIC ACCURACY TEST True D A Running D A dB DA40 True D A dB DA30 Record the true D A in the calculation sheet True D A column for DA40 Subsequently perform Step 34 through 50 for the attenuator settings of 45 dB to 110 dB DA40a to DA110 shown in Table 2 13 Z5623A attenuator settings A1 setting A2 setting GPIB command dB dB DA20 0 20 OUTPUT 712 amp_in OUTPUT 712 at_a 0 OUTPUT 712 at_b 0 DA25 5 20 OUTPUT 712 amp_in OUTPUT 712 at_a 5 OUTPUT 712 at_b 20 DA30 10 20 OUTPUT 712 amp_in OUTPUT 712 at_a 10 OUTPUT 712 at_b 20 DA30a 0 30 OUTPUT 712 amp_in OUTPUT 712 at_a 0 OUTPUT 712 at_b 30
124. 2 at_a 11 OUTPUT 712 at_b 110 Step 4 Press and to initialize the 5070 5071 Step 5 Set the controls as follows Control settings Key strokes Center frequency 50 MHz Center 5 0 J Wa Chapter 2 69 Step 6 Step 7 Step 8 Step 9 Step 10 Step 11 Step 12 NOTE Step 13 Step 14 Step 15 Step 16 Performance Tests 7 DYNAMIC ACCURACY TEST Control settings Key strokes Frequency span 0 Hz 9 IF Bandwidth 10 Hz C Avg Enter J 1 Source power 15 dBm Sweep Setup 2 1 51 Wait for the power meter reading to settle and perform zero adjustment of the power meter Dynamic accuracy tests at 20 dBm to 110dBm Press and select Log Mag from display format menu Set the controls as follows Control settings Key strokes Center frequency 1 195 Center CJ CJ 1 9 5 Gn GHz Frequency span 0 Hz 0 Number of points 15 Sweep Setup J C gt CY 5 CV CV select Points Enter 7 5 x1 Press Marker Fctn J C gt CV 5 CY 5 CV 5 CV o CY 5 CY to set Statistics function to ON Press and select S21 from S parameter menu Set the first attenuator A1 of the Z5623A to 0 dB and the second attenuator A2 to 20 dB by executing the following GPIB control command GPIB OUTPUT 712 amp in OUTPUT 712 at 0 OUTPUT 712 at b 20 Adjust the source power for
125. 2 1 MOTHER BOARD 2 0515 0372 2 9 SCREW MACH M3 0 x 8 PN T10 270 Chapter 5 Replaceable Parts Replaceable Parts List Chassis Assembly Figure 5 27 Chassis Assembly m m 5070 292 Table 5 26 Chassis Assembly Ref Agilent Part Number C D Qty Description Desig 1 5070 60031 0 1 CHASSIS 2 5022 1190 4 1 FRONT FRAME 3 0515 2113 3 6 SCREW MACH MA 0 x 8 PN 720 4 8160 0641 3 1 GASKET 125 cm e 2 e D D v D n Chapter 5 271 Replaceable Parts Replaceable Parts List Keyboard Assembly Figure 5 28 Keyboard Assembly e5070ase064 Table 5 27 Ref Agilent Part Number C D Qty Description Desig 1 0515 0430 5 8 SCREW MACH M3 0 x 6 PN T10 272 Chapter 5 Replaceable Parts Replaceable Parts List LCD and Inverter Assembly Figure 5 29 LCD and Inverter Assembly e5070ase295 Table 5 28 LCD and Inverter Assembly Ref Agilent Part Number C D Qty Description Desig 1 0515 1402 5 4 SCREW MACH M3 0 x 8 PN T15 2 5070 61627 2 1 WIRE ASSY e 2 D D o n Chapter 5 273 Replaceable Parts Replaceable Parts List Standby Switch Assembly Figure 5 30 Standby Switch Assembly e5070ase066 Table 5 29 Standby Switch Assembly Ref Agilent Part Number C D Qty Description Desig 1 E5070 61901 5
126. 214 313 and 314 only Frequency range Hz IF bandwidth Hz Test limit dB Test result dB 3M 3G 10 lt 120 Direction 812 Options 213 214 313 and 314 only Frequency range Hz IF bandwidth Hz Test limit dB Test result dB 3M 3G 10 lt 120 Direction 532 Options 313 314 413 and 414 only Frequency range Hz IF bandwidth Hz Test limit dB Test result dB 3M 3G 10 lt 120 Direction 523 Options 313 314 413 and 414 only Frequency range Hz IF bandwidth Hz Test limit dB Test result dB 3M 3G 10 lt 120 Direction 541 Options 413 and 414 only Frequency range Hz IF bandwidth Hz Test limit dB Test result dB 3M 3G 10 lt 120 Direction 514 Options 413 and 414 only Frequency range Hz IF bandwidth Hz Test limit dB Test result dB 3M 3G 10 lt 120 System Dynamic Range Test Direction S21 Options 213 214 313 and 314 only Frequency range Hz IF bandwidth Hz Test limit dB Test result dB 3M 1 5G 10 lt 120 1 5G 3G 10 lt 122 3M 1 5G 3k lt 95 15G 3G 3k lt 97 110 Chapter 2 Direction S12 Options 213 214 313 and 314 only Performance Tests E5070A Performance Test Record
127. 3 2 S32 3 2 S32 2 1 2 S12 2 3 S23 2 3 S23 3 Not required 2 1 S21 4 1 841 Chapter 2 59 D 3 D 5 Performance Tests 6 SYSTEM DYNAMIC RANGE TEST Table 2 10 Select Ports settings for response calibration Option 213 214 313 314 413 414 4 Not required 1 2 S12 1 4 514 Step 37 Press lt gt C and to perform Isolation calibration Step 38 Disconnect the load and connect the N N cable as shown in the following figures Opt 313 314 Figure 2 28 Opt 413 414 Figure 2 29 Figure 2 28 Thru calibration setup for system dynamic range test setup Opt 313 314 E5070A 5071A N m N m Cable e5070ase011 60 Chapter 2 Performance Tests 6 SYSTEM DYNAMIC RANGE TEST Figure 2 29 Thru calibration setup for system dynamic range test setup Opt 413 414 E5070A 5071A D s 3 D 5 N m N m Cable e5070ase017 Step 39 Press lt gt and to perform Thru calibration Step 40 Press CY gt lt gt to perform Done Step 41 Press C gt C gt to select Select Ports in reference to the position of Done and press Enter J Step 42 Change Select Ports setting as shown in the fourth row in Tab
128. 4 26 2 7 5GHz 8 5cHz 511 Mag NotDone NotDone Not Done NotDone NotDone NotDone NotDone NotDone Not Done Phase Not Done NotDone NotDone NotDone NotDone MotDone NotDone Not Done 522 Mag Not Done Not Done NotDone NotDone NotDone Not Done NotDone NotDone Not Done Phase Not Done Not Done Not Done Not Done Not Done NotDone NotDone NotDone Not Done 533 Mag NotDone NotDone Not Done Not Done NotDone NotDone NotDone Not Done Not Done Phase Not Done Not Done NotDone Not Done Not Done NotDone NotDone Done 544 Mag NotDone Not Done Not Done NotDone NotDone Not Done NotDone NotDone Not Done Phase Not Done NotDone NotDone NotDone NotDone NotDone NotDone NotDone Not Done Select All Select None Exit e5070bse130 b Select the S parameter for the test by clicking the check boxes Then click Start Test button The instruction dialog box opens as shown in Figure 4 73 Follow the instruction Clicking Select All button checks all the check boxes Clicking Select None button clears all the check boxes Click Exit to return to the External Test dialog box SHORT all ports dialog box Connect SHORTs to Ports eee e5070bse128 Connect type N Short termination to all the test ports For more information on the Trace Noise tests setup see Table 4 18 Trace Noise tests setup Test parameter Connect Short Test frequency point
129. 5071 2 5185 3713 5 LABEL 213 5185 3714 6 LABEL 214 5185 3715 7 1 LABEL 313 5185 3716 8 1 LABEL 314 5185 3717 9 1 LABEL 413 5185 3718 0 1 LABEL 414 5185 3720 4 1 LABEL 016 5185 3722 6 1 LABEL 1 5 5080 3939 5 1 LABEL 010 3 5070 87103 3 1 LABEL NOTE for Switch Chapter 5 277 e 2 2 D D v n Replaceable Parts Replaceable Parts List Other Parts Table 5 33 Other Parts Agilent Part Number C D Qty Description E5070 900x0 6 1 USER S GUIDE E5070 900x1 7 1 INSTALLATION AND QUICK START GUIDE 5070 900 2 1 8 1 PROGRAMMER S GUIDE 5070 900 3 1 9 1 PROGRAMMER S GUIDE E5070 901x0 1 SERVICE MANUAL 25070 9050 1 1 CD ROM DOCUMENTATION 1150 7846 6 1 MOUSE 1150 7970 7 1 KEYBOARD TE The number indicated by x in the part number of each manual sample program disk or CD ROM 0 for the first edition is incremented by 1 each time a revision is made The latest edition comes with the product 2 Opt only 278 Chapter 5 2 o 3 5 X Replacement Procedure This chapter provides procedure for removing and replacing the major assemblies in the E5070A E5071A ENA Series Network Analyzer
130. 6 1 A22 FRONT PANEL KEYBOARD 2 E5070 25101 1 1 KEYPAD RUBBER 3 E5070 01231 8 1 ANGLE N CONN 4 86290 60005 7 1 CONN TP N ASSY 2190 0104 0 1 WSHR LK INTL T 2950 0132 6 1 NUT HEX DUB CHAM 5 5070 00202 1 1 PANEL SUB 6 E5070 00201 0 1 PANEL FRONT E5070A Opt 21x E5070 00203 2 1 PANEL FRONT E5070A Opt 31x E5070 00204 3 1 PANEL FRONT 5070 Opt 41x E5071 00201 0 1 PANEL FRONT 5071 Opt 21x E5071 00203 2 1 PANEL FRONT 5071 Opt 31x E5071 00204 3 1 PANEL FRONT 5071 Opt 41x 7 5182 7594 2 1 KNOB 8 E5070 66532 8 1 USB Adapter 0515 0430 2 3 SCREW MACH M3 0 x 6 PN T10 9 See Table 5 29 1 STANDBY SWITCH ASSEMBLY 10 E5070 60101 5 1 LCD FILTER ASSY Standard 5070 60102 5 1 LCD TPANEL ASSY Opt 016 2090 0888 5 1 BACKLIGHT included in LCD ASSY 11 0950 4091 2 1 A52 INVERTER LS700 0515 1974 2 2 SCREW MACH M2 5 x 4 PN 8 12 E5070 01211 4 1 BRACKETINVERTER 13 E5070 00601 4 1 COVER SHIELD 14 5041 0564 4 1 KEY CAP Chapter 5 259 e 2 2 D D v n Replaceable Parts Replaceable Parts List Rear View Figure 5 16 Rear View e5070ase294 Table 5 15 Rear View Ref Agilent Part Num
131. 8 System Recovery System Recovery for the E5070A E5071A This is the final confirmation of the starting of the execution of system recovery System Recovery Confirmation Screen System Recovery This process will recover the system drive of this instrument to the factory shipment state takes about 30 minutes Please refer to the Operation Manual for more information This is the last chance to quit the recovery process Continue Y N e5070auj111 To stop executing system recovery press Under this condition the E5070A E5071A starts up normally After execution of system recovery has been started Figure B 2 appears Never turn off the power while system recovery is in progress Executing system recovery takes about 30 minutes Screen Showing System Recovery in Progress SYSTEM RECOVERY IN PROGRESS System recovery in progress It takes about 30 minutes Please DO NOT TURN THE POWER OFF DURING THIS TIME e5070auj110 While system recovery 1 in progress the system 15 restarted several times with the message saying Push key to enter recovery mode displayed While this message is displayed do not touch the keys The System Setting Change Dialog Box Figure B 3 will appear A panel appears showing that restarting the system is required after the system setup has been changed Figure B 3 Select Yes Press the return key Appendix B 345 42 lt 4
132. 8 Table 2 14 Figure 2 35 Performance Tests 7 DYNAMIC ACCURACY TEST command GPIB OUTPUT 712 amp_in OUTPUT 712 at_a 0 OUTPUT 712 at_b 0 Perform Step 69 through 73 for DAO Obtain the values for DAO in place of DAS Record the true D A values in the performance test record Dynamic accuracy column for the dynamic accuracy test Dynamic accuracy tests for other test ports Connect the test equipment and select S parameter in accordance with Table 2 14 Perform Step 11 through 76 for each test setup and S parameter shown in Table 2 14 Dynamic accuracy test setups and S parameter settings S Parameter Test setup setting Opt 213 214 Opt 313 314 Opt 413 414 512 Figure 2 35 Figure 2 36 Figure 2 38 531 Not required Figure 2 37 Figure 2 39 S41 Not required Not required Figure 2 40 Dynamic accuracy test setup Opt 213 214 E5070A 5071A aoa Cc gt 0000 9056 09 0000 lt 00 oono DOO e5070ase024 N m N m Cable Z5623A H01 LL J 6dB Fixed Attenuation L Power Sensor 78 GPIB Controller GPIB Interface Cable Power Meter
133. A 6 Manual Changes Change 1 Table 6 1 on page 281 See Table A 6 Required Tools Assembly Outer Cover Pozidriv screwdriver TORX screwdriver pt size 21 a T8 T157 20 2 flat screwdriver cutting plier plier soldering iron hex key open wrench open torque wrench 1 5 mm 9 16 in 5 8 in 5 16 in Front Panel Mass Storage FDD Handler Power Supply CPU DIMM Digital Mother Board lt lt l s 2 lt lt s lt lt Source Board 2 Receiver Board lt Fan amp Switch Control Board Fan Reference Oven Switch Attenuator Analog Motherboard Analog Interface Board Display Board GPIB Board Front Keyboard Inverter LCD LCD Backlight N connector lt a lt a lt 2 lt 2 2 a where Pozidriv screws in use 2 where TORX screws in use 336 AppendixA Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Step 4 Step 5 Step 6 Step 7 Step 8 Step 9 Manual Changes Change 1 Outer Cover Removal Tools Required Pozidriv screwdriver pt size 2 medium where Pozidriv screws are in use TORX screw
134. A1 source board Fatal Error Failed to Update DSP Code If this happened the A21 board failed in writing DSP program into flash ROM when the firmware was installed first or updated to the newest version A problem in the A21 or A20 18 suspected Measurement view The measurement view as shown in Figure 4 13 is displayed after the system initialization is completed without problem 154 Chapter4 Troubleshooting Booting Process Troubleshooting Figure 4 13 Measurement view ive 2Response 3Stimulus 4Mkr Analysis 5 Instr State 511 Log Mag 10 00dB Ref 0 000dB 10 00 Display 10 00 Calibration Stimulus Sweep Setup 40 00 Trigger Step 8 Power on self test The power on self test is executed once automatically before the measurement starts While the power on self test is in progress Power on test is displayed at the left in the instrument status bar If the power on test fails an error message is displayed there For more details refer to Troubleshooting Using Internal Test on page 156 R o 0 o gt e o 2 Q Chapter 4 155 NOTE NOTE NOTE Troubleshooting Troubleshooting Using Internal Test Troubleshooting Using Internal Test The Agilent E5070A E5071A has an internal test function to diagnose the analog measurement section and internal dc power supply voltages The internal test make
135. A70 Sxy x R DA60b Pm DA70 Pm DA60b True D A Running D A dB DA70 True D A dB DA60 DA70a 0 70 Adjust source power for Pm db DA70a Sxy x R dB DA70a Sxy x R dB DA70 DA70b 0 70 REF70 REF70 DA75 5 70 Sxy x R DA75 Sxy x R DA70b Pm DA75 Pm DA70b True D A Running D A dB DA75 True D A dB DA70 DA80 10 70 Sxy x R DA80 Sxy x DA70b Pm DA80 Pm DA70b True D A Running D A dB DA80 True D A dB DA70 DA80a 0 80 Adjust source power for Pm db DA80a Sxy x R dB DA80a Sxy x R dB DA80 DA80b 0 80 REF80 REF80 DA85 80 Sxy x R DA85 Sxy x R DA80b Pm DA85 Pm DA80b True D A Running D A dB DA85 True D A dB DA80 DA90 10 80 104 Chapter 2 Performance Tests E5070A E5071A Performance Test Calculation Sheet Name Al A2 Power Pm dB Sxy dB dB Port SxyxR Running True setting Port Char ON Char OFF dB D A D A dB Sxy x R DA90 Sxy x R DA80b Pm DA90 Pm DA80b gt True D A Running D A dB DA90 True D A dB DA80 DA90a 0 90 Adjust source power for Pm db DA90a Sxy x R dB DA90a Sxy x R dB DA90 DA90b 0 90 REF90 REF90 DA95 5 90
136. Agilent 5070 5071 ENA Series RF Network Analyzers Service Manual Second Edition FIRMWARE REVISIONS SERIAL NUMBERS This manual applies directly to instruments that have the serial number JP1KJ00111 or above for E5070A and JP1K00238 or above for E5071A For additional important information about serial numbers see Appendix A RE Agilent Technologies Agilent Part No E5070 90110 March 2003 Printed in Japan NOTE NOTE Notices The information contained in this document is subject to change without notice This document contains proprietary information that is protected by copyright All rights are reserved No part of this document may be photocopied reproduced or translated into another language without the prior written consent of the Agilent Technologies Agilent Technologies Japan Ltd Component Test PGU Kobe 1 3 2 Murotani Nishi ku Kobe Hyogo 651 2241 Japan Copyright Agilent Technologies Japan Ltd 2002 2003 Portions Copyright 1996 Microsoft Corporation All rights reserved Manual Printing History The manual s printing date and part number indicate its current edition The printing date changes when a new edition is printed Minor corrections and updates that are incorporated at reprint do not cause the date to change The manual part number changes when extensive technical changes are incorporated April 2002 Preliminary June 2002 First Edition March 2003 Seco
137. CALC FSIM SEND PMC PORT USER FIL command the formatted data array MMEM LOAD FDAT command and limit table MMEM STOR LIM command for the active trace on the active channel segment sweep table MMEM LOAD SEGM command for the active channel VBA project MMEM LOAD PROG command etc cannot be read normally 101 Failed to write file This error occurs when the formatted data array MMEM STOR FDATcommand and limit table MMEM STOR LIM command for the active trace on the active channel segment sweep table MMEM STOR SEGM command for the active channel display image MMEM STOR IMAG command for the LCD screen VBA project file MMEM STOR PROG command etc cannot be written normally 4 257 File name error A file name error This message appears when an error exists in the file name and hence a command is not executed correctly This error occurs when you try to copy to an unsuitable file name for example 256 File name not found The file name specified is not found and hence the command is not executed correctly This error occurs when you try to read a file that does not exist in a disk or a disk is not correctly inserted into the drive to read or write a file for example 107 File transfer failed This error occurs when writing data into or reading data from a file MMEM TRAN command fails Appendix F 371 105 114 53 224 282 213 161 101 141 Messages G
138. Click Handler Board in the pull down menu of the Test List box b Click Test button in the dialog box Then Handler I O Board tests dialog box opens as shown in Figure 4 78 Chapter 4 207 Figure 4 78 Figure 4 79 NOTE Troubleshooting Troubleshooting Using External Test Handler Board tests dialog box Not Done Exit e5070bse135 Click the Test button in the dialog box message of Connect Handler I O Test Kit will be displayed d Connect the handler I O test kit to the Handler I O connector on the rear panel e Click OK button The dialog box displays Now testing while the Handler I O Board test is in progress f When the tests are completed the dialog box displays Pass or Fail of test result as shown in Figure 4 79 Handler I O Board test result example Start Test e5070bse136 g Ifthe Handler I O Board test failed refer to Table 4 20 External Test Failure Troubleshooting Information h To return to the External Test dialog box click Exit button To end the external test click Exit button in the External Test dialog box External Test Failure Troubleshooting Table 4 20 represents the contents of the external tests test objectives and the relationships of failed tests to probable faulty board assemblies If the instrument fails an external test 208 Chapter 4 Troubleshooting Troubleshooting Using External Test
139. DA85 5 80 OUTPUT 712 amp_in OUTPUT 712 5 OUTPUT 712 at_b 80 DA90 10 80 OUTPUT 712 amp_in OUTPUT 712 at_a 10 OUTPUT 712 at_b 80 DA90a 0 90 OUTPUT 712 amp_in OUTPUT 712 at 0 OUTPUT 712 at_b 90 DA95 5 90 OUTPUT 712 amp_in OUTPUT 712 5 OUTPUT 712 at_b 90 DA100 10 90 OUTPUT 712 amp_in OUTPUT 712 at_a 10 OUTPUT 712 at_b 90 DA100a 0 100 OUTPUT 712 amp_in OUTPUT 712 at 0 OUTPUT 712 at_b 100 DA105 5 100 OUTPUT 712 amp in OUTPUT 712 5 OUTPUT 712 at_b 100 Chapter 2 75 Table 2 13 Step 52 Step 53 NOTE Step 54 Step 55 Step 56 Step 57 Step 58 Step 59 Step 60 Step 61 Performance Tests 7 DYNAMIC ACCURACY TEST Z5623A attenuator settings 1 setting A2 setting GPIB command dB dB DA110 10 100 OUTPUT 712 amp_in OUTPUT 712 at_a 10 OUTPUT 712 at_b 100 Dynamic accuracy tests at 20 dBm to 0 dBm Set the first attenuator A1 of the Z5623A to 10 dB and the second attenuator A2 to 10 dB by executing the following GPIB control command GPIB OUTPUT 712 amp_in OUTPUT 712 at_a 10 OUTPUT 712 at_b 10 Adjust the source power for 10 dBm on the power meter display Wait for power meter reading to settle when verifying the adjustment result Since the source power resolution is 0 05 dB adjust for the nearest pos
140. E 2 lt op lt Figure B 3 Step 9 NOTE Step 10 NOTE System Recovery System Recovery for the E5070A E5071A System Setting Change Dialog Box System Settings Change gt To finish setting up your new hardware you must restart your computer Do you want to restart your computer No e5070auj109 The Enter Network Password dialog box appears asking for the entry of the network password You need not enter anything but select OK Press the return key Entering a password at this step causes the panel to appear each time you start up the instrument with entry of a password requested Canceling causes the system to restart with the measurement screen appearing However this panel will continue to appear subsequently each time the system is started up The System Setup Complete dialog box appears Select OK Press the return key to restart the system This concludes the execution of system recovery If the system recovery fails due to system calibration data corruption the following messages will be displayed In this case press OK to reboot Some calibration files are corrupt or missing System Setup Incomplete Click OK button to reboot If those messages are displayed or the problems are not solved by the system recovery there is possibility of a failure Contact Agilent Technology s Customer Contact listed at the end of this guide or the company
141. E The RF output level is measured at the minimum maximum and proper frequencies other than the source adjustment frequencies within the specified frequency range c Press C and to make a Single sweep measurement d Wait for the power meter reading to settle Then record the reading in the calculation sheet Power meter reading a column e Change the E5070A E50714 center frequency in accordance with Table 2 2 and perform Step 6 c and 6 d for each frequency f Calculate test results using the equation given in the calculation sheet Record the calculated test results in the performance test record Test result column for the level flatness test Chapter 2 31 NOTE Step 1 Step 2 Performance Tests 3 RF OUTPUT LEVEL LINEARITY TEST 3 RFOUTPUT LEVEL LINEARITY TEST Description This test checks the level accuracy of the E5070A E5071A test port output signal across the specified level range The RF output level is measured for power level settings of 15 dBm to 0 dBm 1 dB step increments at 1OMHz 3 GHz 4 25 GHz and 8 5 GHz Specification 5070 lt 0 75 dBm 23 5 10 MHz to 3 GHz 15 dBm to 0 dBm 5071 lt 0 75 dBm 23 5 10 MHz to 4 2 GHz 15 dBm to 0 dBm lt 1 5 dBm 23 5 4 2 GHz to 8 5 GHz 10 dBm to 0 dBm X 3 dBm 23 5 C 4 2 GHz 8 5 GHz 15 dBm to 10 dBm The level linearity specification applies to Port 1 only The
142. E5070A 5071A N m N m Cable e5070ase011 36 Chapter 2 Figure 2 7 e5070ase013 NOTE Step 2 Step 3 Step 4 Step 5 Step 6 Step 7 Performance Tests 4 TRACE NOISE CW TEST Trace noise CW test setup Opt 413 414 E5070A 5071A ET aaoo ce oo 0000 oo lt mum D s bus 3 D 5 o N m N m Cable Do not touch or move the N N cable during measurements To do so will cause a variance in measured values Press Preset and Enter J to initialize the 5070 5071 Press Format C amp 5 C 5 C 5 CY 5 Cv to select Lin Mag from display format menu Press MarkerFctn J lt gt C amp C CHD CHD CV C select Statistics and set Statistics function to on Press Meas and select S21 from S parameter menu Set the controls as follows Control settings Key strokes Center frequency 3 MHz Center 3 J Frequency span 0 Hz Span 0 Number of points 32 Sweep Setup C gt C gt C gt C gt CD select Points Enter 3 2 x1 Bandwidth 3 kHz Avg Enter 3
143. ET not allowed G GET not allowed group execution trigger GET has been received in the program message see 7 7 IEEE488 2 H Header suffix out of range The unit of the header is outside the range The header is invalid in the unit for numeric parameters following a SCPI command I Log sweep requires 2 octave minimum span The span of sweep range 15 not satisfied the requirement for logarithmic sweep The sweep type is automatically changed to linear sweep when this error occurs For example this error occurs when with the start and stop frequency are set 1 MHz and 2 MHz respectively the sweep type is changed to logarithmic sweep Set the stop frequency to more than four times as many as the start frequency And then select logarithmic sweep Illegal parameter value The parameter value is not suitable This error occurs when the CALC PAR DEF command is used to specify an S parameter that does not exist the model S44 in the case of a 2 port model for example Illegal program name This error occurs when a nonexistent VBA program name is specified by the PROG SEL NAME command Init ignored Because another measurement is in progress the request for initiating a measurement INIT command 15 ignored Invalid block data Block data has been expected but the block data that appears is Invalid for some reason see 7 7 6 2 IEEE488 2 The END message 15 received before the length of block data has
144. Figure 4 49 Figure 4 50 NOTE Table 4 10 Troubleshooting Troubleshooting Using External Test Procedure Perform the following procedure after step 11 a Click Trace Noise Port 1 in the pull down menu of the Test List box b Click Test button in the dialog box to open the Trace Noise port 1 tests dialog box The dialog box displays the selected S parameter and test frequencies as shown in Figure 4 49 Trace Noise port 1 tests dialog box example E5071A Trace Noise x S11 Mag Phase Not Done Not Done Not Done Not Done Not Done Not Done Not Done Not Done Not Done Not Done Not Done Not Done Not Done Not Done Not Done Not Done Not Done Not Done Click Test button in the dialog box Then SHORT port 1 dialog box opens as shown in Figure 4 50 SHORT port 1 dialog box Connect SHORT d Connect N type Short termination to Port 1 For more information on the Trace Noise port 1 tests setup see Table 4 10 Trace Noise port 1 tests setup Test parameter Connect Short Test frequency points IFBW Nop and RF S termination to power settings Automatic 1 S11 Mag Phase Port 1 3 MHz 1 3 GHz 1 31 GHz 2 1 GHz and 2 11 GHz 50704 e 3 MHz 1 3 GHz 1 31 GHz 2 1 GHz 2 11 GHz 4 25 GHz 4 26 GHz 7 5 GHz and 8 5 GHz E5070A 3 kHz BW 101 0 dBm e Click OK button to run the test program T
145. Gain tests are in progress e When the tests are completed the dialog box displays Pass or Fail for each test as shown in Figure 4 61 196 Chapter4 Figure 4 61 Figure 4 62 Troubleshooting Troubleshooting Using External Test Power Gain test results display example 5071 Opt 413 414 NOTE 512 Pass Pass Pass 521 Pass Pass Pass 531 Pass Pass Pass 541 Pass Pass Pass Select All Select None Exit e5070bse121 f Ifat least one of the Tch Power Gain tests failed refer to Table 4 20 External Test Failure Troubleshooting Information g return to the External Test dialog box click Exit button 2 Tch IF Ranging tests These tests check the IF signal level ranging operation of test channel receiver for each test port Required equipment Description Recommended model Fixed attenuator 10 dB N m N f 8491 A B C IF Ranging tests dialog box example E5070A E5071A Opt 413 414 Rch Tch Porti NotDone Not Done Phase Not Done Done Port2 Mag NotDone Not Done Phase Not Done Not Done Port3 Mag NotDone Not Done Phase Not Done WNot Done Port4 Mag NotDone Not Done Phase Not Done Not Done Start Test Select All Select None es o 6 o gt e o 2 Q e5070bse122 b Select the port numbers for the test by clicking the check boxes Then click S
146. Hz 10 kHz BW S21 6GHz 5071 6GHz 0Hz 10 kHz BW 531 50 2 Source power for port 1 Port 1 3 50 MHz 0 Hz 10 kHz BW test channel S31 3GHz receiver gain for port 3 3 GHz 0 Hz 10 kHz BW S31 6GHz E5071A Opt 313 314 413 414 6GHz 0Hz 10 kHz BW 541 50 2 Source power for port 1 Port 1 and Port 4 50 MHz 0 Hz 10 kHz BW and test channel S41 3GHz receiver gain for port 4 3 GHz 0 Hz 10 kHz BW S41 6GHz E5071A Opt 413 414 6GHz 0Hz 10 kHz BW NOTE RF output power is 0 dBm and Nop is 101 for all the tests shown in the table e Click OK button to run the test program The dialog box displays Now testing while the Tch Power Gain tests are in progress f When the tests are completed the dialog box displays Pass or Fail for each test as shown in Figure 4 38 Chapter 4 181 es o 6 o gt e o 2 Q Figure 4 38 Troubleshooting Troubleshooting Using External Test Power Gain test results display example E5071A Opt 413 414 S12 SDMHz Pass S12 3GHz Pass S12 6GHz Pass S21 50MHz Pass S21 3GHz Pass 521 6GHz Pass 531 50 Pass S31 3GHz Pass S31 6GHz Pass 541 50 2 Pass 541 36 2 Pass S41 6GHz g Ifatleast one of the Tch Power Gain tests failed refer to Table 4 20 External Test Failure Troubleshooting Information h To return to the External Test dialog box click Exit button 2 Tch IF Rangi
147. Measure SVC Enter J D s 3 D 5 o Select R from the Measure SVC menu Press lt gt to Single sweep measurement Read the mean value of the R S21 displayed in the upper left corner of the graphic display and record it in the calculation sheet R dB column Calculate Sxy dB R dB and record the result in the calculation sheet Sxy x R dB column The 5 dB R dB corresponds to calculating Sxy x expression It represents the receiver port input power Select OFF from the Measure SVC menu Be sure to set the Measure SVC function to OFF Set Port Char function to ON as follows a Press lt gt lt gt select System Calibration Enter b Press CY CY select Port Char Enter Be sure to set the Port Char to ON Set the first attenuator of the Z5623A to 5 dB by executing the following GPIB control command GPIB OUTPUT 712 amp in OUTPUT 712 at a 5 OUTPUT 712 at b 20 The total attenuation for the A1 and A2 attenuators is 25 dB Perform Step 13 through 24 Chapter 2 71 Step 27 NOTE Step 28 Step 29 Step 30 Step 31 Step 32 Step 33 Step 34 NOTE Step 35 Step 36 Step 37 NOTE Performance Tests 7 DYNAMIC ACCURACY TEST Calculate the dynamic accuracy for 25 dBm using the following equation D A Sxy x R DA25 Sxy x
148. Mode Pri Master Hard Disk U DHA 959808 On 163 4 Searching for Boot Record from Bi M Step 4 Searching for boot record A message of Searching for Boot Record from IDE 0 0K shown in Figure 4 8 is displayed after the system configuration check is performed At this moment the E5070A E5071A starts booting from A27 mass storage IDE 0 without problem However if the E5070A E5071A cannot boot from the A27 a message of Boot Failure is displayed as shown in Figure 4 9 In this case the 5070 5071 may have a problem around the A27 5 o 0 o gt e o 2 Q Chapter 4 151 Figure 4 9 Figure 4 10 Message of Boot Failure AMIBIOS System Configuration C 1985 1997 American Megatrends Inc Main Proc 5 PentiumCRO ITI Base Memory Size 648KB Math Proc Built In Ext Memoru Size 392192 Floppu Dr 1 44 HB Display Type HE MUI Floppy Drive B None Serial Port s 3F8 2F8 AMIBIOS Date 87 15 95 Parallel Port s 378 788MHz External Cache 256KB Enabled Devices Onboard PCI Bridge PCI Onboard Bridge Device Onboard USB Controller IRQ11 PCI Onboard IDE Onboard Ethernet 18010 PCI Slot 3 VGA Slot 4 Bridge Device IRQS DRB8 DRB1 DRB2 DRB3 DRB4 DRBS DRB6 DRB SDRAM 64M 64M 64M 64M 64M 64M Boot Failure Reboot and Select proper Boot device or Insert Boot Media in selected Boot device Press any key when ready_ Check whether the A27 has a p
149. PIB Interconnection Cable Agilent 10833A B Procedure Step 1 Connect the power sensor to the power meter Calibrate the power meter for the power sensor used D 3 D 5 o Step 2 Connect the test equipment as shown in the following figures Option 213 214 Figure 2 32 Option 313 314 Figure 2 33 Option 413 414 Figure 2 34 Figure 2 31 Agilent Z5623A block diagram 0 11 dB Mi Attenuator icrowave 1dB Step Isolator Network Analyzer Source A Power Sensor Power Meter Network Analyzer Receiver 0 110dB Attenuator 10dB Step 5070 045 Chapter 2 67 Performance Tests 7 DYNAMIC ACCURACY TEST Figure 2 32 Dynamic accuracy test setup Opt 213 214 E5070A 5071A GPIB Controller 6dB Fixed Attenuation Z5623A H01 E 34 Power Sensor e5070ase023 Figure 2 33 Dynamic accuracy test setup Opt 313 314 E5070A 5071A GPIB Controller aa aa 2000 oann 9 gt 0000 45 OOO aaa Doa 6dB Fixed Attenuation Z5623A H01 J
150. Plug and on Setup Play Setup options page 227 Peripheral Setup The default settings of all the Peripheral on Setup options page 229 Auto Detect Hard The methods to verify whether or not the on Drive system detected the mass storage and page 231 configured correctly the mass storage drive parameters Change User Password None This option is unnecessary for the 5070 5071 Change Supervisor The method to assign a password This on Password option is used only when the password has page 231 not been set in the E5070A E5071A Auto Configuration The procedure to initialize BIOS option on with Optimal Settings settings This option is used only when the page 221 A20 digital motherboard is replaced with a new one Auto Configuration None This option is unnecessary for the with Fail Safe Settings E5070A E5071A Save Settings and Exit The procedure to save the option settings and exit from BIOS setup utility page 232 Exit Without Saving The procedure to exit from BIOS setup utility on without saving the option settings page 232 The Change Language Setting window displayed in gray characters is invalid and cannot be selected 220 Chapter 4 NOTE Figure 4 84 Troubleshooting To configure the A20 Digital Motherboard and BIOS Auto Configuration with Optimal Settings Perform the following procedure only when the A20 digital motherboard is replaced Jump to Standard CMOS Setup when you check
151. Pm DA10b gt True D A Running D A dB DA5 True D A dB DA10 DA0 0 0 Sxy x R Sxy x R DA10b Pm Pm DA10b True D A Running D A dB DA0 True D A dB DA10 Chapter 2 105 Performance Tests E5070A Performance Test Record 5070 Performance Test Record Agilent Technologies E5070A RF Network Analyzer Serial Number Option Temperature C Test Date Humidity Tested by Frequency Accuracy Test Without Option 1 5 Frequency Hz Testlimit Hz Test result Hz Measurement uncertainty Hz 50M 250 11 15 0 64 With Option 1 5 Frequency Hz Testlimit Hz Test result Hz Measurement uncertainty Hz 50 M 50 11 3 00 k k 0 64 k RF Output Level Accuracy and Flatness Test Level Accuracy Test Port 1 Power level Frequency Test limit Test result Measurement 9 Hz dB dB uncertainty dB 0 50 M 0 65 0 13 Level Flatness Test Port 1 at 0dBm relative to 50 MHz reference Frequency Hz Testlimit dB Test result dB Measurement uncertainty dB 10M 1 0 0 30 550 M 1 0 0 14 1 05 G 1 0 0 14 1 55G 1 0 0 14 106 Chapter 2 Performance Tests E5070A Performance Test Record Frequency Hz
152. REI ep EP XT RR E e E ES gio C d 35 Test equipment 35 ler nee isyu ERI RUNE E 35 5 CROSSTALK TEST ERES y daa a eens Bae av aaa naw eat oes Sm Uy RIS 41 Description NERA RANG usasapa ER RES 41 got pt au ys saa aq 41 Test equipment vo 41 PT LR LI E 41 Crosstalk test program RE RR RARE eb EE 48 6 SYSTEM DYNAMIC RANGE 8 51 Description ______ __ _______ 51 Specifications s Suyana yam USUS he EUR COS Tee ee 51 Test equipment AERE eu 51 Procedure gie rna umpu UQ q diay kadar ettet 52 System Dynamic Range test 2 62 7 TEST ss 66 Description yaaa e E taes 66 Lest Equipment bo whey or PSU Was ZS bU E bx aeos 66 Procedure u yayapa Pip hese bn ILE RENI eL 67 8 UNCORRECTED SYSTEM PERFORMANCE TEST 82 Description e aaa gnis CREE NE RUE asa gag ddd ae Senne ER ERES 82 Specifications IE OUT eid got
153. Removal A21 Analog Interface Board Removal 2 o 3 5 X R Tools Required Pozidriv screwdriver pt size 2 medium where Pozidriv screws are in use TORX screwdriver T10 T15 T20 where TORX screws in use Procedure Refer to Figure 6 19 for this procedure Remove the outer cover as described in Outer Cover Removal on page 282 Disconnect the cables item 1 2 and 3 from the A21 Analog Interface board Remove a TORX T10 screw item 4 fastening the board to the rear panel Lift the A21 Analog Interface Board A21 Analog Interface Board Removal Chapter 6 311 Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Step 4 NOTE Figure 6 20 Step 1 Step 2 Replacement Procedure A26 LCD Interface Card Removal A26 LCD Interface Card Removal Tools Required Pozidriv screwdriver pt size 2 medium where Pozidriv screws are in use TORX screwdriver T10 T15 T20 where TORX screws are in use flat edge screwdriver Procedure Refer to Figure 6 21 for this procedure Remove the outer cover as described in Outer Cover Removal on page 282 Disconnect the mylar cables item 1 from the display board Remove the TORX T10 screw item 2 fastening the card to the rear panel Lift the A26 LCD Interface Card Use the following procedure when you handle the mylar ribbon cable The mylar cable and their connector
154. Remove the E5070A E5071A outer cover and check if the following LEDs light 3 3 and 5V dc monitor LEDs on A21 analog interface board 2 digits seven segment LEDs 20 digital motherboard that normally display 00 To check all the outputs of the 50 measure the dc voltages at the output lead connectors with a DMM The dc output voltages and lead color information is provided in the module cover label of the A50 Check system fans inside If the system fans on the chassis inside the E5070A E5071A don t run problem seems in the A21 analog interface board or the flat cable between the A21 and the A22 front panel keyboard In this case remove the E5070A E5071A outer cover and make sure whether the fans run or not If a beep and a power shutdown occur immediately after power on there is a possibility that either of the fans doesn t run There are three system fans which are independently controlled by A6 RF switch temperature controller board These fans initially run fast after the power is turned on and usually stop after a while One or some of them restart running when the instrument warms up The power shutdown occurs the moment the system fan stops by any anomaly In this case check the A6 board and the fan that doesn t run If the power shutdown occurs without a beep the problem seems in the A21 or the A20 board Before replacing the board check if jumper settings on the A20 are correct as described in Configu
155. Replaceable Parts List Table 5 10 Front View Semirigid Cables Opt 313 Ref Agilent Part Number C D Qty Description Desig 1 E5070 61643 2 1 RF CABLE ASSY SRGD 2 E5070 61645 1 RF CABLE ASSY SRGD 3 E5070 61644 3 1 RF CABLE ASSY SRGD 4 E5070 61648 7 1 RF CABLE ASSY SRGD 5 E5070 61632 9 1 RF CABLE ASSY SRGD 6 E5070 61646 5 1 RF CABLE ASSY SRGD 7 E5070 61631 8 1 RF CABLE ASSY SRGD 8 E5070 61651 2 1 RF CABLE ASSY SRGD 9 5070 61650 1 1 CABLE ASSY SRGD 10 E5070 61649 8 1 CABLE ASSY SRGD 11 E5070 61642 1 1 RF CABLE ASSY SRGD 12 0955 0301 9 1 U WAVE ATTN 2DB 13 E5070 61641 0 1 RF CABLE ASSY SRGD 14 1810 0188 1 4 TERMINATION COAX Chapter 5 251 e 2 e D D v D E n Replaceable Parts Replaceable Parts List Front View Semirigid Cables Opt 314 Figure 5 12 Front View Semirigid Cables Opt 314 P ae KT EC im ue ES Ale 5070 077 252 Chapter 5 Replaceable Parts Replaceable Parts List Table 5 11 Front View Semirigid Cables Opt 314 Ref Agilent Part Number C D Qty Description Desig 1 E5070 61643 2 1 CABLE ASSY SRGD 2 E5070 61645 1 CABLE ASSY SRGD 3 E5070 61644 3 1 RF CABLE ASSY SRGD 4 5070 61648 7 1 CABLE ASSY SRGD 5 5070 61632 9 1 CABLE ASSY SRGD 6 E5070 61646 5 1 CABLE ASSY SRGD 7 E5070 61631 8 1 RF CABLE ASSY SRGD 8 E5
156. Test setup Select Ports settings and calibration sequence Option Select Test setup Calibration Termination and cable connection Ports Figure for calibration 213 214 1 2 Figure 2 41 Port 1 Open Open to Port 1 Port 1 Short Short to Port 1 Port 1 Load Load to Port 1 Port 2 Open Open to the tip of N N cable Port 2 Short Short to the tip of N N cable Port 2 Load Load to the tip of N N cable Figure 2 44 Thru N N cable between Port 1 and Port 2 Perform Step 28 and 29 Response Stimulus Port of Directivity Source match Load match test are as follows Response Port 1 Stimulus Port 2 Record the test results in the performance test record port 1 1 2 Figure 2 56 Port 1 Open Open to the tip of N N cable Port 1 Short Short to the tip of N N cable Port 1 Load Load to the tip of N N cable Port 2 Open Open to Port 2 Port 2 Short Short to Port 2 Port 2 Load Load to Port 2 Figure 2 44 Thru N N cable between Port 1 and Port 2 Perform Step 28 and 29 Response Stimulus Port of Directivity Source match Load match test are as follows Response Port 2 Stimulus Port 1 Record the test results in the performance test record port 2 Chapter 2 93 D s 3 D 5 o Performance Tests 8 UNCORRECTED SYSTEM PERFORMANCE TEST Table 2 18 Test setup Select Ports settings and calibration sequence Option S
157. Using Internal Test on page 156 CPU No adjustment needed Inspect the Booting Process DIMM No adjustment needed Inspect the Booting Process 328 Chapter 7 gt amp 5 3 amp 5 2 Manual Changes This appendix contains the information required to adapt this manual to versions or configurations of the E5070A E5071A manufactured earlier than the current printing date of this manual The information in this manual applies directly to E5070A E50714A units with the serial number that is printed on the title page of this manual 329 Table 1 Table 2 Figure A 1 Manual Changes Manual Changes Manual Changes To adapt this manual to your 5070 5071 refer to Table A 1 and Table A 2 Manual Changes by Serial Number Serial Prefix or Number Make Manual Changes 5070 JP1KJ00101 to JP1KJ00110 Change 1 E5071A JP1KJ00101 to JP1KJ00237 Manual Changes by Firmware Version Version Make Manual Changes Agilent Technologies uses a two part ten character serial number that is stamped on the serial number plate Figure A 1 The first five characters are the serial prefix and the last five digits are the suffix Serial Number Plate Agilent Technologies Japan Ltd sERNo JP1KJ12345 AK IN JAPAN 33 serial 330 Appendix Figure A 2 e5070ase263 Manual Changes Cha
158. Virus Check Computer Virus Check Figure D 13 Network Dialog Box Configuration Tab Network Configuration Identification Access Control The following network components are installed E Client for Microsoft Networks Intel R GD82559ER PCI Adapter TCP IP File and printer sharing for Microsoft Networks Remove Properties Primary Network Logon Windows Logon Eile and Print Sharing Description File and print sharing for Microsoft networks gives you the ability to share your files or printers with Windows NT and Windows for Workgroups computers 5070 270 2 The System Setting Change dialog box appears Press Yes button to restart Step 12 Disable the network connection function of the 5070 5071 if you enabled the network connection function on Step 1 1 Press key 2 Press Misc Setup Network Setup and press Network Device to DISABLE 3 dialog box will appear press the OK to reboot the instrument 362 Appendix D m o 2 5 3 5 Power Requirement 363 Power Requirement Preparation for Power Supply Preparation for Power Supply Before turning on power to the equipment be sure to verify the following Power Requirements E5070A E5071A requires the following power source Requirements Voltage 90 to 132 or 198 to 264 VAC 1 Frequency 47
159. a REF 8 05 G T a REF 850 T a REF Chapter 2 99 NOTE Performance Tests E5070A E5071A Performance Test Calculation Sheet 3 RF Output Level Linearity Test Make a copy of the following calculation sheet for each combination of the test frequencies listed below E5070A E5071A CW frequency 10 MHz and 3 GHz 10 MHz and 3 GHz 4 25 GHz and 8 5 GHz Hz Power level Power meter reading dBm Test result equation dBm a REF 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 27 8 9 10 11 a REF 12 a REF 13 a REF 14 a REF 15 a REF CW frequency Hz Power level Power meter reading dBm Test result equation dBm a REF 0 1 a REF 2 a REF 100 Chapter 2 Performance Tests E5070A E5071A Performance Test Calculation Sheet Power level Power meter reading dBm Test result equation dBm a REF 3 a REF 4 a REF 5 6 a REF 7 a REF 8 a REF 9 a REF 10 a REF 11 a REF 12 a REF 13 a REF 14 a REF 15 a REF Chapter 2 101 D 3 D 5 o NOTE Performance Tests E5070A E5071A Performance Test Calculation Sheet 4 Trace No
160. ability time base accuracy lt ppm 300 kHz to 3 GHz 5070 option 1 5 lt ppm 300 kHz to 8 5 GHz E5071A Test equipment Frequency Counter Agilent 53181A with Opt 010 and 030 BNC cable 61 cm PN 8120 1839 N m BNC f adapter PN 1250 0780 Procedure Connect the test equipment as shown in Figure 2 1 For testing the E5070A E5071A equipped with option 1E5 connect a BNC cable between the Ref In connector and the Ref Oven 10 MHz connector on the E5070A E5071A rear panel For testing without option 1E5 disconnect the above BNC cable Figure 2 1 shows the test setup for the 5070 5071 with 4 port option Opt 413 414 For 2 port and 3 port options Opt 213 214 313 314 connect the frequency counter input cable to Port 1 as well 26 Chapter 2 Performance Tests 1 FREQUENCY ACCURACY TEST Figure 2 1 Frequency accuracy test setup 50 MHz E5070A 5071A 0500 Oe Oooo CIO 0000 Frequency Counter aa eda 0000 lt oog ye CIC OOO Gy CT ago aang N m BNC f Adapter BNC m BNC m Cable e5070ase006 Step 2 Initialize the frequency counter Set the frequency counter as follows Controls Setting Gate time 1 sec 50 50 Step 3 Press Preset and Enter to initialize the 5070 5071 Then se
161. air Procedures This chapter lists the procedures required to verify the 5070 5071 operation after an assembly is replaced with a new one 325 Post Repair Procedures Post Repair Procedures Post Repair Procedures Table 7 1 Post Repair Procedures lists the required procedures that must be performed after the replacement of an assembly CPU or DIMM Memory These are the recommended minimum procedures to ensure that the replacement is successfully completed Table 7 1 Post Repair Procedures Replaced Required Adjustments Verification Assembly or Part Correction Constants CC 1 Source Board Perform the following required adjustments using the Source Board in Spot Adjustment of the program Frequency Reference Adjustment Source Power Adjustment Test Port Characteristics Adjustment Troubleshooting Using Internal Test page 156 Troubleshooting Using External Test on page 177 Frequency Accuracy Test RF Output Level Accuracy and Flatness Test RF Output Level Linearity Test Trace Noise CW Test Crosstalk Test System Dynamic Range Test Dynamic Accuracy Test Uncorrected System Performance Test 14 Receiver RF Board Perform the following required adjustments using the Receiver RF Board in Spot Adjustment of the program Source Power Adjustment Test Port Characteristics Adjustment Troubleshooting Using Internal Test on page 156 Troubleshooting Using Ext
162. air of E5070A E5071A Table 6 1 Required Tools Assembly Pozidriv TORX screwdriver flat edge cutting soldering hex key open wrench open screwdriver screwdriver plier iron torque wrench pt size 2 TS 10 1572 12072 1 5 mm 9 16 in 5 8 in 5 16 in Outer Cover Front Panel Y Y Mass Storage 4 4 Y Y FDD 4 4 Y Y Handler I O 4 4 Y Y Power Supply Y Y CPU M d Y Y 4 DIMM 4 4 Y Y Digital Mother Y Board Source Board Y Receiver Board Y 4 Fan amp Switch Y 4 Control Board Fan Y Y Reference Y Y Oven Switch Y Y Attenuator Y Y Analog Y Y Motherboard Analog Interface Board Display Board Y Y Board 4 4 Y Y Front Keyboard Y Y Inverter Y Y LCD 4 4 Y Y 4 LCD Backlight Y Y Y Y Y N connector Y Y Pozidriv screws in use 2 where TORX screws are in use Chapter 6 281 Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Step 4 Step 5 Step 6 Step 7 Step 8 Replacement Procedure Outer Cover Removal Outer Cover Removal Tools Required Pozidriv screwdriver pt size 2 medium where Pozidriv screws are in use TORX screwdriver T10 T15 T20 where TORX screws in use Procedure Refer to Figure 6 1 for this procedure Disconnect the power cable from th
163. alF SCPI CALCulate 1 SELected Function DATA D 3 D 5 o SCPI CALCulate 1 SELected Function DOMain STARt 7500000000 SCPI CALCulate 1 SELected Function DOMain STOP 8500000000 m SCPI CALCulate 1 SELected Function DOMain STATe True SCPI CALCulate 1 SELected Function EXECute MaxValG SCPI CALCulate 1 SELected Function DATA frmDynamicRange2 txtVall Text CSng 20 Log10 MaxValC 0 frmDynamicRange2 txtVal2 Text CSng 20 Log10 MaxValD 0 frmDynamicRange2 txtVal3 Text CSng 20 Log10 MaxValE 0 frmDynamicRange2 txtVal4 Text CSng 20 Log10 MaxValF 0 FrmDynamicRange2 txtVal5 Text CSng 20 Log10 MaxValG 0 rmDynamicRange2 Show End If End Sub Function 10910 X 10410 Log X Log 10 End Function Chapter 2 65 NOTE Table 2 12 Performance Tests 7 DYNAMIC ACCURACY TEST 7 DYNAMIC ACCURACY TEST Description This test checks the dynamic accuracy of the E5070A E5071A The dynamic accuracy is tested at 1 195 GHz for each receiver port using the Agilent Z5623A with option H01 Dynamic Accuracy Test Kit A block diagram of the Z5623A 15 shown in Figure 2 31 The 1 195 GHz source signal of the E5070A E5071A goes through the Z5623A s first attenuator variable from 0 dB to 11 dB in 1 dB steps and second attenuator variable up to 100 dB in 10 dB steps and is measure
164. and Figure 2 27 Opt 413 414 Isolation calibration setup for system dynamic range test Opt 313 314 5070 5071 58 2 Performance Tests 6 SYSTEM DYNAMIC RANGE TEST Figure 2 27 Isolation calibration setup for system dynamic range test Opt 413 414 E5070A 5071A Co aa aann aa 0000 lt gt 0000 aaa aaa Good V od 5070 287 Step 32 Setthe controls follows Control settings Key strokes IF Bandwidth 10 Hz Avg Enter 1 9 Averaging ON CK CK BY select Averaging Averaging factor now 15 set to 16 preset value Step 33 Press C gt and Enter to select Calibrate function Step 34 Press lt gt C gt and to select Response Thru calibration Step 35 Press to go down to Select Ports menu Step 36 Select 2 1 21 for the option 313 314 instruments and 4 1 S41 for the option 413 414 instruments as shown in the third row in Table 2 10 Table 2 10 Select Ports settings for response calibration Option 213 214 313 314 413 414 l 2 1 S21
165. ard Step 10 Install the new board by the reverse procedure of removal 296 Chapter 6 Replacement Procedure A1 Source Board Removal Al Source Board Removal 2 o 3 5 X Tools Required Pozidriv screwdriver pt size 2 medium where Pozidriv screws are in use TORX screwdriver T10 715 T20 where TORX screws in use Flat edge screwdriver Open end wrench 5 8 inch Open end torque wrench 5 16 inch set to 10 in Ib for reconnecting SMA connector Removal Procedure Refer to Figure 6 10 for this procedure Step 1 Remove the front panel as described in Front Panel Removal on page 284 Step 2 Remove the two 5 8 inch nuts item 1 fastening the BNC connector on the rear panel when the source is removed Step 3 Disconnect the all semi rigid cables and the termination connected to the boards referring to the figures as shown in Table 6 2 NOTE The label on the semi rigid cable show the last two digits of the part number Table 6 2 Reference Figure Option Figure 213 Figure 5 9 on page 248 214 Figure 5 10 on page 249 313 Figure 5 11 on page 250 314 Figure 5 12 on page 252 413 Figure 5 13 on page 254 414 Figure 5 14 on page 256 Step 4 Remove the two TORX T10 screws fastening the extractor item 2 Step 5 Slide the Al source board using the extractor NOTE Fasten the semi rig
166. are very fragile To replace to a new mylar cable is recommended when you are Instructed to disconnect and connect the mylar cable frequently disconnect the cable Pry up the retainer slightly at either end of the connector as shown in Figure 6 20 using a small flat edge screwdriver pry up the retainer 4287ase07007 Pull the mylar ribbon cable out of the connector 312 Chapter 6 Replacement Procedure A26 LCD Interface Card Removal Figure 6 21 A26 LCD Interface Card Removal 2 o 3 5 X R e5070ase247 Chapter 6 313 Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 CAUTION Figure 6 22 e5070ase248 Step 1 Replacement Procedure A24 GPIB Card Replacement A24 GPIB Card Replacement Tools Required Pozidriv screwdriver pt size 2 medium where Pozidriv screws are in use TORX screwdriver T10 T15 T20 where TORX screws in use Removal Procedure Refer to Figure 6 22 for this procedure Remove the outer cover as described in Outer Cover Removal on page 282 Remove the TORX T10 screw item 1 fastening the card to the rear panel Lift the A24 GPIB Card Be careful not to injure the digital mother board and the cable connected the display board to the front assembly A24 GPIB Card Removal Replacement Procedure Confirm that the bit sw
167. ask have been assigned press the OK button Figure D 2 Network Dialog Box IP Address Tab Properties 21x Bindings Advanced 805 DNS Configuration Gateway WINS Configuration Address An IP address can be automatically assigned to this computer If your network does not automatically assign IP addresses ask your network administrator for an address and then type it in the space below Obtain an IP address automatically Specify an IP address IP Address 192 168 0 1 Subnet Mask 255 255 0 0 5070 275 5 Network dialog select Identification tab Confirm that computer 15 E507X as shown in Figure D 3 Appendix D 355 Computer Virus Check Computer Virus Check Figure D 3 Network Dialog Box Identification Tab WORKGROUP e507 34 6 Inthe Network dialog box select Configuration tab Click the File and Print Sharing button as shown in Figure D 4 for the drive D of the E5070A ES071A If File and Print Sharing has been set proceed Step 3 Figure D 4 Network Dialog Box Configuration REMOVE Windows Logon ha e5070auil 27 7 File and Print Sharing dialog box as shown in Figure D 5 appears Check want to be able to give others access to my files and click the OK button 356 Appendix D Computer Virus Check Computer Virus Check Figure D 5 F
168. ations obey the instruction 1n the following procedure 82 Chapter 2 Performance Tests 8 UNCORRECTED SYSTEM PERFORMANCE TEST Figure 2 41 O S L calibration setup for uncorrected system performance test Opt 213 214 E5070A 5071A c 0000 OO lt gt 0000 aa 09 2000 oo lt 000 aoa 00 N m N m Cable D 3 D 5 5070 036 Figure 2 42 O S L calibration setup for uncorrected system performance test Opt 313 314 E5070A 5071A aa 9000 aa 9 0000 lt 0000 aa 0000 oo Y aqa O k Jj Cable X L e5070ase038 Chapter 2 83 Figure 2 43 e5070ase040 NOTE Step 2 Step 3 Step 4 Step 5 Performance Tests 8 UNCORRECTED SYSTEM PERFORMANCE TEST O S L calibration setup for uncorrected system performance test Opt 413 414 5070 5071 oa 2000 0000 aa 0000 00g EE pga oaa a i m Cable
169. ator This error occurs when different source attenuator power range settings are present during measurement on two or more channels Performing such measurement for a long time is not recommended because of the possibility of the source attenuator being damaged The measurement value is normal This error occurs only on models with the extended power output Option 214 314 and 414 D Data out of range A data element not violating the standard outside the range defined by this instrument has been received This error occurs when an integer based command for which the parameter can be rounded exceeds the range of 65536 to 65536 or when a real number based command for which the parameter can be rounded exceeds the range of 9 9e37 to 9 9e37 for example This error occurs also when a numeric value other than a specified one is entered into a command in which the port number and CalKit number are specified as parameters and hence the parameters are not rounded Such commands are for example CALC FSIM BAL TOP BBAL PPOR SENS CORR COLL ACQ OPEN SENS CORR COLL ECAL SOLT3 SENS CORR COLL CKIT ORD LOAD etc Data type error The parser has recognized a data element that must not exist Block data has been sent instead of numeric value data or character string data that had been expected for example E Ecal module not in appropriate RF path This error occurs when an ECal command SENS CORR COLL ECAL SOLTn is execut
170. ber C D Qty Description Desig 1 0515 0372 2 2 SCREW MACH M3 0 x 8 PN T10 2 0515 1402 2 1 SCREW MACH M3 5 x 8 PN T15 3 1250 0252 6 1 BNC CONNECTOR Opt 1E5 2950 0035 8 1 NUT HEX DBL CHAM Opt 1 5 2190 0102 8 1 WSHR LK INTL T Opt 1E5 6960 0041 1 1 PLUG HOLE 4 2950 0054 1 2 NUT HEX DBL CHAM 2190 0054 9 2 WSHR LK INTL T 5 0515 1402 5 6 SCREW MACH M3 5 x 8 PN T15 6 E5070 04004 9 1 COVER CONNECTOR 7 2200 0155 4 2 SCREW 4 40 260 5 Replaceable Parts Replaceable Parts List Side View Figure 5 17 Side View pu D 5 05060509000906 0000 895925595909595 55555 2 3995899990898999998089989980898985 5070 053 Table 5 16 Side View Ref Agilent Part Number Qty Description Desig 1 E5070 60032 1 1 COVER ASSY 2 08720 00081 0 2 STRAP HANDLE 3 5041 9187 5 2 STRAP HANDL REAR 0515 2049 8 2 SCREW MACH 5 0 x 16 FL T20 4 E5100 40002 0 4 STANDOFF 0515 1402 5 4 SCREW MACH M3 5 x 8 PN T15 5 5041 9167 1 4 FOOT FL 1460 1345 5 2 WIREFORM 6 5041 9173 9 2 SIDE TRIM 221 5 7 5041 9186 4 2 STRAP HANDLE FRT 0515 2049 8 2 SCREW MACH 5 0 x 16 FL T20 e 2 2 D 4 v D 42 5 261 Replaceable Parts Replaceable Parts List
171. ble with N type m connectors 61 cm 24 in N63 14A Procedure Perform the following procedure after step 11 a Click Receiver Linearity in the pull down menu of the Test List box b Click Test button in the dialog box to open Receiver Linearity tests dialog box S The dialog box displays 4 independent tests included in the Receiver Linearity tests as shown in Figure 4 43 Figure 4 43 Receiver Linearity tests dialog box example E5070A E5071A Opt 413 414 2 512 Not Done 512 Phase Not Done 521 Not Done 521 Phase Not Done 531 Not Done 531 Phase Not Done 541 Not Done 541 Phase Not Done Exit Click the Test button associated with each test THRU 1 amp 2 or THRU 1 amp 3 or Chapter 4 185 Figure 4 44 Table 4 8 Figure 4 45 Troubleshooting Troubleshooting Using External Test THRU 1 amp 4 dialog box opens as shown in Figure 4 44 THRU 1 amp 2 dialog box 1 amp 2 X Connect THRU between Porti amp Port2 d Connect an N type m coaxial cable between the test ports in accordance with Table 4 8 Receiver Linearity test setups Test name Objective of the test Connect an N Sweep freq span IFBW cable between Nop and RF power settings Automatic 512 Mag Receiver linearity for Port 1 Port 1 and Port 2 Full span 10 kHz BW 201 512 Phase 10 dBm and 0 dBm 521 Mag Re
172. board is replaced with a new one it is recommended to perform the DRAM test before proceeding to the BIOS setup utility procedure Confirm the DRAM count in accordance with the following procedure Connect the external keyboard and mouse to the E5070A E5071A rear panel connectors Turn the instrument on Wait until the 5070 5071 boots up Do not press any key until the E5070A E5071A measurement view appears Press key on the front panel Click Explore in the softkey menu Click Control Panel icon in the My Computer configuration menu Scroll the function viewer to find System icon and double click System This opens System Properties window as shown in Figure 4 82 System Properties window System Properties BEI i Device Manage Hardware Profiles Performance System Microsoft Windows 98 4 10 1998 Registered to E507X Agilent Technologies Computer Genuinelntel Pentium r Processor Intel Technology 384 0MB Verify that 384 0MB RAM is displayed in the Computer profile as shown in Figure 4 82 If it is not correct the A20 board is faulty Click OK button to close the window Turn E5070A E5071A off before proceeding to the next To Confirm or Set the BIOS Options To Confirm or Set the BIOS Options BIOS is the PC s built in program describing the standard procedure of basic inputs and outputs for the system hardware BIOS involves the system BIOS
173. btain an address automatically IP Address 192 168 0 1 d Ifthe IP Address and the Subnet Mask are already assigned go to step 8 If they are not assigned yet enter them as follows IP Address 192 168 0 1 Subnet Mask 255 255 0 0 To enter a specific IP Address and Subnet Mask click Specify an IP address option button to select it Input your IP address in the IP Address box and your subnet mask in the Subnet Mask box overwrite the initial values 172 Chapter 4 Troubleshooting Function Specific Troubleshooting NOTE The modified network configuration will not take effect until you shut down once and restart the E5070A E5071A Step 7 Shut down the E5070A E5071A as follows a Click button to close TCP IP Properties dialog box b Click OK button to close the Network dialog box This opens the System Settings Change dialog box as shown in Figure 4 29 Figure 4 29 System Settings Change dialog box System Settings Change You must restart your computer before the new settings will take effect Do you want to restart your computer now Click Yes button to shut down and restart the E5070A E5071A NOTE If you mistakenly clicked No button restart the E5070A E5071A as follows 1 Click Start and Shut down in the Windows menu bar 2 Click the Restart button in the Shut Down Windows dialog box to select it 3 Click OK button Step 8 Set
174. ce Manager tag The operating system detects all the necessary device drivers and displays the device names as shown in Figure 4 22 166 Chapter 4 Troubleshooting Function Specific Troubleshooting Figure 4 22 System Properties Device Manager window System Properties 2 General jardware Profiles Performance View devices by type C View devices by connection H E Agilent H E Disk drives E Display adapters H Floppy disk controllers 4 Hard disk controllers Interfaces 9 88 Keyboard F J Monitors Hl Mouse 591 880 Network adapters 9 9 Ports COM amp LPT System devices 12 Universal serial bus controller Properties Refresh Remove Print Cancel If the operating system cannot detect a necessary device driver the device driver is marked with X as shown in Figure 4 23 This figure shows the example of the icon with X displayed when the PCI adapter Intel R GD82559ER is not detected Figure 4 23 Example of no device driver file in the system System Properties 2 General ardware Profiles Performance View devices by type C View devices by connection J Disk drives tz Display adapters Floppy disk controllers Hard disk controllers 3I Interfaces 9 98 Keyboard Monitors Hy Mouse 5 88 Network adapters Bii Intel R GD82559ER PCI Adapter 8 9 Ports COM amp LPT System devices Fe Univer
175. ceable Parts List Table 5 1 Top View Major Assemblies Ref Agilent Part Number Qty Description Desig 1 54810 66525 1 1 A26 LCD INTERFACE CARD 2 82341C 002 8 1 A24 GPIB CARD 3 5070 66521 5 1 21 Interface BOARD 4 0950 3961 3 1 A50 ATX POWER SUPPLY 5 5070 66523 7 1 23 HANDLER I O BOARD 6 E5070 66586 2 1 A6 SWITCH CONTROL BOARD 7 5070 01251 2 1 8 See Table 5 18 1 A28 FDD ASSEMBLY 9 E5070 61001 6 1 ASSY 10 E5070 61002 7 1 ASSY 11 See Table 5 19 1 A27 MASS STORAGE DISK DRIVE ASSEMBLY 12 E4991 66505 7 1 5 CRYSTAL OVEN Opt 1 5 13 5070 60031 0 1 CHASSIS 14 E5070 61030 1 1 A20 DIGITAL MOTHERBOARD e 2 e D D v D n Chapter 5 237 Replaceable Parts Replaceable Parts List Top View Cables Figure 5 3 Top View Cables e50 0ase0 0 238 Chapter 5 Replaceable Parts Replaceable Parts List Table 5 2 Top View Cables Ref Agilent Part Number C D Qty Description Desig 1 E5070 61625 0 1 FLAT CABLE ASSY 2 E5070 61694 3 3 WIRE ASSY 3 E5070 61691 0 1 FLAT CABLE ASSY Opt x14 4 E5070 61630 7 1 FLAT CABLE Opt 016 5 E5070 61693 2 1 WIRE ASSY Opt 1E5 6 See Table 5 31 1 CABLE ASSY 7 5070 61692 1 1 RF CABLE ASSY Opt 1 5 1400 1334 6 1 CABLE 8 5070 61691 0 1 CABLE ASSY 9 1400
176. ceiver linearity for Port 2 Port 1 and Port 2 Full span 10 kHz BW 201 521 Phase 10 dBm and 0 dBm 531 Mag 531 Phase Receiver linearity for Port 3 Opt 313 314 413 414 Port 1 and Port 3 Full span 10 kHz BW 201 10 dBm and 0 dBm 541 Mag 541 Phase Receiver linearity for Port 4 Opt 413 414 Port 1 and Port 4 Full span 10 kHz BW 201 10 dBm and 0 dBm e Click OK button to run the test program The dialog box displays Now testing while the Receiver Linearity tests are in progress f When the tests are completed the dialog box displays Pass or Fail for each test as shown in Figure 4 45 Receiver Linearity test results example 5070 5071 Opt 413 414 512 Mag Pass Si2 Phase Pass 521 Mag Pass 521 Phase Pass 531 Mag Pass 531 Phase Pass 541 Mag Pass 541 Phase Pass Exit g Ifat least one of the Receiver Linearity tests failed refer to Table 4 20 External Test Failure Troubleshooting Information h To return to the External Test dialog box click Exit button 4 Dynamic Range tests These tests check the dynamic range of test channel receiver for each test port 186 Chapter 4 Figure 4 46 Figure 4 47 Troubleshooting Troubleshooting Using External Test Required equipment Description Recommended model N type coaxial Short termination 4 ea part of 85032F 85054D or part of
177. d ESC Exit 5 1 PgUp PgDn Modify F2 F3 Color OnBoard FDC OnBoard Serial OnBoard Serial Port2 Serial Port2 Mode IR Transmission Mode Receiver Polarity Transmitter Polarity OnBoard Parallel Port Parallel Port Mode EPP Version Parallel Port IRQ Parallel Port DMA Channel CPU Current Temperature CPU Overheat Warning Temperature H W monitor H W monitor IN2 4 3 3V H W monitor IN3 5V H W monitor IN4 12V H W monitor IN5 12V H W monitor IN6 5V 230 Auto Auto Auto Normal N A N A N A Auto Normal N A Auto N A a temperature displays N A a voltage displays a voltage displays a voltage displays a voltage displays a voltage displays a voltage displays Chapter 4 Table 4 28 Figure 4 91 Troubleshooting To configure the A20 Digital Motherboard and BIOS CPU Fan a number of revolutions displays Secondary Fan N A OnBoard IDE Both Auto Detect Hard Disks Auto Detect Hard Disks options are displayed by choosing Auto Detect Hard Disks using 1 and 1 keys and by pressing key at the BIOS Setup Utility main menu Compare the actual BIOS option settings with the default settings shown in Figure 4 91 The display is similar to Standard CMOS Setup window The profile of the A27 mass storage hard disk connected to the primary channel IDE of the A20 digital motherboard is indicated in the Pri Master drive data When a problem seems around the
178. d with the port The test procedure checks the measured receiver input power for each 5 dB increment in the range from 0 dBm to 110 dBm The ratios of the measured receiver input powers to the reference input level of 20 dBmare calculated and compared to the attenuation values of the Z5623A The 1 195 GHz signal flow is split with a power splitter present between the two attenuators in the Z5623A and measured with an external power meter to calibrate the attenuated power level Since the dynamic accuracy does not have frequency dependence this test is performed at 1 195 GHz only Dynamic accuracy specification 23 5 C Input level Dynamic Input level Dynamic dBm accuracy dBm accuracy dB dB 0 0 207 60 0 091 5 0 075 65 0 106 10 0 042 70 0 125 15 0 031 75 0 151 20 0 024 80 0 189 25 0 030 85 0 248 30 0 035 90 0 346 35 0 040 95 0 509 40 0 045 100 0 785 45 0 056 105 1 248 50 0 067 110 2 008 55 0 078 Test Equipment Power meter Agilent E4419A B 66 Chapter 2 Performance Tests 7 DYNAMIC ACCURACY TEST Power sensor Agilent 8482A Dynamic Accuracy Test Kit Agilent Z5623A w Opt 01 6 dB fixed attenuator Agilent 8491A w Opt 006 and H60 Coaxial cable with N type m connectors 61 cm 24 Agilent N6314A p n in 2 ea 8120 8862 GPIB controller or PC with GPIB Interface Card G
179. dom OPTION 903 U S Canada Plug BS 1363 A 250V 10A Plug NEMA 5 15P 125V 10 Cable 8120 1351 Cable 8120 1378 OPTION 902 Continental Europe OPTION 906 Switzerland Plug CEE 7 Standard Sheet V Plug SEV Type 12 250V 10A Cable 8120 1689 Cable 8120 2104 OPTION 904 U S Canada OPTION 917 India Republic of S Africa Plug NEMA 6 15P 250V 6A Plug IEC 83 B1 250V 10 Cable 8120 0698 Cable 8120 4211 OPTION 912 Denmark OPTION 920 Argentina Plug SR 107 2 D 250V 10 Plug Argentine Resolution 63 Annex 250V 104 Cable 8120 2956 Cable 8120 6870 OPTION 918 OPTION 922 Plug JIS 8303 125V 12A Plug GB 1002 250V 10A Cable 8120 4753 Cable 8120 8376 OPTION 921 OPTION 919 Plug CEI 23 16 250V 10A Plug Israel 81 32 250V 10A Cable 8120 6978 Cable 8120 5182 OPTION 901 Australia New Zealand OPTION 927 Thailand Plug AS 3112 250V 10A Plug NEMA 5 15P 250V 10A Cable 8120 1369 Cable 8120 8871 NOTE Each option number includes a family of cords and connectors of various materials and plug body configurations straight 90 eto e 2 e D D v D 42 5 235 Replaceable Parts Replaceable Parts List Top View Major Assemblies Figure 5 2 Top View Major Assemblies e5070ase069 236 Chapter 5 Replaceable Parts Repla
180. down and resumes the measurement view Press key and click Misc Setup Network Setup Confirm that the Network Device setting has been changed to Network Device ENABLE Set up the IP address subnet mask of the 5070 5071 as follows a Click Network Configuration This opens the Network dialog box as shown in Figure 4 27 Chapter 4 171 o 6 o gt e o 2 Q Figure 4 27 Figure 4 28 Troubleshooting Function Specific Troubleshooting Network dialog box Network 121 Configuration Identification Access Control The following network components are installed E Client for Microsoft Networks Dial Up Adapter Intel R GD82559ER PCI Adapter TCP IP gt Dial Up Adapter TCP IP gt Intel R GD82559ER PCI Adapter Primary Network Logon windows Logon Eile and Print Sharing Description b Click TCP IP icon in the Configuration tab to select it Click the Properties button This opens the TCP IP Properties dialog box as shown in Figure 4 28 Properties dialog box IP Address tab TCP IP Properties Es Bindings Advanced 805 DNS Configuration Gateway WINS Configuration Address An IP address can be automatically assigned to this computer If your network does not automatically assign IP addresses ask your network administrator for an address and then type it in the space below O
181. driver T10 T15 T20 where TORX screws in use Procedure Refer to Figure A 5 for this procedure Disconnect the power cable from the E5070A E5071A Put a plastic cover p n 5959 8096 item 1 on the front panel of the analyzer and place the analyzer on flat table with its front panel down Remove the four Pozidriv or TORX T20 screws item 2 fastening the side strap handles Remove the four Pozidriv or TORX T15 screws item 3 fastening the four rear foot Remove the four Pozidriv or TORX T15 screws item 4 fastening the cover from the rear side Remove the two T10 screws item 5 fastening the cover Remove the four TORX T10 screws item from the bottom Remove the four bottom feet item 7 Slide up the outer cover and remove it carefully Appendix A 337 gt amp 5 3 amp 5 2 Manual Changes Change 1 Figure A 5 Outer Cover Removal e5070ase153 338 Appendix Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Step 4 Step 5 Step 6 Step 7 Step 8 Step 9 CAUTION Manual Changes Change 1 A50 ATX Power Supply Assembly Removal on page 290 Change as follows Tools Required Pozidriv screwdriver pt size 2 medium where Pozidriv screws are in use TORX screwdriver T10 T15 T20 where TORX screws are in use cutting plier or scissors Procedure
182. e A 7 for this procedure Remove the mouse the external keyboard and the parallel printer cable if they are connected to the rear panel Remove the outer cover as described in Outer Cover Removal on page 282 Remove the following boards Handler I O board refer to A23 Handler I O Board Removal on page 289 Analog Interface board refer to A21 Analog Interface Board Removal on page 311 GPIB board refer to 24 GPIB Card Replacement on page 314 Display board refer to 26 LCD Interface Card Removal on page 312 Power Supply refer to 50 ATX Power Supply Assembly Removal on page 290 340 AppendixA Figure A 7 e5070ase266 Step 4 Step 5 Step 6 Step 7 Step 8 Step 9 Step 10 Manual Changes Change 1 Disconnect the following cables Connected from the FDD item 1 Connected from the mass storage disk assembly item 2 Connected from the analog motherboard item 3 Connected to the USB ports item 4 and 5 Remove two screws fastening the plate item 6 Remove two screws fastening the cover item 7 then remove the cover Disconnect the cable from the connector on the rear panel if the option 016 is installed Remove five screws item 8 fastening the digital motherboard Release the digital motherboard from the stopper item 9 pinching it with a plier Lift the digital motherboard Digital Motherboard Removal
183. e E5070A E50714A Put a plastic cover p n 5959 8096 item 1 on the front panel ofthe analyzer and place the analyzer on flat table with its front panel down Remove the four Pozidriv or TORX 20 screws item 2 fastening the side strap handles Remove the four Pozidriv or TORX 15 screws item 3 fastening the four rear foot Remove the six Pozidriv or TORX T15 screws item 4 fastening the cover from the rear side Remove the four TORX T10 screws item 6 from the bottom Remove the four bottom feet item 7 Slide up the outer cover and remove it carefully 282 Chapter 6 Replacement Procedure Outer Cover Removal Figure 6 1 Outer Cover Removal 2 o 3 5 X 1 e5070ase296 Chapter 6 283 Replacement Procedure Front Panel Removal Front Panel Removal Tools required Pozidriv screwdriver pt size 2 medium where Pozidriv screws are in use TORX screwdriver T15 where TORX screws are in use flat edge screwdriver Procedure Refer to Figure 6 2 for this procedure Step 1 Remove the top trim item 1 using a flat edge driver Step 2 Remove the eight Pozidriv or TORX T15 screws item 2 fastening front panel Step 3 Gradually push the front panel assembly towards the outside Step 4 Release the mylar cable item 3 from the cable clamp clamp 4
184. e New Mass Storage Disk Drive 285 Calibration of the Touch 4 286 A28 FDD Floppy Disk Drive 288 Tools Required uuu os Se nado 288 Proced rezs ih Lae See veis a Mere Ronee eo si Sasa sta dels 288 A23 Handler I O Board 4 0 289 Tools Required y uni payayay Se Ae es a eS SR SA UIN ee US 289 Procedure ses ege Me M EUM ER eed 289 50 ATX Power Supply Assembly Removal 290 Tools Required rocks s b PR er PER IR RES Edu ___ 290 Procedures sour uut UERBO UB DE CNRC DM e 290 CPU Removal EUER PEE ARR ede slg ee ae dae 292 Tools Required chide SS OU SA DU Modes votes susto qas 292 Contents Procedure uem nes ci E Vac 292 DIMM Mod le Removal 25 ees eun REA elie VARRO E gu ets 294 Tools Required ett obe AUC ERE 294 Procedure co vec S eed AL i HR mU Edison nto 294 A20 Digital Motherboard 295 Tools Required i2 l q CHEER REA AER RR ee tests 295 Removal Procedu
185. e company from which you bought the instrument Port 1 receiver overload The input to Test Port 1 exceeds the maximum input level The measurement value is not correct When a DUT is an amplifier or the like this error may occur damaging the receiver in the worst case Should this error occur with a passive part used as the DUT or with nothing connected to the test port this instrument is faulty Contact an Agilent Technology sales office or the company from which you bought the instrument 374 Appendix F Messages Port 2 receiver overload 222 Port 2 receiver overload The input to Test Port 2 exceeds the maximum input level The measurement value is not correct When DUT is amplifier or the like this error may occur damaging the receiver in the worst case Should this error occur with a passive part used as the DUT or with nothing connected to the test port this instrument is faulty Contact an Agilent Technology sales office or the company from which you bought the instrument 223 Port 3 receiver overload for Options 313 314 413 and 414 only The input to Test Port 3 exceeds the maximum input level The measurement value is not correct When a DUT is an amplifier or the like this error may occur damaging the receiver in the worst case Should this error occur with a passive part used as the DUT or with nothing connected to the test port this instrument is faulty Contact an Agilent Technology sales office or the compan
186. e current printing date of this manual The information in this manual applies directly to E5070A E5071A units with the serial number that is printed on the title page of this manual Appendix B System Recovery This appendix describes how to recover the operating system Windows 98 when the operating system has damage Chapter 1 17 General Information Organization of Service Manual Appendix C Firmware Update This appendix describes how to update the E5070A E5071A firmware When you want to update the E5070A E5071A firmware refer to this appendix Appendix D Computer Virus Check This appendix describes an example of how to check the system of E5070A E5071A for computer viruses using computer viruses check software Appendix E Power Requirement Chapter F Messages The E5070A 50714 can display error messages as well as messages that indicate the internal operating status of the equipment This appendix explains what these messages mean by listing them in alphabetical order 18 Chapter 1 Figure 1 1 General Information Instrument Covered by This Manual Instrument Covered by This Manual gt G 0 5 0 v 2 3 o ct e Agilent Technologies uses a two part ten character serial number label See Figure 1 1 attached to the instrument s rear panel The first five characters are the serial prefix and the last five digits are the suffix Serial Nu
187. e met 1 Environmental temperature 23 C 5 C 2 Warm up status indicator in the instrument status bar exhibits Ready in blue Do not operate front panel keys keyboard and mouse during the internal test Changing the instrument settings while the internal test is in progress will cause incorrect test results Connect a mouse to the rear panel connector Press _ Macro Setup J key Press gt lt gt keys or click Load Project to select Load Project function Open dialog box will be displayed as shown in Figure 4 14 Open dialog box Open x Look c Agilent Files of type vea Project Files vba Cancel 2 Select User D preset state from menu in the Lock in box Double click Agilent folder to open it and to access its menu Double click Service folder to open it Click Internal Test VBA program file to select it from program menu Click Open button to download the internal test program Press C gt CY 5 CD or click Select Macro to select Select Macro function Press or click Module1 main to open the Module1 main program file Internal Test dialog box will appear as shown in Figure 4 15 The dialog box shows the menu of test groups to choose from Chapter 4 157 es o 6 o gt e o 2 Q Figure 4 15 Figure 4 16 Step 11 NOTE Step 12 Step 13 Troubleshooting Troubleshooti
188. e performed next Primary Trouble Isolation The primary trouble isolation procedure can be performed without disassembling the E5070A E5071A Figure 4 2 shows the trouble isolation flow chart Turn the instrument power on About a few minutes after the E5070A E5071A is turned on the measurement view is displayed on the screen The display on the screen should be similar to Figure 4 13 Measurement view on page 155 Check the display Ifno display appears on the LCD after E5070A E5071A 15 turned on go to Display troubleshooting on page 144 Ifthe E5070A E5071A stops in booting process despite something being displayed on the LCD go to Booting Process Troubleshooting on page 147 The power on self test is performed once automatically after the 5070 5071 measurement view is displayed If the power on self test fails go to Troubleshooting Using Internal Test on page 156 Check the basic function If the front panel keyboard mouse controls LCD display data storage remote interface or another function except for measurement part does not work correctly go to Function Specific Troubleshooting on page 165 Check the measurement function If the instrument fails performance tests go to Performance test failure troubleshooting on page 214 If the measurement function does not work correctly perform the internal test and external test provided in the E5070A E5071A
189. e qnoJ r Go to External Test Failure Troubleshooting 5070 288 Chapter 4 143 Troubleshooting No Display troubleshooting No Display troubleshooting Ifthe E5070A E5071A displays nothing despite it is powered from proper ac power line isolate the failure in accordance with the procedure shown in Figure 4 3 Connect the keyboard to the E5070A E50714 rear panel connector turn the power on and start trouble isolation The methods of trouble isolation are described in the procedural step 1 to 5 Figure 4 3 No display trouble isolation procedure No Display Trouble Isolation start Check rear panel fan and dc monitor LEDs on A20 and A21 Fan ok and LEDs light Replace A50 power supply Yes Replace A21 analog Interface board RF switch temp controller board Yes Press Num Lock key on keyboard LED on keyboard BIOS and jumper Correct BIOS or jumper light settings ok setting Yes Yes Replace A20 digital motherboard Displayed Replace A20 digital motherboard on monitor or A26 LCD interface card Yes Replace flat cable 6 Yes Check LCD backlight LCD backlight ok Replace 52 inverter es Replace A51 LCD 5070 156 144 Chapter4 Step 1 NOTE Step 2 NOTE Step 3 Figure 4 4 Troubleshooting No Display troubleshooting Check fan operation and DC monitor LED If the rear panel fan blower doesn t run a failure in A50 ATX power supply is assumed
190. e test Opt 413 414 E5070A 5071A N m N m OSL m m m 98 Chapter 2 Performance Tests E5070A E5071A Performance Test Calculation Sheet 5070 5071 Performance Test Calculation Sheet Introduction This section contains calculation sheets for each performance test that requires additional calculations to determine the final test result Use the calculation sheet in this section as an aid for recording raw measurement data and calculating the performance test results Calculation sheet entries are provided only for performance tests in which calculations are required to obtain the test results 2 RF Output Level Accuracy and Flatness Test D s 3 D 5 Flatness Test 5070 5071 Frequency Hz Power meter reading dBm Test result equation lal IREF 50M 10M a REF 550M 1056 a REF 1 55G a REF 2 05G a REF 3 00 G a REF E5071A only Frequency Hz Power meter reading dBm Test result equation a REF 4 25 G a REF 5 05 G U a REF 6 05 G T a REF 7 05 G r
191. earity tests failed refer to Table 4 20 External Test Failure Troubleshooting Information g return to the External Test dialog box click Exit button 4 Dynamic Range tests These tests check the dynamic range of test channel receiver for each test port Required equipment Description Recommended model Type N coaxial Short termination 4 ea part of 85032F 85054D or part of 85033E 85050D with Type N adapter Procedure Perform the following procedure after Step 11 a Click Test button in the right of Dynamic Range in the window to open the Dynamic Range window The window displays the S parameters and frequency as the test points The results are displayed as matrix Figure 4 69 Chapter 4 201 5 o 6 o gt e o 2 Q Figure 4 69 Troubleshooting Troubleshooting Using External Test Dynamic Range tests dialog box example E5071B Opt 413 414 lt 1 SGHz lt 8 SGHz 512 Not Done Not Done Not Done Not Done 521 Not Done Not Done Not Done Not Done 513 Not Done Not Done Not Done Not Done 523 Not Done Not Done Not Done Not Done 531 Not Done Not Done Not Done Not Done 532 Not Done Not Done Not Done Not Done 514 Not Done Not Done Not Done Not Done 534 Not Done Not Done Not Done Not Done 541 Not Done Not Done Not Done Not Done 543 Not Done Not Done Not Done Not Done Select All Select None Exit
192. eck Figure D 11 Network Dialog Box Configuration Tab Network Configuration Identification Access Control The following network components are installed Client for Microsoft Networks Intel R GD82559ER PCI Adapter 9 3 lt n gt 9 o File and printer sharing for Microsoft Networks Add Remove Properties Primary Network Logon Windows Logon Eile and Print Sharing Description TCP IP is the protocol you use to connect to the Internet and wide area networks 5070 269 4 The dialog box in fig appears Select Obtain address automatically press the OK button Figure D 12 Network Dialog Box IP Address Tab TCP IP Properties HEI Bindings Advanced 805 DNS Configuration Gateway WINS Configuration Address n IP address can be automatically assigned to this computer If your network does not automatically assign IP addresses ask your network administrator for an address and then type it in the space below Specify an address 192 168 0 1 289 285 909 90 e5070ase27 1 Step 11 Remove File and printers sharing for Microsoft Networks if you set File and Print Sharing on the 6 of Step 2 1 In the Configuration tab select File and printers sharing for Microsoft Networks and press the Remove button Press the OK button Appendix D 361 Computer
193. ectivity and reflection tracking for Port 3 Opt 313 314 413 41 4 29 Error Term Source match HHH port 4 directivity and reflection tracking for Port 4 Opt 413 414 30 Handler I O Handler HHH Board interface I O signals Most suspicious assembly Suspicious assembly 212 Chapter4 Troubleshooting Troubleshooting Using External Test Possible faulty assembly NOTE When the external test for a specific receiver port fails identify the faulty A2 receiver board as shown in Figure 4 80 Figure 4 80 Test port configuration E5070A 5071A DO CHG DO DU DO OO oa og Board location inside cabinet DOO ODO A1 Source m qo rmm mem os reg 2 Receiver Upper A2 Receiver Lower e6070ase006 Test port failed in the test Port 1 Port 2 Port 3 Port 4 2 port Opt 213 214 Upper Upper 3 port Opt 313 314 Lower Upper Upper 4 port Opt 413 414 Lower Upper Upper The upper and lower A2 boards have the same part number Test port configuration e5070ase282 PN R 0 n gt 5 Chapter 4 213 Troubleshooting Performance test failure troubleshooting Performance test failure troubleshooting This section describes the adjustment and troubleshooting procedur
194. ed with the port on the ECal module not connected correctly to the instrument Execution error An error associated with execution has been generated for which this instrument cannot specify the error message This code shows that an error associated with execution defined in 11 5 1 1 5 IEEE488 2 has occurred This error occurs also when a calibration measurement is aborted Exponent too large The absolute value of the exponent exceeds 32 000 see 7 7 2 4 1 IEEE488 2 Expression data not allowed An expression data element has been received at a position where this instrument does not accept one 370 Appendix F Messages Expression error 170 Expression error When the expression data is put to syntactic analysis an error not corresponding to one of Error Numbers 171 through 179 occurs F 31 Failed to configure ECal module This error occurs when the control of the ECal module fails at time of executing an ECal command SENS CORR COLL ECAL SOLTn The failure results from the failure to connect the ECal module to the USB port failure of the ECal module etc 102 Failed to copy file This error occurs when copying command fails 104 Failed to create directory This error occurs when creating a directory MMEM MDIR command fails 103 Failed to delete file This error occurs when deleting a MMEM DEL command fails 100 Failed to read file This error occurs when a 2 port touchstone file
195. een you have to calibrate the touch screen Follow the procedure described on Calibration of the Touch Screen on page 286 Chapter 6 321 Replacement Procedure LCD Backlight Removal LCD Backlight Removal Tools Required Pozidriv screwdriver pt size 2 medium where Pozidriv screws are in use TORX screwdriver T10 T15 T20 where TORX screws in use Flat edge screwdriver Removal Procedure Refer to Figure 6 27 for this procedure Step 1 Remove the A51 LCD display as described in A51 LCD Display Removal on page 320 Step 2 Push the stopper item 1 and slide the backlight as shown in Figure 6 27 Figure 6 27 LCD Backlight Removal Backlight e5070bse100 322 Chapter 6 Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Step 4 Step 5 NOTE Table 6 5 Step 6 Step 7 Replacement Procedure N Connector Removal N Connector Removal 2 o 3 5 X Tools Required Pozidriv screwdriver pt size 2 medium where Pozidriv screws are in use TORX screwdriver 10 T15 T20 where screws in use Flat edge screwdriver Open end wrench 5 16 Open end torque wrench 5 16 inch set to 10 in Ib for reconnecting SMA c
196. elect Test setup Calibration Termination and cable connection Ports Figure for calibration 313 314 1 2 Figure 2 42 Port 1 Open Short Load and Same as Opt 213 214 N N cable Port 2 Open Short Load connected to Port 2 Refer to Step 9 through 26 for the details Figure 2 45 Thru N N cable between Port 1 and Port 2 Perform Step 28 and 29 Response Stimulus Port of Directivity Source match Load match test are as follows Response Port 1 Stimulus Port 2 Record the test results in the performance test record port 1 1 2 Figure 2 57 Port 1 Open Short Load and Same as Opt 213 214 N N cable Port 2 Open Short Load connected to Port 1 Figure 2 45 Thru N N cable between Port 1 and Port 2 Perform Step 28 and 29 Response Stimulus Port of Directivity Source match Load match test are as follows Response Port 2 Stimulus Port 1 Record the test results in the performance test record port 2 1 3 Figure 2 59 Port 1 Open Open to the tip of N N cable Port 1 Short Short to the tip of N N cable Port 1 Load Load to the tip of N N cable Port 3 Open Open to Port 3 Port 3 Short Short to Port 3 Port 3 Load Load to Port 3 Figure 2 60 Thru N N cable between Port 1 and Port 3 Perform Step 28 and 29 Response Stimulus Port of Directivity Source match Load match test are as follows Response Port 3 Stimulus Port 1 Record the test results in the performance test record port 3 94 Chapter 2
197. ent uncertainty dB 1 0 75 0 17 2 0 75 0 17 3 0 75 0 17 4 0 75 0 17 5 0 75 0 17 6 0 75 0 17 7 0 75 0 17 8 0 75 0 17 9 0 75 0 17 10 0 75 0 17 11 0 75 0 17 12 0 75 0 17 13 0 75 0 17 14 0 75 0 17 15 0 75 0 17 118 Chapter 2 Performance Tests E5071A Performance Test Record CW Frequency 3 GHz relative to 0 dBm reference Power level dBm Test limit dB Test result dB Measurement uncertainty dB 1 0 75 0 17 2 0 75 0 17 3 0 75 0 17 4 0 75 0 17 5 0 75 0 17 6 0 75 0 17 7 0 75 0 17 8 0 75 0 17 9 0 75 0 17 10 0 75 0 17 0 75 0 17 12 0 75 0 17 13 0 75 0 17 14 0 75 0 17 15 0 75 0 17 CW Frequency 4 25 GHz relative to 0 dBm reference Power level dBm Test limit dB Test result dB Measurement uncertainty dB 1 1 5 0 17 2 1 5 0 17 3 1 5 0 17 4 1 5 0 17 5 1 5 0 17 6 1 5 0 17 7 15 0 17 8 1 5 0 17 9 1 5 0 17 10 1 5 0 17 11 3 0 0 17 Chapter 2 119 D s bus 3 D 5 o Performance Tests E5071A Performance Test Record Power level dBm Test limit dB Test result dB Measurement uncertainty dB 12 3 0 0 17
198. enuation N m N m Cable GPIB Interface Cable Z5623A H01 Power Meter Power Sensor e5070ase031 Figure 2 39 Dynamic accuracy test setup Opt 413 414 E5070A 5071A GPIB Controller aa aa 2000 aa 0000 CODD aa 04 0000 amp I NO O L 1 4 6dB Fixed Attenuation N m N m Cable 7 Z5623A H01 Power Sensor 5070 029 80 Chapter 2 Performance Tests 7 DYNAMIC ACCURACY TEST Figure 2 40 Dynamic accuracy test setup Opt 413 414 E5070A 5071A GPIB Controller 0000 9 0000 lt gt 0000 aa eda 0000 oo lt coo 00 POOG J kL J 6dB Fixed Attenuation N m N m Cable GPIB Interface Cable Power Meter IE 159 4 Power Sensor e5070ase030 Chapter 2 81 NOTE Step 1 Performance T
199. er specifying the target and executing the CALC MARK FUNC EXEC and CALC FUNC EXEC commands This error occurs also when the bandwidth is not found after executing the bandwidth marker command CALC MARK BWID DATA Too many digits The number of digits of the argument of the decimal numeric value data element exceeds 255 with the preceding 0 removed see 7 7 2 4 1 IEEE488 2 Too much data block character string type program data that has been received conforms with the standard But it exceeds the amount that can be processed under the condition of the memory or conditions specific to memory related devices In this instrument this error occurs when the number of characters exceeds 254 character string parameter Transform Gate not allowed This error occurs when number of points is set 2 or sweep type is set logarithmic segment sweep the gating or transform function of time domain function is turned on Set number of points to more than 3 the sweep type to linear sweep And then turn on the gating or transform function of time domain function Trigger ignored This instrument receives and detects a trigger command TRIG or an external trigger signal But it is ignored due to the timing condition This instrument is not in the wait for trigger state for example Change the setup so that a trigger command or an external trigger signal can be sent after the instrument has entered the wa
200. er 4 215 Troubleshooting To configure the A20 Digital Motherboard and BIOS To configure the A20 Digital Motherboard and BIOS When you replace the A20 digital motherboard you need to confirm the Jumper settings for the specific CPU installed The jumper settings information is provided in Configure the Motherboard on page 216 You also need to confirm the BIOS options using the BIOS setup utility procedure Since the BIOS detects the A27 mass storage and displays the profile of the disk drive it is a useful tool to verify whether the A27 has a problem or not The BIOS setup procedure is described in To Confirm or Set the BIOS Options on page 218 To Identify the Motherboard Installed The 20 digital motherboard ofthe E5070A E5071A is equipped with Intel Pentium 700 MHz or 850 MHz processor During the RAM counting after power on the Pentium 700 MHz or Pentium III 850 MHz is displayed as shown in Figure 4 7 Configure the Motherboard There are several jumpers on the A20 digital motherboard that must be configured to the correct settings for the Pentium III 700 MHz or 850 MHz processor Confirm the jumper settings and set the jumpers correctly as shown in Figure 4 81 216 Chapter 4 Troubleshooting To configure the A20 Digital Motherboard and BIOS Figure 4 81 A20 digital motherboard jumpers location and settings
201. er gain HHH Linearity S12 Phase linearity for Port 1 18 S21 Mag Receiver gain HHH S21 Phase linearity for Port 2 19 S31 Mag Receiver gain HHH S31 Phase linearity for Port 3 Opt 313 314 413 41 4 20 S41 Mag Receiver gain HHH S41 Phase linearity for Port 4 Opt 413 414 21 Dynamic S12 S13 Dynamic range THE THE Range S14 S21 for all test ports S23 S31 S32 S34 Opt 313 314 413 41 4 541 543 413 414 Chapter 4 211 o 6 o gt e o 2 Q Troubleshooting Troubleshooting Using External Test Table 4 20 External test failure troubleshooting information Test Test group First failed Test objective Probable faulty board assembly No test Al A6Sw T A2 Receiver A23 Source cont Hnd 14 17 22 Trace Noise S11 Mag Phas Trace noise for HHH THE THE port 1 e Port 1 23 Trace Noise 522 Trace noise for HHH THE THE port 2 e Port 2 24 Trace Noise S33 Mag Phas Trace noise for HHH THE port 3 Port 3 Opt 313 314 413 41 4 25 Trace Noise S44 Mag Phas Trace noise for HHH THE THE port 4 e Port 4 Opt 413 414 26 Error Term Source match HHH port 1 directivity and reflection tracking for Port 1 27 Error Term Source match THHE port 2 directivity and reflection tracking for Port 2 28 Error Term Source match Hitt port 3 dir
202. erForm window display example CROSSTALK TEST Lx Frequency Ranges Hz MaxVal dB 3M to 3G Hz 3G to 6 G Hz ETIS 6 G to 7 5 G Hz 7 5 G to 8 5 G Hz Read the maximum value s and record them in the performance test record Test result dB column for the crosstalk test Press Exit button on the CROSSTALK TEST window Press Trigger C gt lt gt to select the Continuous trigger mode Change the S parameter setting in accordance with Table 2 7 the second through fourth rows and perform Step 22 through Step 27 Crosstalk test program Coding procedure Press key Press to activate VBA Editor function Click Insert and select Module from pull down menu VBA Project Modulel Code window screen for coding a program will be displayed Input the test program shown below Save the test program with a proper file name Test Program Sub Main 48 Chapter 2 Dim Ver As String Dim Dim 1 Variant axValB Variant 1 As Variant 1 As Variant Performance Tests 5 CROSSTALK TEST MaxValD As Variant v 6 g 3 5 3000000 D 3000000000 23 True Ver Name If Ver E5070A Then SCPI CALCulate 1 PARameter 1 SELect SCPI CALCulate 1 SELected FUNCtion TYPE MAX SCPI CALCulate 1 SELected FUNCtion DOMain STARt SCPI CALCulate 1 SELected FUNCt
203. ernal Test Rev A 01 01 x Test List Tch Power Gain gt Exit Copyright c 2001 Agilent Technologies Inc Click W button of the Test List box to view the pull down menu of external test groups See Figure 4 35 Scroll the menu and find the name of the desired test group A complete menu of the external test groups is shown in Table 4 3 Chapter 4 179 es o 6 o gt e o 2 Q Figure 4 35 Step 12 Step 13 Figure 4 36 Troubleshooting Troubleshooting Using External Test Pull down menu of external test groups External Test Rev A 01 01 x Test List Tch IF Ranging Receiver Linearity Dynamic Range Trace Noise port1 Trace Noise port2 Trace Noise port3 Trace Noise port4 To perform the individual tests in each test group refer to the procedure described below To end the external test click Exit button in the dialog box 1 Tch Power Gain tests These tests check the source output power along with the test channel receiver gain for each test port Required equipment Description Recommended model Coaxial cable with N type m connectors 61 cm 24 in N6314A Procedure Perform the following procedure after step 11 a When Y button is clicked Tch Power Gain is selected first and displayed in blue If not click Tch Power Gain in the pull down menu b Click Test button in the dialog
204. ernal Test on page 177 RF Output Level Accuracy and Flatness Test RF Output Level Linearity Test Trace Noise CW Test Crosstalk Test System Dynamic Range Test Dynamic Accuracy test Uncorrected System Performance Test 17 Receiver IF Board Perform the following required adjustments using the Receiver IF Board in Spot Adjustment of the program IF Range Gain Phase Adjustment Source Power Adjustment Test Port Characteristics Adjustment Troubleshooting Using Internal Test on page 156 Troubleshooting Using External Test on page 177 Trace Noise CW Test Crosstalk Test System dynamic range Test Dynamic accuracy test Uncorrected system performance 326 Chapter 7 Post Repair Procedures Post Repair Procedures Table 7 1 Post Repair Procedures Replaced Required Adjustments Verification Assembly Part Correction Constants CC 5 Crystal Oven Perform the following required Frequency Accuracy Test with Option 1E5 for 1E5 adjustment using the Crystal Oven for 1E5 in Spot Adjustment of the program Oven Reference Adjustment Opt 1 5 A8 Source Switch Perform the following required adjustments using the RF SW in Spot Adjustment of the program Source Power Adjustment Test Ports Characteristics Adjustment Troubleshooting Using Internal Test on page 156 Troubleshooting Using External Test on page 177 Trace Noise CW Test Cross
205. es used when the 5070 5071 fails the performance tests If the performance of the instrument is critical for the test limits and seems to be adjustable perform first the adjustment s related to the failed test When the test result is distant from the tolerance of the test or the performance is not adjustable isolate the faulty assembly in accordance with the Performance tests failure troubleshooting procedure Recommended adjustment for performance test failure Table 4 21 shows the recommended adjustments when the performance test fails Select the adjustment program corresponding to the recommended adjustment and perform the adjustment NOTE There are no adjustment related to the crosstalk system dynamic range and uncorrected system performance Table 4 21 Recommended adjustment for performance test failure Test First failed test Recommended adjustment Num X tal oven Source 1 Receiver Receiver IF A5 RF A14 A17 1 Frequency accuracy test Standard y 1A Frequency accuracy test Opt 1 5 only 2 RF output level accuracy and flatness y test 3 RF output level linearity test 4 Trace noise CW test N 5 Crosstalk test 6 System dynamic range test 7 Dynamic accuracy test 8 Uncorrected system performance test Performance test failure troubleshooting Table 4 22 represents the relationships between the failed test and probable faulty assembly If the pe
206. ests 8 UNCORRECTED SYSTEM PERFORMANCE TEST 8 UNCORRECTED SYSTEM PERFORMANCE TEST Description This test checks the directivity source match and load match which are the key S parameter measurement hardware characteristics These characteristics are tested using the Agilent 85032F Calibration Kit at 3MHz 10 MHz as well as 50 MHz increments from 50 MHz to 3 GHz up to 8 5 GHz for the E5071A After a full two port SOLT calibration is performed for each test port VBA test programs are executed to output the directivity source match and load match data to the display The VBA test programs for the Uncorrected System Performance Test are not available in the current version of the 5070 5071 test procedure The test procedure is made effective when the test programs become available Specification Table 2 15 Directivity source match and load match specification Frequency Directivity Source match Load match 5070 5071 3 MHz to 3 GHz 10 dB 15 dB 17 dB E5071A only 3 GHz to 6 GHz 6 dB 10 dB 12 dB 6 GHz to 8 5 GHz 4 dB 10 dB 12 dB Test Equipment Calibration Kit Agilent 85032F Coaxial cable with N type m connectors 61 cm 24 in Agilent N6314A p n 8120 8862 Procedure Connect the N N cable as shown in the following figure Option 213 214 Figure 2 41 Option 313 314 Figure 2 42 Option 413 414 Figure 2 43 For the connection of the Open Short and Load termin
207. ettings and Exit When you want to change and save a BIOS option Select Save Settings and Exit using and keys at the BIOS Setup Utility main menu and press key Then a message of Save current settings and exit Y N is displayed Press and _Enter keys The BIOS setup utility is closed after the current settings are saved Exit Without Saving If you cancel the changes in the BIOS option settings select Exit Without Saving using and keys at the BIOS Setup Utility main menu and press Enter J key Then a message of Quit without saving Y N is displayed Press and keys The BIOS setup utility is closed without saving the current settings 232 Chapter4 Replaceable Parts This chapter contains information for ordering replacement parts for the E5070A E5071A ENA Series RF Network Analyzers e 2 e D D v D n 233 Replaceable Parts Ordering Information Ordering Information To order part listed in the replaceable part lists quote the Agilent part number with a check digit indicate the quantity required and address the order to the nearest Agilent office The check digit will ensure accurate and timely processing of the order To order a part not listed in the replaceable part table include the instrument model number the description and function of the part and the quantity of parts required Address the order to the nearest Agilent office Direct Mail Order Sys
208. evice Search Order Default Primary Video Peripheral Setup Troubleshooting To configure the A20 Digital Motherboard and BIOS PCI PnP PCI PnP ISA EISA PCI PnP PCI PnP ISA EISA PCI PnP PCI PnP Disabled C8000 First Last AGP Peripheral Setup options are displayed by choosing Peripheral Setup using and keys and by pressing key at the BIOS Setup Utility main menu Then the window as shown in Figure 4 90 appears Compare the actual BIOS option settings with the default settings shown in Table 4 28 If there is any difference select it using and 1 keys and change the option setting by pressing and gt keys so that it becomes the same as the default setting If you want to exit from this page and return to main menu press EJ key Chapter 4 5 o 0 o gt e o 2 Q 229 Figure 4 90 Table 4 28 Troubleshooting To configure the A20 Digital Motherboard and BIOS Peripheral Setup window AMIBIOS SETUP PERIPHERAL SETUP 1998 American Megatrends ial Port1 al Port2 ismnission Mode iver Polarity itter Polarity rallel Port Port Mode ion Parallel Port IRQ Parallel Port DMA Channel CPU Current Temperature CPU Overheat Warning CPU Overheat Warning Temperature H H monitor IN CPU HZH monitor IN2 3 3U HZH monitor IN3 5U HZH monitor IN4 12U HZH monitor 5 12U Inc All Rights Reserved Available Options Auto Disabled Enable
209. form Isolation calibration Press gt and Enter to perform Done System dynamic rang measurement for select ports setting as shown in the first and second row in Table 2 8 Press and verify that Correction is set to ON 56 Chapter 2 Step 22 NOTE Step 23 NOTE Step 24 Table 2 9 Step 25 Performance Tests 6 SYSTEM DYNAMIC RANGE TEST Press Avg C gt C gt C4 select Averaging to set the Averaging function to OFF Be sure to set the Avaraging function to OFF Program or download the test program shown in Program 2 2 Also set a UserForm window to enable the test result output data to be displayed An example of the UserForm window is shown in Figure 2 25 Refer to the Agilent 5070 5071 VBA Programmer s Guide for the UserForm setup procedure Press and select the following S parameter from menu Option 213 214 21 Option 313 314 413 414 32 These parameters are shown in the first row in Table 2 9 S parameter settings for system dynamic range test Option 213 214 313 314 413 414 1 521 532 532 2 12 523 523 3 Not required S21 S41 4 Not required S12 S14 Press to run the test program This test program repeats a swept measurement 16 times calculates the RMS deviation from the 16 measurement values at each sweep frequency point and extracts the maximum deviation value for each of the following frequency ranges 5070 3
210. from which you bought the device 346 Appendix Firmware Update This appendix describes how to update the E5070A E5071A firmware When you want to update the E5070A E5071A firmware refer to this appendix x 3 D 5 D T 347 Firmware Update Firmware Update Firmware Update Required Equipment E5070A or E5071A with keyboard and mouse Four blank floppy disks DOS format How to make E5070A E5071A Firmware Installation Disk The following is the procedure to make the 5070 5071 Firmware Installation Disk Step 1 Copy the following files from Agilent Technologies web site to the four floppy disks using your computer s FDD disk1 1 of 4 e5070 msi e507001 cab disk2 2 of 4 e507002 cab disk3 3 of 4 e507003 cab disk4 4 of 4 e507004 cab Step 2 Assign the Label name as follows using the properties of your computer s Windows Explorer as shown in Figure C 1 DISK 1 for disk1 DISK 2 for disk2 DISK 3 for disk3 DISK 4 for disk4 Figure C 1 Windows Explorer example Exploring 3 Floppy Edit View Go Favorites Tools gt gt 9 Name All Folders x A Desktop a iS E5O70 msi ane My Computer CS EBO7001 cab 1 018KB 9 3 Floppy a 100 HA My Documents Program Files Windows 2 2 object s 5070 220
211. gilent Part Number C D Qty Description Desig 1 E5070 61621 6 1 FLAT CBL ASSY 2 E5070 61629 4 1 FLAT CBL ASSY 3 5070 61623 8 1 FLAT CBL ASSY 4 E5070 61624 9 1 FLAT CBL ASSY Chapter 5 243 e 2 e D D v D n Figure 5 6 Replaceable Parts Replaceable Parts List Top View Motherboard and Other Parts Top View Motherboard and Other Parts E eh H R 2 ____ _____ 7 jJ EL __ ake 5070 072 244 5 Replaceable Parts Replaceable Parts List Table 5 5 Top View Motherboard and Other Parts Ref Agilent Part Number C D Qty Description Desig 1 0515 0430 3 5 SCREW MACH M3 0 x 6 PN T10 2 E5070 61696 5 1 USB CABLE E5070 01217 0 1 BRACKET USB 2200 0141 8 2 SCREW MACH 40 PN 3 5070 01208 9 1 COVER REAR I O 4 E5070 61626 1 1 WIRE ASSY 5 3160 4126 2 1 FAN TRAX 1821 8660 0 1 IC 80526 Pentium 3 850 MHz 6 E5070 61695 4 1 WIRE ASSY 7 1818 8150 3 3 SYNC DIMM 16 64 1400 3207 6 3 CABLE TIE 8 E5070 61697 6 1 USB CABLE 9 1400 0249 0 1 CABLE TIE 10 0515 2216 7 1 SCREW MACH M4 0 x 40 PN 20 11 04287 61001 8 1 FAN ASSY E5070 01216 9 1 BRACKET FAN Chapter 5 245 e 2 e D D v D n Replaceable Parts Replaceable Parts List
212. gure 6 17 Step 2 Replace the switches by inverse procedure of removal NOTE Confirm the switch cable is connected as shown in Figure 6 13 on page 302 Fasten the semi rigid cable using a torque wrench for replacement Chapter 6 307 Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 NOTE Step 4 Step 5 Step 6 NOTE Replacement Procedure 7 Source Step Attenuator Removal Option 214 314 and 414 A7 Source Step Attenuator Removal Option 214 314 and 414 Tools Required Pozidriv screwdriver pt size 2 medium where Pozidriv screws in use TORX screwdriver T10 T15 T20 where TORX screws are in use Flat edge screwdriver wrench 5 16 Open end torque wrench 5 16 inch set to 10 in Ib for reconnecting SMA connector Procedure Refer to Figure 6 18 for this procedure Remove the outer cover as described in Outer Cover Removal on page 282 Remove the front panel as described in Front Panel Removal on page 284 Disconnect the semi rigid cables item 1 and 2 from the A7 source step attenuator The label on the semi rigid cable show the last two digits of the part number Disconnect the flat cable from the attenuator Remove the two screws fastening item 3 the A7 source step attenuator holder from the front side Remove the two screws fastening the A7 source step attenuator to the holder Fasten the semi rigid cable using a torque wrench for replacement
213. he A14 Receiver RF board item 2 and the A17 Receiver IF board item 3 Step 2 Separate the two boards Chapter 6 301 Replacement Procedure B1 Fan amp A6 Switch Control Board Removal 1 amp Switch Control Board Removal Tools Required Pozidriv screwdriver pt size 2 medium where Pozidriv screws are in use TORX screwdriver T10 T15 T20 where TORX screws in use Procedure Refer to Figure 6 13 for this procedure Step 1 Remove the outer cover as described in Outer Cover Removal on page 282 Step 2 Mark the switch cables to show where each cable is connected refer to Figure 6 13 Step 3 Disconnect the all cables from the board Step 4 Remove three screws item 3 in Figure 6 13 fastening the board from the side Step 5 Remove the board NOTE Connect as Figure 6 13 if you forgot marking in step 2 To confirm which switch each cable is connected to remove the front panel as described in Front Panel Removal on page 284 Figure 6 13 B1 Fan amp A6 Switch Control Board Removal Opt 31x 41x 5070 223 302 Chapter 6 e5070ase224 T Step 1 Step 2 S
214. he check boxes Click the Start Test button The instruction dialog box opens as shown in Figure 4 60 Follow the instruction Chapter 4 195 Troubleshooting Troubleshooting Using External Test NOTE Clicking Select button checks all the check box Clicking Select button clears all the check boxes Click Exit to return to the External Test dialog box Figure 4 60 THRU 1 amp 2 dialog box Connect THRU between Port 1 and Port 2 Cancel e5070bse120 Connect an type N m coaxial cable to the test ports in accordance with Table 4 14 Table 4 14 Tch Power Gain tests setups Test name Objective of the test Connect an N Freq and IFBW settings cable between Automatic 512 Source power for port 2 Port 1 and 2 50 MHz 3 GHz 6GHz 10 and test channel kHz BW receiver gain for port 1 521 Source power for port 1 Port 1 and 2 50 MHz 3 GHz 6GHz 10 and test channel kHz BW receiver gain for port 2 S31 Source power for port 1 Port 1 and 3 50 MHz 3 GHz 6GHz 10 and test channel kHz BW receiver gain for port 3 Opt 313 314 413 414 S41 Source power for port 1 Port 1 and Port 4 50 MHz 3 GHz 6GHz 10 and test channel kHz BW receiver gain for port 4 Opt 413 414 NOTE RF output power is 0 dBm and 15 101 for all the tests shown in the table d Click OK button to run the test program The dialog box displays Now testing while the Tch Power
215. he dialog box displays Now testing while the Trace Noise port 1 tests are in progress f When the tests are completed the dialog box displays Pass or Fail for each test as shown in Figure 4 51 Chapter 4 189 Figure 4 51 NOTE Troubleshooting Troubleshooting Using External Test Trace Noise port 1 test results example E5071A a race Noise port1 X S11 Mag Phase g Ifatleast one of the Trace Noise port 1 tests failed refer to Table 4 20 External Test Failure Troubleshooting Information h To return to the External Test dialog box click Exit button 6 Trace Noise port 2 tests 7 Trace Noise port 3 tests 8 Trace Noise port 4 tests These tests check the trace noise levels for Port 2 Port 3 and Port 4 Trace Noise port 3 tests apply to Option 313 314 413 414 instruments only Trace Noise port 4 tests apply to Option 413 414 instruments only Required equipment Same as the Trace Noise port 1 tests Procedure Perform the same test procedure as the Trace Noise port 1 tests The port number of the dialog boxes and the test port where the Short termination is connected change as shown in Table 4 11 Table 4 11 Trace Noise tests setups and procedures Test item Port number of Connect Short termination to dialog boxes Trace Noise port 2 port 2 Port 2 Trace Noise port 3 port 3 Port 3 Trace Noise port 4 port 4 Port 4 9 Error
216. he equipment which normally include all exposed metal structure Stand by This warning sign denotes a hazard It calls attention to a procedure practice condition or the like which if not correctly performed or adhered could result in injury or death to personnel This Caution sign denotes a hazard It calls attention to a procedure practice condition or the like which if not correctly performed or adhered to could result in damage to or destruction of part or all of the product Note denotes important information It calls attention to a procedure practice condition or the like which is essential to highlight Certification Agilent Technologies certifies that this product met its published specifications at the time of shipment from the factory Agilent Technologies further certifies that its calibration measurements are traceable to the United States National Institute of Standards and Technology to the extent allowed by the Institution s calibration facility or to the calibration facilities of other International Standards Organization members Warranty This Agilent Technologies instrument product is warranted against defects in material and workmanship for a period of three years from the date of shipment except that in the case of certain components listed in this manual the warranty shall be for the specified period During the warranty period Agilent Technologies Company will at its option either re
217. he menu bar to set the trigger mode to External Connect a BNC Short or 50 O termination to the Ext Trig connector on the rear panel and 170 Chapter 4 Step 5 Step 1 NOTE Figure 4 26 Step 2 Step 3 Step 4 Step 5 Step 6 Troubleshooting Function Specific Troubleshooting disconnect it Thereby a measurement trigger should be generated and a measurement result trace should be refreshed If no trigger occurs a failure in the A21 analog interface board is suspected To Check the LAN Procedure Connect a LAN cable between the LAN port on the rear panel and an external computer PO Use a crossed LAN cable to enable the peer to peer communication between the 5070 5071 and the PC If the 5070 5071 needs to be connected to the PC via multi port Hub use a straight LAN cable Press key Click Misc Setup for firmware rev 2 0 and above Network Setup and Network Device DISABLE in the softkey menu to change the Network Device setting to ENABLE It doesn t actually change to Enable from Disable unless the instrument is restarted A dialog box shown in Figure 4 26 will appear to confirm whether you restart the instrument or not Network device setting change dialog box E5070 x Changing this setting will restart instrument ve Are you sure you want to continue Cancel Click OK button to restart the instrument Wait until the E5070A E5071A is shut
218. he right of Receiver Linearity in the window to open the Receiver Linearity window The window displays the port number and receiver channel as the test points The result for each S parameter is displayed as the 4x2 matrix Figure 4 66 o 6 o gt e o 2 Q Chapter 4 199 Troubleshooting Troubleshooting Using External Test Figure 4 66 Receiver Linearity tests dialog box example E5070A E5071A Opt 413 414 Receiver Linearity x lt 1 SGHz lt 8 SGHz 512 Mag Not Done Not Done Not Done Not Done Phase Not Done Not Done Not Done Not Done 521 Mag Not Done Not Done Not Done Not Done Phase Not Done Not Done Not Done Not Done 531 Mag Not Done Not Done Not Done Not Done Phase Not Done Not Done Not Done Not Done 541 Mag NotDone Not Done Not Done Not Done Phase Not Done Not Done Not Done Not Done Start Test Select All Select None e5070bse126 b Select the S parameters for the test by clicking the check boxes Then click Start Test button The instruction dialog box opens as shown in Figure 4 67 Follow the instruction NOTE Clicking Select All button checks all the check boxes Clicking Select None button clears all the check boxes Click Exit to return to the External Test dialog box Figure 4 67 THRU 1 amp 2 dialog box Connect THRU between Port 1 and Port 2 e5070bse120 c Connect an type N
219. hooting 214 To configure the A20 Digital Motherboard and BIOS 216 To Identify the Motherboard Installed 216 Configure the 216 Testing DRAM on the 218 To Confirm or Set the BIOS Options 218 5 Replaceable Parts Ordering Information ys bu EV UI UE DER ens 234 Direct Mail Order System sassa asas qaa NP ERN ERE 234 Exchatge Assemblies ors ew ebbe bo Pose S UV xw eo Roe sles 234 Replaceable Parts List u aysan e er Ee MR GeV ede e ar e 235 Power Cables and Plug ss 235 Top View Major Assemblies 236 Top View Cables s ear r ore d Pre EESTI TS TA Aq U tesa 238 Top View Miscellaneous asas 240 Top View Under Power 1 242 Top View Motherboard and Other 244 Front View Analog ss ev
220. ibed sequentially in the following pages The test name indicates the tested performance and to which performance group the tested performance belongs Each procedure consists of the following parts Description describes the test procedure Specification describes the performance verified in the test Test Equipment describes test equipment required in the test Procedure describes test procedure step by step Allow the analyzer to warp up for at least 30 minutes before you execute any of the performance tests Perform all performance tests in an ambient temperature of 23 5 C The performance tests should be performed periodically The recommended test interval is 12 months The test interval depends on maintenance of use and the environmental conditions under which the instrument is used You may find that the interval could be shortened or lengthened however such a decision should be based on substantial quantitative data Before performing any tests make extra copies of the calculation sheet and the performance test record pertaining to the test procedure These are required in the test procedure For explanation of how to use these records see the calculation sheet and performance test record at the end of this literature All the test procedures are described without using the optional touch screen LCD features option 016 ofthe E5070A E5071A For the option 016 instruments the touch screen operating procedures corre
221. id cable using a torque wrench for replacement Chapter 6 297 Replacement Procedure 1 Source Board Removal Figure 6 10 1 Source Board Removal e5070ase237 298 Chapter 6 Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 NOTE Table 6 3 Step 4 Step 5 Replacement Procedure A2 Receiver Board Removal A2 Receiver Board Removal 2 o 3 5 X R Tools Required Pozidriv screwdriver pt size 2 medium where Pozidriv screws are in use TORX screwdriver T10 T15 T20 where TORX screws are in use Flat edge screwdriver Open end torque wrench 9 16 inch Open end torque wrench 5 16 inch set to 10 in Ib for reconnecting SMA connector Removal Procedure Refer to Figure 6 11 for this procedure Remove the front panel as described in Front Panel Removal on page 284 Remove the three Pozidriv screws fastening the N connecto
222. ile and Print Sharing dialog box File and Print Sharing 2 x D want to be able to allow others to print to my printer s 9 3 lt n gt 9 o 2 Cancel 5070 28 8 Click the OK button in the Network dialog box see Figure D 4 9 The System Setting Change dialog box as shown in Figure D 6 appears Click the Yes button to restart Figure D 6 System Settings Change dialog box System Settings Change 3 You must restart your computer before the new settings will take effect Do you want to restart your computer now 2507 0auj045 Step 3 Share the C drive 5070 5071 1 Press System key 2 Click Service Menu Restart Menu on the menu bar and the Password dialog box will be open 3 Enter the password e507xa into the Password box 4 Click Restart as Service on the menu bar and the instrument will be restarted 5 Double click My Computer icon on Windows desktop Right click on C and then click Sharing The Sharing dialog box will be displayed 6 Mark the Shared As and the Read Only as shown in Figure D 7 Press the OK button Appendix D 357 Figure D 7 Computer Virus Check Computer Virus Check Properties Sharing Dialog Box Step 4 Connect the E5070A E5071A to the PC using the crossed LAN cable Ca100 Properties General Tools Sharing Compression Share Name F Commen
223. ill be focused f Forthe 5070 proceed to the next Step g For the 5071 skip to Step i 5070 g Press Gin to enter 3 GHz as the stop frequency Points will be focused h Press 6 J 0 x1 to set the number of sweep points to 60 Then proceed to step 5 NOTE The sweep frequency points for the second segment will be aligned in 50 MHz increments from 50 MHz to 3 GHz NOTE See Table 2 16 for the entire Segment Table setting for the E5070A Table 2 16 E5070A Segment Table setting Start Stop Points 1 3 MHz 10 MHz 2 3 50 MHz 3 GHz 60 5071 i Press 8 5 Gin to enter 8 5 GHz as the stop frequency Points will be focused j Press 1 7 0 x1 to set the number of sweep points to 170 NOTE The sweep frequency points for the second segment will be aligned in 50 MHz increments from 50 MHz to 8 5 GHz NOTE See Table 2 17 for the entire Segment Table setting for the 5071 Table 2 17 E5071A Segment Table setting Start Stop Points 1 3 MHz 10 MHz 2 3 50 MHz 8 5 GHz 170 Step 6 Press Sweep Setup J 2 lt 2 lt 2 lt gt 2 lt gt C select Sweep Type to set the Sweep type to Segment Full 2 port calibration Step 7 Press 2 5 gt 2 lt 2 lt to select Kit Step 8 Press C C gt C gt and to select 85032F NOTE If Cal Kit is set to 85032F press lt gt QC Cb to Chapter
224. ion DOMain STOP SCPI CALCulate 1 SELected FUNCtion DOMain STATe SCPI CALCulate 1 SELected FUNCtion EXECute MaxValA SCPI CALCulate 1 SELected FUNCtion DATA frmCrossTalkl txtVal Text frmCrossTalkl Show CSng 20 10910 MaxValA 0 Elself Ver E5071A Then SCPI CALCulate 1 PARameter 1 SELect SCPI CALCulate 1 SELected FUNCtion TYPE MAX SCPI CALCulate 1 SELected FUNCtion DOMain STARt 300000045 SCPI CALCulate 1 SELected FUNCtion DOMain STOP 3000000000 SCPI CALCulate 1 SELected FUNCtion DOMain STATe True SCPI CALCulate 1 SELected FUNCtion EXECute 1 SCPI CALCulate 1 SELected FUNCtion DATA SCPI CALCulate 1 SELected FUNCtion DOMain STARt 3000000000 SCPI CALCulate 1 SELected FUNCtion DOMain STOP 6000000000 SCPI CALCulate 1 SELected FUNCtion DOMain STATe True SCPI CALCulate 1 SELected FUNCtion EXECute 1 SCPI CALCulate 1 SELected FUNCtion DATA SCPI CALCulate 1 SELected FUNCtion DOMain STARt 6000000000 SCPI CALCulate 1 SELected FUNCtion DOMain STOP 7500000000 SCPI CALCulate 1 SELected FUNCtion DOMain STATe True Chapter 2 49 Performance Tests 5 CROSSTALK TEST SCPI CALCulate 1 SELected FUNCtion EXE MaxValD SCPI CALCulate 1 SELected FU SCPI CALCulate 1 SELected FUNCtion DO SCPI CALCulate 1
225. ise CW Test Make a copy of the following calculation sheet for each combination of the S parameters Listed below Option 212 213 521 S12 Option 313 314 S21and 12 S23 and S32 Option 413 414 S21and S12 S43 and S34 One calculation sheet can cover 2 parameters S parameter E5070A and E5071A CW frequency Hz s dev u U Trace noise level dB rms Test result equation 3MHz 1 3 GHz Trace noise level 2 1 GHz 20 log 1 s dev x 107 3 GHz E5071A only CW frequency Hz s dev uU Trace noise level dB rms Test result equation 4 25 GHz Trace noise level 7 5 GHz 3 20 log 1 s dev x 107 8 5 GHz S parameter E5070A and E5071 A CW frequency Hz s dev nU Trace noise level dB rms Test result equation 3 MHz 1 3 GHz Trace noise level 24 GHz 20 log 1 s dev x 107 3 GHz E5071A only CW frequency Hz s dev nU Trace noise level dB rms Test result equation 4 25 GHz Trace noise level 20 log 1 s dev x 1073 8 5 GHz 102 Chapter 2 Performance Tests E5070A E5071A Performance Test Calculation Sheet 7 Dynamic Accuracy Test Make a copy of the following calculation sheet for each of the S parameters listed below Option 213 and 214 S21 and S12 Option 313 and 314 521 512 and S31 Option 413 and 414 521 512 531 and 541
226. it for trigger state Appendix F 377 4 113 30 Messages Undefined header U Undefined header command not defined in this instrument though not illegal in the syntactic structure has been received For example when a message DISP WINDI TABL MEM ON is sent to a correct program message DISP WIND1 TRAC1 MEM ON the message sent is received as an undefined command by this instrument See the command reference and use correct commands This error occurs also when a port not existing on this model is specified in a command specifying a port number as an index Such commands are CALC FSIM SEND DEEM PORTn xxxx CALC FSIM SEND PMC PORTn xxxx CALC FSIM SEND ZCON PORTn Z0 R and SENS CORR EXT PORTn TIME they include PORTn as a part V Valid Ecal module not found This error occurs when the number of ports of the ECal module connected is less than the necessary number of ports This error occurs for example when a 4 port Cal executing command SENS CORR COLL ECAL SOLTA is executed with a 2 port ECal module connected This error is not generated by front key operations 378 Appendix F Messages Peak not found Warning Message A warning message is displayed in the instrument message Warning area in the lower left part of the display against a gray background Pushing a front panel key or executing DISP CCL command clears the message This message simply appears on the display being
227. itch on the new A24 GPIB card is set as shown in Figure 6 23 314 Chapter 6 Replacement Procedure A24 GPIB Card Replacement Step 2 Replace the new A24 GPIB card by inverse procedure of removal Figure 6 23 Assignment of the Bit switches on 24 GPIB card 2 o 3 5 X 1 4287ase07006 Chapter 6 315 Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Step 4 Step 5 NOTE Step 6 Step 7 Step 8 Step 9 Step 10 NOTE Replacement Procedure A22 Front Panel Keyboard Removal A22 Front Panel Keyboard Removal Tools Required Pozidriv screwdriver pt size 2 medium where Pozidriv screws are in use TORX screwdriver T10 T15 T20 where TORX screws in use Flat edge screwdriver Hex key 1 5 mm Procedure Refer to Figure 6 24 for this procedure Remove the front panel as described in Front Panel Removal on page 284 Release the clamped cables from the clamp item 1 on the cover Disconnect the cables item 2 and 3 from the touch screen controller if the option 016 is installed Remove the four TORX T10 screws item 4 fastening the cover to the front panel Disconnect the two cables item 5 and 6 connected through the cover The item 6 is not connected in the 5070 5071 without the option 016 Disconnect the two cables item 7 and 8 from the front keyboard Remove the knob from the front panel with a 1 5 mm hex
228. ith Type N adapter Procedure Step 1 Connect the N N cable as shown in the following figures Opt 213 214 Figure 2 10 Opt 313 314 Figure 2 11 Opt 413 414 Figure 2 12 Chapter 2 41 Performance Tests 5 CROSSTALK TEST Figure 2 10 Response calibration setup for crosstalk test Opt 213 214 E5070A 5071A N m N m Cable e5070ase010 Figure 2 11 Response calibration setup for crosstalk test Opt 313 314 E5070A 5071A aa add aa 0000 9 e 9900 00 aaa aca O V J N m N m Cable e5070ase011 42 Chapter 2 Figure 2 12 e5070ase018 Performance Tests 5 CROSSTALK TEST Response calibration setup for crosstalk test Opt 413 414 5070 5071 aa 2000 oo 20900 2900 aqa ec 0000 oo lt 00 4 4 D s 3 D 5 N m N m Cable NOTE Do not touch or move the N N cable during measurements To do so will cause a variance in measured values Step 2 Press Preset and Enter to initialize the 5070
229. k check first if the key is subsided in the panel Ifthe rotary knob doesn t work check the A22 board involving the RPG To Check the Touch Panel Option 016 only Procedure By touching the LCD display panel select or change the setting of a function in the softkey menu and then perform the same operation with hardkeys Ifthe touch panel doesn t work correctly whereas the hardkeys function normally a failure seems in the touch screen controller assembly 5183 4184 or touch panel LCD assembly E5070 60102 The touch panel is not replaceable independently of the LCD Check the cable between the touch screen controller and the serial interface connector on the A20 digital motherboard fno problem is found in the above checks a failure in the A20 digital motherboard 15 suspected 168 Chapter 4 Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Step 4 Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Step 4 Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Step 4 Troubleshooting Function Specific Troubleshooting To Check the LCD Procedure Press key Click Service Menu and then Test Menu in the softkeys menu Click Display in the test menu The whole of the LCD screen turns Red Green Blue White and Black in every 2 seconds and returns to the measurement view If the color test screen doesn t appear correctly perform step 4 Connect an external VGA monitor to the VIDEO output port on the E5070A E5071A rear panel Ifthe monitor screen view is the sa
230. k lt 0 001 3G 3k lt 0 001 4 25 G 3k lt 0 003 756 3k lt 0 003 8 5 G 3k lt 0 005 Direction S32 Option 313 and 314 only CW frequency IF bandwidth Test limit dB rms Test result dB rms Hz Hz 3M 3k lt 0 001 1 3 G 3k lt 0 001 Chapter 2 121 Performance Tests E5071A Performance Test Record CW frequency IF bandwidth Test limit dB rms Test result dB rms Hz Hz 2 1 G 3k lt 0 001 3G 3k lt 0 001 4 25 G 3k lt 0 003 7 5 G 3k lt 0 003 8 5 G 3k lt 0 005 Direction S43 Option 413 and 414 only CW frequency IF bandwidth Test limit dB rms Test result dB rms Hz Hz 3M 3k lt 0 001 1 3 G 3k lt 0 001 216 3k lt 0 001 3G 3k lt 0 001 4 25 G 3k lt 0 003 756 3k lt 0 003 8 5 G 3k lt 0 005 Direction S34 Option 413 and 414 only CW frequency IF bandwidth Test limit dB rms Test result dB rms Hz Hz 3M 3k lt 0 001 13G 3k lt 0 001 2 1 G 3k lt 0 001 3G 3k lt 0 001 4 25 G 3k lt 0 003 7 5 G 3k lt 0 003 8 5G 3k lt 0 005 122 Chapter 2 Crosstalk Test Direction S21 Options 213 214 313 and 314 only Performance Tests E5071A Performance Test Record Frequency range Hz IF bandwidth Hz Test limit dB Test result dB 3M 3G 10 lt 120 36 66 10
231. l test is the diagnostic test function to supplement the internal test To enable a diagnosis for the analog measurement blocks uncovered with the internal test the external test is performed using a coaxial cable a fixed attenuator coaxial terminations a calibration kit and a handler I O test kit The following paragraphs describe the procedure to perform the external test There are two types of the external test dialog box test menu This section describes the procedure for each external test dialog box Procedure where the external test revision A 01 01 or earlier has been installed e Procedure where the internal test revision A 03 00 has been installed Contents of the external test The external test rev A 01 01 or earlier contains 13 test groups shown in Table 4 3 the external test rev A 03 00 contains 7 test groups shown in Table 4 4 Each test group can be performed independently and verifies one of various operating characteristics ofthe analog measurement section Table 4 3 External test group menu rev A 01 01 or earlier 1 Power Gain 2 Tch IF Ranging 3 Receiver Linearity 4 Dynamic Range 5 Trace Noise Trace Noise Port2 Trace Noise Port3 8 Trace Noise Port4 9 Error Term Port1 10 Error Term Port2 11 Error Term Port3 12 Error Term Port4 13 Handler Board Table 4 4 External test group menu rev A 03
232. le 5071 Opt 413 414 512 Pass Pass Pass Pass 521 Pass Pass Pass Pass 513 Pass Pass Pass Pass 523 Pass Pass Pass Pass 531 Pass Pass Pass Pass 532 Pass Pass Pass Pass 514 Pass Pass Pass Pass 534 55 Pass Pass Pass 541 55 55 Pass Pass 543 Pass Pass Pass Pass Select All Select None Exit e5070bse129 f Ifat least one of the Dynamic Range tests failed refer to Table 4 20 External Test Failure Troubleshooting Information g return to the External Test dialog box click Exit button 5 Trace Noise tests These tests check the trace noise levels for the selected test ports Required equipment Description Recommended model Type N coaxial Short termination 4 ea part of 85032F 85054D or part of 85033E 85050D with Type N adapter Procedure Perform the following procedure after Step 11 a Click Test button in the right of Trace Noise in the window to open the Trace Noise window The window displays the S parameters and frequencies as the test points The result for each S parameter is displayed as the 9x2 matrix Figure 4 72 Chapter 4 203 5 o 6 o gt e o 2 Q Figure 4 72 NOTE Figure 4 73 NOTE Table 4 18 Troubleshooting Troubleshooting Using External Test Trace Noise tests dialog box example E5071A Comh 1 3682 1 31GHe 2 16 2 11GHe 42562
233. le 2 10 Step 43 Press C gt Enter J to perform Thru calibration Step 44 Disconnect the N N cable and connect the Load termination to each test port as shown in the following figures Opt 313 314 Figure 2 26 Opt 413 414 Figure 2 27 Step 45 Press lt gt and to perform Isolation calibration Step 46 Press lt gt and to perform Done System dynamic rang measurement for select ports setting as shown in the third and fourth row in Table 2 10 Step 47 Press and verify that Correction is set to ON Step 48 Press Ava 45 45 select Averaging to set the Averaging function to OFF NOTE Be sure to set the Avaraging function to OFF Chapter 2 61 Step 49 Table 2 11 Step 50 Figure 2 30 Step 51 Step 52 Step 53 Step 54 Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Performance Tests 6 SYSTEM DYNAMIC RANGE TEST Press and select the following S parameter from menu Option 313 314 21 Option 413 414 541 These parameters are shown in the third row in Table 2 11 S parameter settings for system dynamic range test Option 213 214 313 314 413 414 1 521 532 532 2 512 523 523 3 Not required S21 S41 4 Not required S12 S14 Press to run the test program VBA UserForm window display example SYSTEM DYNAMIC RANGE TEST X Frequency Ranges Hz Maxval dB 3M to 1 5 G Hz 1 5 G to 4 G Hz 4 G to 6 G Hz 6 G to 7 5 G Hz 7 5 G
234. levels for other ports are given as supplemental performance characteristic Test equipment Power meter Agilent E4419A B Power sensor Agilent E4412A Procedure Connect the power sensor to the power meter Calibrate the power meter for the power sensor used Connect the test equipment as shown in Figure 2 4 32 Chapter 2 Performance Tests 3 RF OUTPUT LEVEL LINEARITY TEST Figure 2 4 RF output level linearity test setup E5070A 5071A Power Sensor D 3 D 5 5070 009 Figure 2 4 shows the test setup for the E5070A E50714A with 4 port option Opt 413 414 For 2 port and 3 port options Opt 213 214 313 314 connect the power sensor to Port 1 as well Step 3 Press Preset and Enter to initialize the E5070A E5071A Then set the controls as follows Control settings Key strokes Center frequency 10 MHz Center 1 0 Mu Frequency span 0 Hz 0 The source power now is to 0 dBm preset value Step 4 Press C gt and to make a Single sweep measurement Step 5 Wait for power meter reading to settle Record the power meter reading in the calculation sheet Power meter reading Ref column for the level linearity test Step 6 Press Sweep Setup 1 to set the power level to 1 dBm which is the second
235. lists the recommended equipment for performing maintenance on the 5070 5071 Table 1 1 Recommended Test Equipment Equipment Critical specifications Recommended Model Qty Use Frequency Counter Frequency 50 MHz to 3 GHz Agilent 53181A with 1 P A 2 Accuracy lt 2 5 ppm Opt 010 amp 030 Frequency Standard Frequency 10 MHz Time Base Agilent 5071A 1 A Error lt 1x 10 10 year Power Meter No Substitute Agilent E4419A B or 1 P A E4418A B Power Sensor No Substitute Agilent 8482 1 Power Sensor No Substitute Agilent E4412A 1 Dynamic Accuracy No substitute Agilent Z5623A with Opt 1 P Test Kit H01 Calibration Kit No Substitute Agilent 85032F 1 Short Type N m part of Agilent 4 85032F 54D 33E 50D with Type N adapter Load Type N m part of Agilent 2 P 85032F 54D 33E 50D with Type N adapter Fixed attenuator 6 50 N m N f VSWR x 1 015 Agilent 8491A w Opt 006 1 P A dB and H60 Fixed attenuator 10 50 N m N f Agilent 8491 1 T dB Handler I O Test Kit No substitute Agilent p n 5070 65001 1 T Cable BNC m BNC m Cable 61 cm Agilent p n 8120 1839 1 Coaxial cable with m Agilent N6314A p n 1 connectors 61 cm 24 in 2 ea 8120 8862 Adapter N m BNC f Adapter Agilent p n 1250 0780 1 P A Torque Wrench Size 3 4 inch Agilent p n 8710 1766 1 Torque 136 20 Chapter1 General Information Required Equipment
236. lt 110 6G 7 5G 10 lt 100 756 856 10 lt 90 Direction 512 Options 213 214 313 and 314 only Frequency range Hz IF bandwidth Hz Test limit dB Test result dB 3M 3G 10 lt 120 36 66 10 lt 110 6G 7 5G 10 lt 100 756 856 10 lt 90 Direction 532 Options 313 314 413 and 414 only Frequency range Hz IF bandwidth Hz Test limit dB Test result dB 3M 3G 10 lt 120 36 66 10 lt 110 6G 7 5G 10 lt 100 756 856 10 lt 90 Direction 523 Options 313 314 413 and 414 only Frequency range Hz IF bandwidth Hz Test limit dB Test result dB 3M 3G 10 lt 120 36 66 10 lt 110 6G 7 5G 10 lt 100 756 856 10 lt 90 Direction 541 Options 413 and 414 only Frequency range Hz IF bandwidth Hz Test limit dB Test result dB 3M 3G 10 lt 120 3G 6G 10 lt 110 Chapter 2 123 D 3 D 5 o Performance Tests E5071A Performance Test Record Frequency range Hz IF bandwidth Hz Test limit dB Test result dB 6G 7 5 G 10 lt 100 7 5 G 8 5 G 10 lt 90 Direction S14 Options 413 and 414 only Frequency range Hz IF bandwidth Hz Test limit dB Test result dB 3M 3G 10 lt
237. mber Label Example Agilent Technologies Japan Ltd sERNo JP1KJ12345 AK IN JAPAN 33 serial An instrument manufactured after the printing date of this manual may have serial number prefix that is not listed on the title page This unlisted serial number prefix indicates the instrument is different from those described in this manual The manual for this new instrument may be accompanied by a yellow Manual Changes supplement or have a different manual part number This sheet contains change information that explains how to adapt the manual to the newer instrument In addition to change information the supplement may contain information for correcting errors Errata in the manual To keep this manual as current and accurate as possible Agilent Technologies recommends that you periodically request the latest Manual Changes supplement The supplement for this manual is identified by this manual s printing data and is available from Agilent Technologies If the serial prefix or number of an instrument is lower than that on the title page of this manual see Appendix A Manual Changes For information concerning a serial number prefix that is not listed on the title page or in the Manual change supplement contact the nearest Agilent Technologies office Chapter 1 19 General Information Required Equipment Required Equipment Table 1 1
238. me as the LCD display the problem seems in the A26 LCD interface card Check first if the A26 board is securely connected to the A20 board LCD display has a problem check a flat cable between the A26 and A31 LCD connector Ifthe LCD is not illuminated with backlight check A52 inverter board and the cable between the A52 and A26 Also check the cables between the A51 LCD and A52 Ifthe cables are normal check the A51 LCD To Check the External Keyboard Procedure Connect the external keyboard to the E5070A E5071A rear panel connector Turn the instrument on Press key Press and 1 keys on the external keyboard and verify that the cursor on the menu bar moves up and down If it doesn t work the external keyboard or the A20 digital gt motherboard may be faulty zi S To Check the Mouse D 8 Procedure 2 Connect the mouse to the E5070A E5071A rear panel connector Turn the instrument on Move the mouse and verify that the mouse pointer moves smoothly If it doesn t move smoothly check first whether a foreign substance dust lint etc is in the track ball hole of the mouse or not Verify that the mouse buttons work normally If any button doesn t work or the mouse pointer doesn t move a failure in the mouse or the A20 digital motherboard is suspected Chapter 4 169 Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Step 4 Step 5 Step 6 Step 7 Step 8 Step 9 Step 10 Step 11 Step 12 Step 13
239. mmand fails Specified channel hidden This error occurs when an attempt is made to activate a channel not on display using the DISP WIND ACT command This error is not generated by front key operations Specified ports overlapped This error occurs when a port number is duplicated in a command requiring two or more port numbers as parameters Such commands are for example CALC FSIM BAL TOP SSB PPOR 1 2 3 3 Specify port setup correctly to avoid duplication of ports This error is not generated by front key operations String data error When a character string data element is put to syntactic analysis an error not corresponding to one of Error Numbers 151 through 159 occurs String data not allowed A character string data element has been received at a position where this instrument does not accept one 376 Appendix F 138 134 102 310 40 124 223 54 211 Messages Suffix not allowed Suffix not allowed A suffix 15 attached to a numeric value element to which a suffix 15 not allowed to be attached Suffix too long The unit is too long The unit is expressed in 12 or more characters see 7 7 3 4 IEEE488 2 Syntax error command or data type that is not recognized exists System error One of the errors designated as system errors in this instrument has occurred T Target value not found This error occurs when the target is not found during the marker search analysis aft
240. mulated as uto ist Boot Dev ist IDE HDD 2nd Boot Devi Disabled Boot Device Disabled 4th Boot Device Disabled Try Other Boot Devices No Initial D lay Mode BIOS Floppu c Control Read Hrite Hard Disk ccess Control Read Hrite S M R R T for Hard Disks Disabled BootUp Num Lock n Floppu Drive Suap Disabled Floppu Drive Seek Disabled PS 2 Mouse Support Enabled ESC Exit 1 5 1 Typematic Rate Fast PgUp PgDn Modify System Keyboard Absent F2 F3 Color Table 4 24 Quick Boot Enabled Pri Master ARMD Emulated as Auto 222 Table 4 24 Troubleshooting To configure the A20 Digital Motherboard and BIOS Pri Slave ARMD Emulated as Sec Master ARMD Emulated as Sec Slave ARMD Emulated as 15 Boot Devices 2nd Boot Devices 3rd Boot Devices 4th Boot Devices Try Other Boot Devices Initial Display Mode Floppy Access Control Hard Disk Access Control S M A R T for Hard Disks Boot Up Num Lock Floppy Drive Swap Floppy Drive Seek PS 2 Mouse Support Typematic Rate System Keybord Primary Display Password Check Boot To OS 2 Wait For F1 If Error Hit Del Message Display Internal Cache System BIOS Cacheable C000 16k shadow C400 16k shadow C800 16k shadow CC00 16k shadow D000 16k shadow D400 16k shadow Chapter 4 Auto Auto Auto Ist IDE HDD Disabled Disabled Disabled No BIOS Read Write Read Write Disabled On Disabled Disabled Enabled Fast Absent VGA EGA Setup No Enabled Enabled WriteBack
241. n Megatrends ANIBIOS C 1997 American Megatrends Inc 12 81 88 RBXAX 87 Raptor ATK USA The Foremost in Product Integrity Pentium R III 780MHz Checking NURAM Hit DEL if you want to run SETUP American Megatrends Inc 62 8088 886389 80101111 871595 448B GX hPCBXRPC 5 Step 3 System configuration The BIOS checks the E5070A E50714A configuration and displays the results as shown in Figure 4 8 Two PCI boards A21 and A26 can be confirmed as follows e PCI Slot 3 VGA is A26 LCD interface card e PCI Slot 4 Bridge Device IRQ5 is A21 analog interface board Ifthe BIOS couldn t detect the above boards due to a hardware problem or incomplete PCI slot connection nothing is displayed there Additionally the BIOS cannot check the operation of the above boards In this case check first whether a PCI slot connection has a problem poor contact or not A24 GPIB card cannot be confirmed because it is on the ISA slot 150 Chapter 4 Troubleshooting Booting Process Troubleshooting Figure 4 8 System configuration page 05 System Configuration 1985 1997 American Megatrends Inc Pentium R III Base Menory Size Built In Ext Memoru Size 1 44 35 Bisplau None Serial Port s 5 Date 07 15 95 Parallel Port s Processor Clock 760Miz External Cache ATAPI Type Size LBA 3288 Block PIO Mode Bevice s Mode Mode
242. n detected during the self test after turning on the power RF overload There has been a ranging failure in the internal circuit due to a sudden change in impedance caused by removing the DUT or some other reason during measurement Do not remove the DUT during measurement If this error occurs frequently during normal measurement there may be instrument failure 380 Appendix F Messages Cal done Messages indicating the results or current status of processing Cal done Calculation and storage of a calibration coefficient completed Cal measure aborted Measurement of calibration data aborted Comp done Calculation and storage of a fixture compensation coefficient completed Comp measure aborted Measurement of a fixture compensation coefficient aborted Peak not found Peak search function executed but no defined peak was found Target value not found Target search function executed but no target measurement value was found Trigger hold Measurement 15 in hold mode in which trigger is not accepted Wait measuring cal standard Calibration data are now being measured Wait measuring comp standard 4 Fixture compensation data are now being measured Appendix F 381 Messages Wait measuring comp standard 382 Appendix F REGIONAL SALES AND SUPPORT OFFICES For more information about Agilent Technologies test and measurement products applications services and for a current
243. nd Edition Safety Summary The following general safety precautions must be observed during all phases of operation service and repair of this instrument Failure to comply with these precautions or with specific WARNINGS elsewhere in this manual may impair the protection provided by the equipment In addition it violates safety standards of design manufacture and intended use of the instrument Agilent Technologies assumes no liability for the customer s failure to comply with these requirements E5070A E5071A comply with INSTALLATION CATEGORY II and POLLUTION DEGREE 2 in IEC61010 1 5070 5071 are INDOOR USE product LEDs in E5070A E5071A are Class 1 in accordance with IEC60825 1 CLASS 1 LED PRODUCT WARNING Ground The Instrument To avoid electric shock hazard the instrument chassis and cabinet must be connected to a safety earth ground by the supplied power cable with earth blade DO NOT Operate In An Explosive Atmosphere Do not operate the instrument in the presence of flammable gasses or fumes Operation of any electrical instrument in such an environment constitutes a definite safety hazard Keep Away From Live Circuits Operating personnel must not remove instrument covers Component replacement and internal adjustments must be made by qualified maintenance personnel Do not replace components with the power cable connected Under certain conditions dangerous voltages may exist even with the power cable
244. neighbor IF ranges Required equipment for the F rang gain phase adjustment Description Recommended Model 6 dB Attenuator Agilent 8491A w Opt 006 and H60 N m N m Cable 61 cm Agilent N6314A p n 8120 8862 Source Power Adjustment The purpose of this procedure is to adjust the output level from the source board 136 Chapter 3 Adjustment Required Adjustment after Replacing Assembly Required equipment for the source power adjustment Description Recommended Model Power Meter Agilent E4419A B Power Sensor Agilent E4412A Power Sensor Agilent 8482 Test Ports Characteristics Adjustment The purpose of this procedure is to adjust source match directivity and tracking Required equipment for the test port characteristics adjustment Description Recommended Model Calibration Kit Agilent 85052F N m N m Cable Agilent N6314A p n 8120 8862 gt 2 E E 6 5 Chapter 3 137 Adjustment Required Adjustment after Replacing Assembly 138 Chapter 3 0 n gt 5 Q Troubleshooting This chapter provides procedure to isolate a faulty assembly in the E5070A E5071A Network Analyzer 139 Troubleshooting Introduction Tr Introduction WARNING These servicing instructions are for use by qualified personnel only To avoid possible electrical shock do n
245. nerates a DEADLOCKED Query error see 6 3 1 7 IEEE488 2 This error occurs when both input and output buffers have become full preventing the instrument from continuing processing for example Appendix F 375 400 410 420 440 105 106 50 21 150 158 Messages Query error Query error A comprehensive query error has occurred showing that this instrument cannot detect a more detailed error This code simply shows that a query error defined in 11 5 1 1 7 and 6 3 IEEE488 2 has occurred Query INTERRUPTED The state that generates a INTERRUPTED Query error see 6 3 2 3 488 1 This error occurs when data bytes DAB or GET are received before the transmission of the response after a query has not been completed for example Query UNTERMINATED The state that generates an UNTERMINATED Query error see 6 3 2 IEEE488 2 This error occurs when this instrument is designated as the talker and an incomplete program message is received for example Query UNTERMINATED after indefinite response After a query asking for an indefinite response has been run another query is received in the same program message See 6 5 7 5 7 488 2 R Recall failed This error occurs when reading an instrument status file State01 sta etc MMEM LOAD STAT command fails S Save failed This error occurs when writing an instrument status file State01 sta etc MMEM STOR STAT co
246. ng Using Internal Test Internal Test dialog box rev A01 02 or earlier Internal Test Rev A 01 02 x Not Done Detail A2SlaveDC Not Done Detail a6 DC Not Done Detail A1DC Not Done Detail at PLL Not Done Detail Iv at ALC NotDone Detail Power Gain Not Done Detail ATT Not Done Detail Select All Select None Test Clear Exit Copyright c 2001 Agilent Technologies Inc Internal Test dialog box rev A03 00 or later A2 Master DC Not Done Detail A2 Slave DC NotDone Detail A6 DC NotDone Detail A1 DC NotDone Detail A1 PLL Not Done Detail Not Done Detail Aspe NotDone Detail Rch Power Gain NotDone Detail Step Attenuator Not Done Detail Select Select None Copyright c 2002 Agilent Technologies Inc e5070ase298 All the test groups are preset to take effect If it is necessary to perform a specific test group or some test groups only check in click the check boxes for the desired test group s and clear the other check boxes Clicking Select None button clears all the check boxes Clicking Detail button displays the names of individual tests included in each test group Click Exit to return to the Internal Test dialog box Click Test or Start Test button to run the internal test program The dialog box displays Now testing while the internal test is in progress When the internal
247. ng is an example procedure to check the drive C and D of E5070A E5071A using the external PC Enable the network connection function of the E5070A E5071A If the function has been enabled skip this step 1 Press key 2 Press Misc Setup for firmware rev 2 0 and above Network Setup and press Network Device to ENABLE 3 dialog box will appear press the OK to reboot the instrument Setup the E5070A E5071A for file sharing 1 Press key 2 Press Misc Setup Network Setup Network Configuration 3 The Network dialog box as shown in Figure D 1 will appear In the Configuration tab select display it in reverse video and press the Properties button 354 Appendix D Computer Virus Check Computer Virus Check Figure D 1 Network Dialog Box Configuration Tab Network gt Configuration identification Access Control The following network components are installed Client for Microsoft Networks 9 3 lt n gt 9 o Add lt Primary Network Logon Windows Logon Eile and Print Sharing Description Cancel e507 0auj042 4 The dialog box in Figure D 2 appears If Obtain an IP address automatically has been selected you select Specify an IP address and enter the IP address 192 168 0 1 and subnet mask 255 255 0 0 as shown in Figure D 2 Press the OK button If a specific IP address and subnet m
248. ng tests These tests check the IF signal level ranging operation of test channel receiver for each test port Required equipment Description Recommended model Fixed attenuator 10 dB N m N f 8491A B C Coaxial cable with N type m connectors 61 cm 24 in N6314A Procedure Perform the following procedure after step 11 a Click Tch IF Ranging in the pull down menu of the Test List box b Click Test button in the dialog box to open the IF Ranging tests dialog box The dialog box displays 4 independent tests included in the IF Ranging tests as shown in Figure 4 39 182 Chapter 4 Troubleshooting Troubleshooting Using External Test Figure 4 39 IF Ranging tests dialog box example E5070A E5071A Opt 413 414 IF Ranging X 512 T1 Mag Not Done 512 T1 Phase Not Done 521 R1 Mag Not Done 521 R1 Phase Not Done 521 T2 Mag Not Done 521 T2 Phase Not Done 5 512 R2 Mag Not Done 165 512 R2 Phase Not Done 531 T3 Mag Not Done 531 T3 Phase Not Done Test 513 R3 Mag Not Done 5 513 R3 Phase Not Done 541 T4 Mag Not Done 541 T4 Phase Not Done 514 R4 Mag NotDone 99 514 R4 Phase Not Done c Click the Test button associated with each test 104 1 amp 2 1048 1 amp 3 10dB 1 amp 4 dialog box opens as shown in Figure 4 40 Figure 4 40 10dB 1 amp 2 dialog box Connect 10dB between Port1 amp Port2 d Connect a 10 dB fixed
249. nge 1 Serial Number JP1KJ00101 to JPIKJ00110 Change 1 The chassis is changed for the following serial number Model E5070A E5071A JP1KJ00101 to JP1KJ00237 Top View Major Assemblies on page 236 Change as follows Top View Major Assembly Appendix A 331 gt amp 5 3 amp 5 2 Manual Changes Change 1 Table A 3 Top View Major Assembly Ref Agilent Part Number C D Qty Description Desig 1 54810 66525 1 1 A26 LCD INTERFACE CARD 2 82341C 002 8 1 A24 GPIB CARD 3 E5070 66521 5 1 10 ANALOG OTHER BOARD 4 0950 3961 3 1 50 ATX POWER SUPPLY 5 5070 66523 7 1 A23 HANDLER I O BOARD 6 E5070 66586 2 1 A6 SWITCH CONTROL BOARD 7 E5070 01201 2 1 PLATE 8 See Table 5 18 1 A28 FDD ASSEMBLY 9 E5070 61001 6 1 Bl FAN ASSY 10 E5070 61002 7 1 B1 FAN ASSY 11 See Table 5 19 1 A27 MASS STORAGE DISK DRIVE ASSEMBLY 12 E4991 66505 7 1 A5 CRYSTAL OVEN Opt 1 5 13 E5070 60001 0 1 CHASSIS 14 E5070 61030 1 1 A20 DIGITAL MOTHERBOARD 332 Appendix A Manual Changes Change 1 Top View Miscellaneous Parts on page 240 Figure A 3 Top View Miscellaneous Parts jenuey V e5070ase264 Appendix 333 Manual Changes Change 1 Table A 4 Top View Miscellaneous Parts
250. ngs and Exit Exit Without Saving Standard CMOS setup for changing time date hard disk type etc ESC Exit t Sel F2 F3 Color F1 Save amp Exit The BIOS setup utility has 11 selectable windows Brief descriptions and reference pages for these windows are provided in Table 4 23 The details of the BIOS option settings in each window are described on the page listed in the table Select a desired window using and keys or key To perform an operation use key NOTE If you want to quit the BIOS option setting and exit the BIOS setup utility without saving Chapter 4 219 es o 6 o gt 9 9 2 Table 4 23 Troubleshooting To configure the A20 Digital Motherboard and BIOS changes in the setup select Exit Without Saving and press Enter J BIOS setup utility windows and references NOTE Window name Contents of setup utility Ref page Standard CMOS Setup The default settings of all the Standard on CMOS Setup options The procedure to set page 221 date or time is also described Advanced CMOS The default settings of all the advanced on Setup CMOS Setup options page 222 Advanced Chipset The default settings of all the Advanced on Setting Chipset Setting options page 224 Power Management The default settings of all the Power on Setup Management Setup options page 226 PCI Plug and Play The default settings of all the PCI
251. nstrument in a safe and serviceable condition The adjustment must be performed by Agilent s qualified service personnel WARNING Any interruption of the protective ground conductor inside or outside the equipment or disconnection of the protective ground terminal can make the instrument dangerous Intentional interruption of the protective ground system for any reason is prohibited Warm up for Adjustment Warm up the E5070A E5071A for at least 30 minute before performing any of the following Adjustment procedures to ensure proper results and correct instrument operation Required Equipment Table 1 1 on page 20 lists the equipment required to perform the Adjustment procedures described in this chapter Use only calibrated test equipment when adjusting the 5070 5071 134 Chapter 3 Adjustment Required Adjustment after Replacing Assembly Required Adjustment after Replacing Assembly After replacing the following assembly the adjustment items described in Table 3 1 must be required The adjustment must be performed Agilent s qualified service personnel If you need the adjustment for your E5070A E5071A it should be sent to the nearest Agilent Technologies service office Table 3 1 Required Adjustment Item after Replacing Assembly Replaced Assembly Adjustment Item T 2 a o E 2 gt E 5 2 lt a a 5 5 2 5
252. nu press 5 o 6 o gt e o 2 Q Chapter 4 227 Troubleshooting To configure the A20 Digital Motherboard and BIOS Figure 4 89 PCI Plug and Play Setup window AMIBIOS SETUP PCI 7 PLUG AND PLAY SETUP C 1998 American Megatrends Inc All Rights Reserved nd Play Aware 0 5 atency Timer PCI Clocks 64 PCI VGA Palette Snoop Disabled Yes Allocate IRQ to PCI VGA No PCI IDE BusMaster Disabled OffBoard PCI IDE Card uto DffBoard PCI IDE Primaru IRQ Disabled OffBoard PCI IDE Secondary IRQ Disabled PCI Sloti IRQ Priority Auto PCI Slot2 IRQ Priority PCI Slot3 IRQ Priority PCI Slot4 IRQ Priority DMA Channel DMA Channel DMA Channel DMA Channel es vailable Optioms No DHA Channel 7 ESC Exit k Sel E men Table 4 27 Plag and Play Aware O S Yes PCI Latency Timer PCI Clocks 64 PCI VGA Palette Snoop Disabled Allocate IRQ to PCI VGA No PCIIDE BusMaster Disabled OffBoard PCI IDE Card Auto OffBoard PCI IDE Primary IRQ Disabled OffBoard PCI IDE Secondary IRQ Disabled PCI Slot IRQ Priority Auto PCI Slot2 IRQ Priority Auto PCI Slot3 IRQ Priority Auto PCI Slot4 IRQ Priority Auto DMA Channel 0 PnP DMA Channel 1 PnP DMA Channel 3 PnP DMA Channel 5 PnP DMA Channel 6 PnP DMA Channel 7 PnP IRQ3 PCI PnP 1804 PCI PnP 228 Chapter4 Table 4 27 IRQ5 IRQ7 IRQ9 IRQ10 012 014 IRQ15 Reserved Memory Size Reserved Memory Address PCI D
253. o Check the External Keyboard vaya aa tina er eh ens ele See ete 169 Tos heck the Mouse mA ata Sea TA 169 To Check the EDD neve ar beans Sie Pa Shas hse pa a Pade 170 To Check the Video 2 170 To Check the External Trigger 170 Check the AN acct fc au etae Ate 171 To Checlethe Printer Parallel 2 Se a OES LS 175 Check the GPIB z 23 aaa et len eee Cert ai atc ee k 176 Troubleshooting Using External 177 test a l ua etu e bie en RUP SR 177 Test equipment required for external 178 To Execute the External Test rev A 01 01 or 178 2 Teh IE 182 To Execute the External Test rev 03 00 194 External Test Failure Troubleshooting 208 Performance test failure troubleshooting 214 Recommended adjustment for performance test 214 Performance test failure troubles
254. olor USB Function Enabled USB KB Mouse Legacy Support Auto Port 64 60 Emulation Disabled SERR Disabled PERR Disabled WSC Handshake Enabled USWC Write Post Enabled BX GX Master Latency Timer Clks 64 Multi Trans Timer Clks 32 to PCIO Access Disabled 224 Chapter 4 Table 4 25 Troubleshooting To configure the A20 Digital Motherboard and BIOS Aperture Access Global Enable PCI0 Agent To Aperture Access Memory Autosizing Support DRAM Integrity Mode DRAM Refresh Rate Memory Hole SDRAM CAS Latency SDRAM RAS to CAS delay SDRAM RAS Precharge SDRAM Precharge Control Power Down SDRAM ACPI Control Register Gated Clock Graphics Aperture Size Search for MDA Resources AGP Read Sync AGP Snoopable Write AGP Mlti Trans Timer AGP Clks AGP Low Priority Timer AGP Clks AGP SERR AGP Parity Error Response 8bit I O Recovery Time 16bit I O Recovery Time PIIX4 SERRZ USB Passive Release Passive Release Delayed Transaction TypeF DMA Buffer Control1 TypeF DMA Buffer Control2 DMA 0 Type DMA 1 Type Chapter 4 Disabled N A Auto N A 15 6 us Disabled Auto Auto Auto Miss Disabled Disabled Enabled 64MB Yes Disabled Enabled 32 16 Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled R o 0 o gt e o 2 Q Enabled Enabled Enabled Disabled Disabled Normal ISA Normal ISA 225 Table 4 25 Figure 4 88 Table 4 26 Trouble
255. om the 5070 5071 Measurement Display 1 Press System key 2 Press Service Menu Restart Menu on the menu bar and the Password dialog box will appear 3 Enter the password e507xa into the Password box 4 Press Restart as Service on the menu bar and the instrument will be restarted Step 4 Double click the My Computer icon on the Windows desktop T 3 D 5 m T Appendix C 349 Figure C 3 Firmware Update Firmware Update Step 5 Insert the E5070A E5071A firmware installation disk1 1 of 4 into the FDD of the 5070 5071 Step 6 Double Click the 3 1 2 Floppy icon Step 7 Remove the old version of the firmware using the following procedure 1 2 Double Click E5070 msi icon The E5070A E5071A Setup Wizard uninstall will start automatically as shown in Figure C 3 Click on the Remove E5070A E5071A option button on the E5070A E5071A Setup Wizard as shown in Figure C 3 then click on the Finish button 5070 5071 Setup Wizard uninstall S E5070 Welcome to the E5070 Setup Wizard 00 j Select whether you want to repair or remove E5070 Repair E5070 Remove 5070 WARNING This computer program is protected by copyright law and international treaties Unauthorized duplication or distribution of this program or any portion of it may result in severe civil or criminal penalties and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent
256. om the touch screen controller if the option 016 is installed Step 4 Remove the four TORX T10 screws item 4 fastening the cover to the front panel Step 5 Disconnect the two cables item 5 and 6 connected through the cover NOTE The item 6 is not connected in the E5070A E5071A without the option 016 Step 6 Disconnect the two cables item 7 and 8 from the inverter Step 7 Remove the two TORX T10 screws item 9 fastening the inverter assembly Step 8 Remove the two TORX 8 screws item 10 fastening the inverter to the holder 318 Chapter 6 Replacement Procedure A52 Inverter Board Removal Figure 6 25 A52 Inverter Board Removal 2 o 3 5 X 1 e5070ase245 Chapter 6 319 Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Step 4 Step 5 NOTE Step 6 Step 7 Step 8 Replacement Procedure A51 LCD Display Removal A51 LCD Display Removal Tools Required Pozidriv screwdriver pt size 2 medium where Pozidriv screws in use TORX screwdriver T10 T15 T20 where TORX screws in
257. onnector Removal Procedure Refer to Figure 6 28 for this procedure Remove the front panel as described in Front Panel Removal on page 284 Remove the trim from the right side of the front panel Remove the Pozidriv screw item 1 fastening the N connector holder from the right side Remove the two Pozidriv screws item 2 from the bottom Disconnect the semi rigid cables from the N connector refer to the figure as shown in Table 6 5 The label on the semi rigid cable show the last two digits of the part number Reference Figure Option Figure 213 Figure 5 9 on page 248 214 Figure 5 10 on page 249 313 Figure 5 11 on page 250 314 Figure 5 12 on page 252 413 Figure 5 13 on page 254 414 Figure 5 14 on page 256 Remove the washers and nuts from the N connectors Remove the N connector from the holder NOTE Match the dents on the holder and the juts on the connector for replacement NOTE Fasten the semi rigid cable using a torque wrench for replacement Chapter 6 323 Replacement Procedure N Connector Removal Figure 6 28 N Connector Removal e5070ase249 324 Chapter 6 lt J gt T x D v Post Rep
258. ort The LAN interface port on the rear panel allows Refer to To Check the the 5070 5071 to be connected to 10 100 LAN on page 171 Base T Ethernet Printer parallel port A specified printer can be used to print the Refer to To Check the E5070A E5071A measurement display setup display and others when it is connected to the Printer port 36 pin D Sub on the rear panel Printer Parallel Port on page 175 GPIB interface The GPIB compatibility allows the E5070A E5071A to be operated as a talker listener or system controller on IEEE 488 interface bus Refer to To Check the GPIB on page 176 Handler I O port The Handler I O port can be used to transfer a comparator decision output data to and perform timing synchronization with an external handler Perform 13 Handler I O Board tests in Troubleshooting Using External Test on page 177 Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 To Check the Device Driver Make sure first whether the 5070 5071 device drivers are installed properly or not by the following procedure if a function of specific device in the E5070A E5071A doesn t work Exit from the E5070A E5071A measurement view in accordance with the procedure described in How to exit from the E5070A E5071A Measurement View on page 141 Then Windows desktop screen is displayed Click My Computer and Properties icons to open System Properties dialog box Click Devi
259. ot perform servicing unless you qualified to so WARNING The opening of covers or removal of parts is likely to expose dangerous voltages Disconnect the instrument from its power supply beforehand CAUTION Many of the assemblies in the instrument are very susceptible to damage from ESD electrostatic discharge Perform the following procedures only at a static safe workstation and wear a grounding strap CAUTION DO NOT operate without following instructions Programs or files in the instrument may be broken 140 Chapter4 T Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Step 4 Figure 4 1 Step 5 Step 6 Step 7 NOTE NOTE Troubleshooting How to exit from the E5070A E5071A Measurement View How to exit from the 5070 5071 Measurement View You need to exit from the E5070A E5071A Measurement View to perform some troubleshooting The following is the procedure to exit from the E5070A E5071A Measurement View Connect the mouse and external keyboard to the connectors on the E5070A E5071A rear panel Turn the instrument on Press key Click Service Menu and Restart Menu Password dialog box opens as shown in Figure 4 1 Password dialog box Enter the password e507xa in the Password box and then click OK button Click Restart as Service in Restart Menu E5070 dialog box opens and prompts you to make sure that you are going to restart the instrument in windows desktop mode
260. pair or replace products that prove to be defective For warranty service or repair this product must be returned to a service facility designated by Agilent Technologies Buyer shall prepay shipping charges to Agilent Technologies and Agilent Technologies shall pay shipping charges to return the product to Buyer However Buyer shall pay all shipping charges duties and taxes for products returned to Agilent Technologies from another country Agilent Technologies warrants that its software and firmware designated by Agilent Technologies for use with an instrument will execute its programming instruction when property installed on that instrument Agilent Technologies does not warrant that the operation of the instrument or software or firmware will be uninterrupted or error free IMPORTANT Limitation of Warranty The foregoing warranty shall not apply to defects resulting from improper or inadequate maintenance by Buyer Buyer supplied software or interfacing unauthorized modification or misuse operation outside the environmental specifications for the product or improper site preparation or maintenance No other warranty is expressed or implied Agilent Technologies specifically disclaims the implied warranties of merchantability and fitness for a particular purpose Exclusive Remedies The remedies provided herein are buyer s sole and exclusive remedies Agilent Technologies shall not be liable for any direct indirec
261. possible under the law Cancel Step 8 Install the new version of the firmware using the following procedure Double Click E5070 msi icon The E5070A E5071A Setup Wizard will start automatically as shown in Figure C 4 Click on the Next to continue the firmware installation on the 5070 5071 Setup Wizard as shown in Figure C 4 After the disk1 installation is finished insert the firmware installation disk2 2 of 4 into the FDD of the 5070 5071 then click OK After the disk2 installation is finished insert the firmware installation disk3 3 of 4 into the FDD of the E5070A E5071A then click OK After the disk3 installation is finished insert the firmware installation disk4 4 of 4 into the FDD of the E5070A E5071A then click OK 350 Appendix C Figure C 4 E5070A E5071A Setup Wizard Welcome to the E5070 Setup Wizard The installer will guide you through the steps required to install E5070 on your computer Click to continue WARNING This computer program is protected by copyright law and international treaties Unauthorized duplication or distribution of this program or any portion of it may result in severe civil or criminal penalties and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law Cancel Firmware Update Firmware Update Step 9 Double click Restart as instr icon on the Windows desktop and the instrument
262. r 4 159 Troubleshooting Troubleshooting Using Internal Test Figure 4 20 Breakdown test result display example rev A 03 00 or later Analog GND Pass Analog 10 9 Analog 4 4 Pass Analog SV Pass Digital 5 Pass Digital 3 3 Pass TEMP Pass TEMP B Pass Exit e5070bse140 Step 14 To exit the internal test click Exit button NOTE Clicking Select None button clears all the check boxes but it does not clear the test results To initialize the internal test rev A 01 02 or earlier click Clear button Test results will change to Not Done Internal Test Failure Troubleshooting Table 4 1 represents the contents of the internal tests and the relationships of failed tests to probable faulty board assemblies If the instrument fails the internal test replace the faulty board assembly as shown in Table 4 1 Table 4 1 Internal tests failure troubleshooting information Test Test group First failed test Test point objective Probable faulty board assembly No Al A6 A2 Receiver A7 Att Source Sw T cont 14 17 1 A2 Master Analog GND DC bus on A2 master HHH DC 2 Analog 10V 9V 10V and 9V on A2 HHH 3 Analog 4V 4V 4V and 4V on A2 THE 4 Analog 5V 5V for analog on A2 HHH 5 Digital 5V 5V for digital on A2 THE 6 Digital 3 3V 3 3V on A2 HHH 7 TEMPA Thermometer A THE HHH 8 TEMPB Thermomete
263. r B THE THE 160 Chapter 4 Troubleshooting Troubleshooting Using Internal Test Table 4 1 Internal tests failure troubleshooting information Test Test group First failed test Test point objective Probable faulty board assembly No Al A6 A2 Receiver A7 Att Source Sw T cont 14 17 9 A2 Slave Analog GND DC bus on A2 slave DC Opt 10 313 314 41 Analog 10V 9V 10V and 9V on A2 HHH 1 414 only Analog 4V 4V 44V and 4V n 12 Analog 5V 5V for analog on A2 HHH 13 Digital 5V 5V for digital on A2 HHH 14 Digital 3 3V 3 3V on A2 HHH 15 TEMPA Thermometer A on A2 HHH 16 TEMPB Thermometer B on A2 THE HHH 17 A6 DC Analog GND DC bus on A6 HHH 18 Analog 11V 11V on A6 HHH 19 AP5V 5V on A6 HHH 20 FANI Blower control 1 on A6 HHH 21 FAN2 Blower control 2 on A6 HHH 22 FAN3 Blower control 3 on A6 HHH 23 Al DC DC bus A1 HHH 24 VTEMP Thermometer on A1 HHH 25 Al PLL FVT 2 80000GHz Fixed synthesizer on A1 26 FVT 2 84375GHz Fixed synthesizer on A1 27 SVT 2 11GHz Source swept synthe on Al 28 LVT 2 11GHz Local swept synthe on HHH Al 29 SVT 4 25GHz Source swept synthe on Al 30 LVT 4 25GHz Local swept synthe on HHH Al Chapter 4 161
264. r exhibits Ready in blue NOTE Do not operate front panel keys keyboard and mouse during the external test Changing Step 1 the instrument settings while the external test is in progress will cause incorrect test results Connect a mouse to the rear panel connector 178 Chapter 4 Figure 4 33 Figure 4 34 Troubleshooting Troubleshooting Using External Test Step 2 Press _Macro Setup key Step 3 Press lt gt C gt keys or click Load Project to select Load Project function Step 4 Step 5 Step 6 Step 7 Step 8 Step 9 Step 10 Step 11 Open dialog box will be displayed as shown in Figure 4 33 Open dialog box pen gt Look in al c H Agilent Files of type vea Project Files Cancel 2 Select User 0 preset state from menu in Lock box Double click Agilent folder to open it and to access its menu Double click Service folder to open it Click External Test VBA program file to select it from program menu Click Open button to download the external test program Press lt gt CY 5 CD or click Select Macro to select Select Macro function Press or click Module1 main to open the Module1 main program file External Test dialog box will be displayed as shown in Figure 4 34 This dialog box shows Test List box which prompts you to select a desired test group from a menu External test dialog box Ext
265. ram uncorrected system test vba can be downloaded from Agilent Technologies web site to a floppy disk using you computer s FDD Step 28 Press to run the test program This test program displays the values of the directivity source match and load match at each sweep frequency point and extracts the maximum value for each of the following frequency ranges 5070 3 MHz to 3 GHz 1 range 5071 3 MHz to 3 GHz 3 GHz to 6 GHz 6 GHz to 8 5 GHz 3 ranges The maximum value in each frequency range is represented in dB and displayed in the VBA UserForm window as shown in the display example below Directivity test for port 1 a Set Parameter Response Port and Stimulus Port as shown in Figure 2 47 Figure 2 47 Directivity test window Parameter Directivity Response Port 1 Stimulus Port 2 gt oK About 5070 254 b Press OK button The maximum value in each frequency range is displayed as shown in Figure 2 48 or Figure 2 49 Figure 2 48 Directivity for E5070A 3M to 36 Hz 5070 260 88 Chapter2 Performance Tests 8 UNCORRECTED SYSTEM PERFORMANCE TEST Figure 2 49 Directivity for E5071A Frequency Ranges Hz dB 3M to 3 G Hz 3G to 6 G Hz 6 G to 8 5 G Hz a e5070ase255 Record displayed values the performance test record Test results dB column in Port 1 table for
266. re EUER n uc NIENTE 295 Replacement Procedure LigntLteLeertiiietebBUb QUE eh oe EHE S 296 Al Source Board 21 4 297 Tools Required reco 297 Removal Procedure e gd E eS 297 A2 Receiver Board Removal UH UE UE Sene 299 Tools Required 0 SW M SUA ate ee euge eth 299 Removal Procedure eese LAXE RUSSE RE eet eel Estee 299 Module Disassemble Procedure 300 Board Disassemble 1 301 Fan amp Switch Control Board 21 302 Tools Requited zz scare eg Eas SEES 302 Procedure aa ot aes ocd ag Uh 302 BI Fan Rem avalsr uoce ee BERR ee SAS RE A eA es 303 Tools Required ran 1s Les susu arama kaun aes le ua ma t cet ta te deus 303 aysa Rin DIN Can OC RB ein 303 AS Crystal Oven Board Opt 1E5 Removal 304 Tools Required PLU A Rh el MMC WR CHEM 304 Procedure aa esL teu ate tie Rv EcL uei uu De du etek at doen Uk 304 AS RE Switch Replacement x eeu ce a n ens Stee
267. re 4 11 Since the logo file 18 in the 27 mass storage if the logo is displayed it is assumed that the A27 works Subsequently a message of Push R key to enter recovery mode N is displayed for a moment and the Agilent logo screen recovers While the logo screen is displayed Windows operating system is starting up Figure 4 11 Agilent logo screen Agilent Technologies NOTE Ifthe E5070A E5071A was turned off without shutdown process Microsoft Scandisk runs after the message of Push key to enter recovery mode N is displayed If a serious problem is found in the scandisk reinstall the operating system For details of the operating system installation refer to Appendix B System Recovery on page 343 If the operating system still doesn t boot up properly after reinstallation replace the A27 If you encounter the following problems try to reinstall the operating system before replacing the A27 xxx file is missing is displayed on DOS screen 5 o 6 o gt e o 2 Q The Agilent logo screen is not displayed after Searching for Boot Record from IDE 0 OK is displayed Windows always boots up with Safe Mode NOTE The operating system automatically checks the device drivers which are necessary to use the E5070A E5071A functions and are installed in the system before the E5070A E5071A is shipped from Agilent factory If the operating
268. re the Motherboard on page 216 Check LED of Num Lock key Press Num Lock key on the keyboard If the LED in the key doesn t light as shown in Figure 4 4 a problem seems in the A20 digital motherboard LED of the Num Lock key o 0 o gt 9 9 2 Q If 2 digits seven segment LED display POST DISPLAY on the A20 board indicates a number other than 00 a failure in the A20 board is suspected Make sure the followings before replacing the A20 board Chapter 4 145 NOTE Step 4 NOTE Step 5 Step 6 Troubleshooting No Display troubleshooting Whether all the connections to the A20 are normal or not Check if there is any disconnection or connection working loose Whether the jumper settings on the A20 are correct or not as described in Configure the Motherboard on page 216 Whether BIOS options are correct or not as described in To Confirm or Set the BIOS Options on page 218 The LED display cannot surely indicate whether the A20 board is normal or faulty 00 may be displayed despite the A20 is faulty Checking with the external monitor Connect an external VGA monitor to the VIDEO output on the E5070A E5071A rear panel Ifsomething is displayed on the external monitor the problem is present around the LCD Also check the A21 and A22 because the ON OFF setting of the LCD backlight is controlled by the A21 through the A22 front interface
269. rews item 6 fastening the power supply holder Step 7 Remove the two TORX T10 item 7 from the rear panel Step 8 Lift the A50 ATX power supply assembly toward front side with the mount Step 9 Cut the cable tie item 8 if you replace the power supply CAUTION Don t forget to clamp cables after replacement 290 Chapter 6 Replacement Procedure A50 ATX Power Supply Assembly Removal Figure 6 7 A50 ATX Power Supply Assembly Removal 2 o 3 5 X e5070ase233 Chapter 6 291 NOTE Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Step 4 Step 5 Step 6 Step 7 Replacement Procedure CPU Removal CPU Removal There is a CPU on the A20 digital motherboard Tools Required Pozidriv screwdriver pt size 2 medium where Pozidriv screws in use TORX screwdriver T10 T15 T20 where TORX screws in use Flat edge screwdriver Procedure Always handle the CPU by the edges never touch the pins Refer to Figure 6 8 for this procedure Remove the outer cover as described in Outer Cover Removal on page 282 Remove the 50 ATX po
270. rformance test failure cannot be removed by a proper adjustment replace the assembly shown in this table Note that this table lists some typical cases There are possibilities that other assembly may be faulty To troubleshoot in further details perform the internal test and external test procedures 214 Chapter4 Troubleshooting Performance test failure troubleshooting NOTE When Crosstalk System dynamic range or Uncorrected system performance test fails check first whether the connections of the RF semi rigid cables between the suspicious assembly and others are tight or loose Also check for possible disconnection impairment of the cables and connectors Table 4 22 Performance test failure troubleshooting information Test First failed test Probable faulty board assembly Num Al 5 A2 Receiver A8 Sre Source Oven Switch Al4 A17 1 Frequency accuracy test HHH Standard 1A Frequency accuracy test Opt THE HHH 1E5 only 2 RF output level accuracy and HHH flatness test 3 RF output level linearity test HHH 4 Trace noise CW test HHH HH HH 5 Crosstalk test THE HHH 6 System dynamic range test THE HHH 7 Dynamic accuracy test HHH HH 8 Uncorrected system performance H HHH test Most suspicious assembly Suspicious assembly Possible faulty assembly 5 o 0 o gt e o 2 Chapt
271. roblem or is not using BIOS setup utility as shown in Figure 4 10 For details of how to run the BIOS setup utility refer to Run the BIOS setup utility on page 219 Move the cursor to Auto Detect Hard Disks using 1 and LJ keys on the keyboard and press Enter key at the BIOS setup utility main menu When the mass storage is detected the disk size cyln and so on are displayed as shown in Figure 4 10 Auto Detect Hard Disk page AM C 1998 American Megatrends Inc All Rights Reserved Date mm dd yyyy Sun 86 2002 Base Memory 648 KB Time hh mm ss 18 18 44 Extd Memory 383 HB Floppu Drive 1 44 3 Floppu Drive B Not Imstalled LBA Blk PIO 32Bit Type Size Cyln Head HPcom Sec Mode Mode Mode Mode Pri Master Auto 9598 On On 4 On Pri Slave Not Installed Sec Master Not Installed Sec Slave Not Installed Boot Sector Virus Protection Disabled Month Jan Dec ESC Exit 1 5 1 Day 01 31 PgUp PgDn Modify Year 1981 2899 F2 F3 Color If the mass storage 15 not detected Not installed is displayed in the Pri Master status report The A27 mass storage is connected to the IDE connector on the A20 digital motherboard via A30 3 5 2 5 adapter and a flat cable Check the flat cable first If it has no problem replace the A27 mass storage 152 Troubleshooting Booting Process Troubleshooting Step 5 Agilent logo screen Agilent Technologies logo screen is displayed as shown in Figu
272. ror messages are indicated following the character string Err and can be read out by a GPIB command Other kinds of messages are indicated without the Err character string and cannot be read out by a GPIB command This section explains the meaning of each message and how to resolve the problem it indicates 368 Appendix F 20 168 240 22 148 Messages Additional standard needed Error Messages An error message is displayed against a red background in the instrument message warning area in the lower left part of the screen Pushing a front panel key or executing DISP CCL command clears the error message Errors caused by the operation of a front panel key simply appear on the display They are not stored in the error queue with some exceptions An error with a positive error number 15 one uniquely defined for this instrument On the other hand an error with a negative error number is basically one defined for common GPIB devices in IEEE488 2 A Additional standard needed The GPIB command that turns ON the calibration function has been sent before all of the data measurements needed to calculate the calibration factor have been completed For Instance SENS CORR COLL SAVE command 15 sent to calculate calibration coefficients and turn on error correction for 1 Port Calibration when open and short calibration are completed but load calibration is not completed Be sure to measure all necessary calibra
273. rs mount from the outside Disconnect the semi rigid cables and the termination from the receiver module as shown in Table 6 3 The label on the semi rigid cable show the last two digits of the part number Reference Figure Option Figure 213 Figure 5 9 on page 248 214 Figure 5 10 on page 249 313 Figure 5 11 on page 250 314 Figure 5 12 on page 252 413 Figure 5 13 on page 254 414 Figure 5 14 on page 256 Remove the all TORX T10 screws fastening the extractor item 1 Slide the receiver module using the extractor NOTE Slide the two board at once if two A2 receiver boards are slotted NOTE Fasten the semi rigid cable using a torque wrench for replacement Chapter 6 299 Replacement Procedure A2 Receiver Board Removal Figure 6 11 A2 Receiver Removal e5070ase238 Module Disassemble Procedure Skip this procedure if the option 213 or 214 is installed Refer to Figure 6 12 for this procedure Step 1 Remove the eight 10 screws item 1 fastening the 2 boards Step 2 Separate the two 2 receiver boards 300 Chapter 6 Replacement Procedure A2 Receiver Board Removal Figure 6 12 Receiver Disassemble 2 o 3 5 X R e5070ase222 Board Disassemble Procedure Refer to Figure 6 12 for this procedure Step 1 Remove the three TORX T15 screws item 1 fastening t
274. s IFBW Nop RF termination 0 power settings and Sweep delay Automatic 511 test ports 3 MHz 1 3 GHz 1 31 GHz 2 1 GHz and 2 11 GHz E5070A 22 3 MHz 1 3 GHz 1 31 GHz 2 1 GHz 2 11 33 GHz 4 25 GHz 4 26 GHz 7 5 GHz and 8 5 m GHz 5071 3 kHz BW 101 0 dBm 100 ms d Click OK button to run the test program The dialog box displays Now testing while the Trace Noise port 1 tests are in progress e When the tests are completed the dialog box displays Pass or Fail for each test as shown in Figure 4 74 204 Chapter 4 Troubleshooting Troubleshooting Using External Test Figure 4 74 Trace Noise test results example E5071A 1 3GHz 1 31GHz 2 1GHz 2 11GHz 4 256 2 4 266 7 5GHz 8 5GHz sit Pass Pass Pass Pass Pass Pass Pass Pass Pass Phase Pass Pass Pass Pass Pass Pass Pass Pass Pass 522 Mag Pass Pass Pass Pass Pass Pass Pass Pass Pass Phase Pass Pass Pass Pass Pass Pass Pass Pass Pass 533 Mag Pass Pass Pass Pass Pass Pass Pass Pass Pass Phase Pass Pass Pass Pass Pass Pass Pass Pass Pass 544 5 Pass Pass Pass Pass Pass Pass Pass Phase Pass Pass Pass Pass Pass Pass Pass Pass Pass Start Test Select All Select None e5070bse131 f Ifat least one of the Trace Noise tests failed refer to Table 4 20 External Test Failure Troubleshooting Information g To return to the External Test dialog
275. s item 3 fastening the A5 crystal oven board from the outside Figure 6 15 A5 Crystal Oven Board Removal 5070 225 304 Chapter 6 8 RF Switch Replacement Tools Required Pozidriv screwdriver pt size 2 medium where Pozidriv screws are in use TORX screwdriver T10 T15 T20 where TORX screws in use Flat edge screwdriver e Open end torque wrench 5 16 inch set to 10 in Ib for reconnecting SMA connector A8 RF Switch source board side Removal Procedure Refer to Figure 6 16 for this procedure Step 1 Remove the front panel as described in Front Panel Removal on page 284 Step 2 Remove the three TORX T10 screws item 1 fastening the fan plate Replacement Procedure 8 RF Switch Replacement 2 o 3 gt X Step 3 Disconnect the all semi rigid cables from the switch on the left side refer to the figure as shown in Table 6 4 NOTE The label on the semi rigid cable show the last two digits of the part number Table 6 4 Reference Figure Option Figure 213 Figure 5 9 on page 248 214 Figure 5 10 on page 249 313 Figure 5 11 on page 250 314 Figure 5 12 on page 252 413 Figure 5 13 on page 254 414 Figure 5 14 on page 256 Step 4 Disconnect the switch cable from the switch Step 5 Remove the two TORX T10 screws fastening the switch item 2
276. s it possible to isolate a faulty board assembly without need of external test equipment The following paragraphs describe the procedure to perform the internal test There are two types of the internal test dialog box test menu This section describes the procedure for each internal test dialog box Procedure where the internal test revision A 01 02 or earlier has been installed Procedure where the internal test revision A 03 00 or later has been installed There are cases where the internal test is ineffective insufficient for trouble isolation because the test objects are limited to the circuit blocks and functions that can be tested with nothing connected to the test ports In such cases refer to external test to perform the diagnosis for the range uncovered with the internal test Power On Self Test Power on self test always takes place once after the E5070A E50714A is turned on When a failure is detected a message of the Power on self test failed is displayed The content of the power on self test is the same as a portion of the internal test program and includes the dc power supply voltage source PLL synthesizer and level controller ALC tests When the self test failed perform the internal test to break down into the individual tests and narrow down failure possibilities The following procedure can be used to restart the power on self test as required a Press key b Click Service Menu and then Test Menu
277. s service function When the internal test fails go to Internal Test Failure Troubleshooting on page 160 When the external test fails go to External Test Failure Troubleshooting on page 208 The internal test includes some unique measurement function tests in addition to the tests that are common to the power on self test Thus it is necessary to perform the internal test even if the power on self test passed 142 Chapter 4 Troubleshooting To Troubleshoot the Instrument Figure 4 2 Primary trouble isolation flowchart Display and Boot up Problems Problems on Control Panel Keyboard Mouse LCD Display Floppy Disk Drive Video Output GPIB Interface LAN Port Printer Parallel Port External Trigger Input and Handler I O Port Go to No Display i Display onsereen Troubleshooting Power on Go to Function Specific Troubleshooting Go to Booting Process Stop in booti 2 Sp Ah POOH proceso Troubleshooting Go to Troubleshooting F 2 Power on self test pass Using Internal Test Go to Function Specific Troubleshootind In case of display scan Check the LCD brightness and color problems Problems on Measurement Performance and Measurement Result Performance Test Internal test Go to Performance Test Performance test pass 2 8 Failure Troubleshooting Go to Internal Test Internal test pass Failure Troubleshooting Yes External test External test pass noouso
278. s shown in Figure 2 18 Refer to the Agilent E5070A E5071A VBA Programmer s Guide for the UserForm setup procedure Press and select the following S parameter from menu Option 213 214 313 314 S21 Option 413 414 S32 These parameters are shown in the first row in Table 2 7 S parameter settings for crosstalk tests Option 213 214 313 314 413 414 1 S21 S21 S32 2 S12 S12 S23 3 Not required S32 S41 4 Not required S23 S14 Press Avg C gt CA C45 C4 select Averaging Restart Enter to restart the swept measurements Wait until a trace for the average of 16 swept measurements is displayed Chapter 2 47 NOTE Figure 2 18 Program 2 1 Step 23 Step 24 Step 25 Step 26 Step 27 Step 28 Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Step 4 Step 5 Performance Tests 5 CROSSTALK TEST The number of averaging times is displayed in the status bar of the measurement channel window Press Trigger and Enter to set the trigger operation to Hold mode Press to execute the test program This test program searches the maximum point of the trace for each of the following frequency ranges 5070 3 MHz to 3 GHz one range only 5071 3 MHZ to 3 GHz 3 GHz to 6 GHz 6 GHz to 7 5 GHz and 7 5 GHz to 8 5 GHz four ranges The test results are represented in dB and displayed in the VBA UserForm window as shown in the display example below VBA Us
279. sal serial bus controller Properties Refresh Remove Print es o 6 o gt e o 2 Q Cancel To Check the Front Panel Procedure Randomly press the front panel keys and rotate the knob to verify that they work normally Step 1 Press key Chapter 4 167 Figure 4 24 Figure 4 25 Step 2 Step 3 Step 4 Step 5 Troubleshooting Function Specific Troubleshooting Click Service Menu and then Test Menu in the softkeys Click Front Panel in the test menu This opens Front Panel Test dialog box as shown in Figure 4 24 Front Panel Test dialog box Front Panel Test x Press any key and rotate m To exit press Preset key three times Randomly press the front panel keys The key code along with the name of the pressed key are displayed in the dialog box as shown in Figure 4 25 Turn the rotary knob clockwise or counterclockwise The dialog box indicates the direction of the turned knob and a count of RPG output Key code and key name display example Front Panel Test x Press any key and rotate RPG Key Code 0x11 Meas To exit press Preset key three times To exit the front panel test press key three times Ifmultiple keys fail to work a problem in A22 front interface board or A21 analog interface board is suspected Also check the flat cable between the A21 and A22 Ifonlyaspecific key doesn t wor
280. select 12 from S parameter menu Press to set the frequency to 3 MHz Perform Step 7 through 11 for the 512 measurement Options 313 314 413 and 414 only Perform Step 15 through 18 for the option 313 314 413 and 414 instruments only Connect the test equipment N N cable as shown in Figure 2 8 Opt 313 314 and Figure 2 9 Opt 413 414 38 Chapter 2 Performance Tests 4 TRACE NOISE CW TEST Figure 2 8 Trace noise CW test setup Opt 313 314 5070 5071 oo aa 0000 aa 0000 lt GOOD 659 000 D 3 D 5 N m N m Cable e5070ase012 Figure 2 9 Trace noise CW test setup Opt 413 414 E5070A 5071A 0000 aa 20050 lt gt aa eoa aano oo lt ooo aaa LF N m N m Cable e5070ase014 Step 16 Select S parameter from menu in accordance with Table 2 5 Chapter 2 39 Performance Tests 4 TRACE NOISE CW TEST Table 2 5 S parameter settings for trace noise CW test Option 313 314 413 414 1 S23 S43 2 S32 S34 Step 17 Set the center frequency to 3 MHz Step 18 Perform Step 7 through 1
281. setup see Table 4 9 Dynamic Range tests setup Test parameter Connect Short Sweep freq span IFBW Nop and terminations to RF power settings Automatic 512 the test ports 3 MHz to GHz E5070A a A nu v 3 MHz to 8 5 GHz E5071A S21 3 kHz BW 101 0 dBm 823 Opt 313 314 413 414 531 Opt 313 314 413 414 832 Opt 313 314 413 414 834 Opt 413 414 541 Opt 413 414 843 Opt 413 414 e Click OK button to run the test program The dialog box displays Now testing while the Dynamic Range tests are in progress f When the tests are completed the dialog box displays Pass or Fail for each test as shown in Figure 4 48 Dynamic Range test results example E5071A Opt 413 414 512 Pass Pass Pass Pass 513 Pass Pass Pass Pass 514 Pass Pass Pass Pass 521 Pass Pass Pass Pass S23 Pass Pass Pass Pass 531 55 Pass Pass Pass S32 Pass Pass Pass Pass 534 Pass Pass Pass Pass S41 Pass Pass Pass Pass 543 Pass Pass Pass Pass g Ifat least one of the Dynamic Range tests failed refer to Table 4 20 External Test Failure Troubleshooting Information h To return to the External Test dialog box click Exit button 5 Trace Noise port 1 tests These tests check the trace noise levels for Port 1 Required equipment Description Recommended model N type coaxial Short termination part of 85032F 85054D or part of 85033E 85050D with Type N adapter 188 Chapter 4
282. shooting is turned on If this screen doesn t appear nothing appears go to No Display troubleshooting on page 144 Figure 4 6 Video BIOS title screen Video BIOS Version 2 8 8 DECOMPILATION OR DISASSEMBLY PROHIBITED Infiniun BIOS Version 1 1 18 13 97 Copyright C 1996 Chips and Technologies Inc All Rights Reserved Step 2 BIOS logo and RAM counting BIOS logo screen as shown in Figure 4 7 describes the BIOS name model number of the digital motherboard CPU type RAM size on the digital motherboard and type of the mass storage If the message is displayed you can assume that the A20 digital motherboard is functioning correctly If the message stops during RAM counting a problem in the A20 board is suspected NOTE If you want to run the BIOS setup utility push Delete key as soon as the message of Hit DEL if you want to run SETUP is displayed during RAM counting The BIOS setup utility allows you to perform the followings 5 o 6 o gt e o 2 Q Setting the system date and time Changing the first boot device if you want to boot from a floppy disk it 15 necessary to change it Confirming the BIOS options For details of the BIOS options specified for the 5070 5071 refer to To Confirm or Set the BIOS Options on page 218 Chapter 4 149 Troubleshooting Booting Process Troubleshooting Figure 4 7 BIOS logo and RAM counting scree
283. shooting To configure the A20 Digital Motherboard and BIOS DMA 2 Type Normal ISA DMA 3 Type Normal ISA DMA 5 Type Normal ISA DMA 6 Type Normal ISA DMA 7 Type Normal ISA Memory Buffer Strength Strong Manufacture Setting Mode 0 Power Management Setup Power Management Setup options are displayed by choosing Power Management Setup using 1 and 1 keys and by pressing key at the BIOS Setup Utility main menu Then the window as shown in Figure 4 88 appears Compare the actual BIOS option settings with the default settings shown in Table 4 26 If there is any difference select it using and keys and change the option setting by pressing and gt J keys so that it becomes the same as the default setting If you want to exit from this page and return to main menu press E key Power Management Setup window RMIBIOS SETUP POWER MANAGEMENT SETUP C 1998 finerican Megatrends Inc All Rights Reserved ent Mode Available Options genent APM Enabled APM ver Button Function On Off Disabled Green PC Monitor Power State Off Uideo Pouer Ioun Mode Disabled Hard Disk Power Down Mode Disabled Hard Di Time Out Minute Disabled Power ig Type Sleep Standby spend Timer Unit 4 min Standby Time Out Disabled Suspend Time Out Disabled Slow Clock Ratio 58 52 5 Displau ctivitu Ignore Device 6 Serial port 1 Ignore Device 7 Serial port 2 Ignore Device 8 Parallel port Ignore Device 5 Floppy disk Ignore Device Primary master IDE
284. sible value to 0 dBm Perform Step 13 through 24 Set the first attenuator A1 of the Z5623A to 5 dB by executing the following GPIB control command GPIB OUTPUT 712 amp_in OUTPUT 712 at 5 OUTPUT 712 at b 10 Perform Step 13 through 24 Calculate the dynamic accuracy for 15 dBm using the following equation D A Sxy x R DAIS Sxy x R DA20 Pm DA15 Pm DA20 Record the calculated D A in the calculation sheet Running D A dB and True D A dB columns for DA15 Set the first attenuator A1 of the Z5623A to 0 dB by executing the following GPIB control command GPIB OUTPUT 712 amp_in OUTPUT 712 at_a 0 OUTPUT 712 at_b 10 Perform Step 13 through 24 Calculate the dynamic accuracy for 10 dBm using the following equation 76 Chapter 2 Step 62 Step 63 Step 64 Step 65 Step 66 NOTE NOTE Step 67 Step 68 Step 69 Step 70 Step 71 Step 72 Step 73 Step 74 Performance Tests 7 DYNAMIC ACCURACY TEST D A Sxy x R DA10 Sxy x R DA20 Pm DA10 Pm DA20 Record the calculated D A in the calculation sheet Running dB and True D A dB columns for 10 Set the first attenuator of the Z5623A to 10 dB and the second attenuator A2 to 0 dB by executing the following GPIB control command GPIB OUTPUT 712 amp_in OUTPUT 712 at_a 10 OUTPUT 712 at_b 0 This a
285. sponding to the described procedures may be used The E5070A E5071A performance test procedure Para Title 1 Frequency accuracy test 2 RF output level accuracy and flatness test 3 RF output level linearity test 4 Trace noise CW test 5 Crosstalk test 6 System dynamic range test 24 Chapter 2 Performance Tests Introduction Table 2 1 The E5070A E5071A performance test procedure Para Title 7 Dynamic accuracy test 8 Uncorrected system performance test Test Equipment Required The required equipment for the performance test is listed on Table 1 Table 1 2 Use only calibrated equipment when doing the performance test D s bus 3 D 5 Chapter 2 25 Step 1 NOTE NOTE Performance Tests 1 FREQUENCY ACCURACY TEST 1 FREQUENCY ACCURACY TEST Description This test checks the frequency accuracy of the E5070A E5071A test port output signal The frequency accuracy is checked at 50 MHz and 3 GHz with a frequency counter Since the 5070 5071 employs PLL frequency synthesizer for the signal source the frequency accuracy test at these two frequency points can verify the accuracy for the entire frequency range Specification 23 5 C referenced to 23 C Frequency accuracy lt 5 ppm 300 kHz to 3 GHz E5070A lt 5 ppm 300 kHz to 8 5 GHz E5071A 23 5 C referenced to 23 C High st
286. start up program and 218 Chapter 4 Procedure Figure 4 83 Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Step 4 Step 5 Step 6 Step 7 Troubleshooting To configure the A20 Digital Motherboard and BIOS BIOS setup utility The E5070A E5071A starts up first with the BIOS when the power is turned on Use the following procedure to confirm or set the BIOS options known as the BIOS setup utility Run the BIOS setup utility Use the external keyboard to select and set various options in the BIOS setup utility Do not operate the E5070A E5071A front panel until you exit the BIOS option setup procedure Connect the external keyboard to the E5070A E5071A rear panel connector Turn the instrument on Press key as soon as the message of Hit DEL if you want to run SETUP is displayed Wait a few seconds until a message of Enter CURRENT Password appears Press key The LED in the key lights Enter password e507xa and press Enter Then BIOS setup utility main menu is displayed as shown in Figure 4 83 BIOS setup utility main menu AMIBIOS HIFLEX SETUP UTILITY VERSION 1 18 02013898 American Megatrends Inc All Rights Reserved Advanced CMOS Setup Advanced Chipset Setup Power Management Setup PCI Plug and Play Setup Peripheral Setup fiuto Detect Hard Disks Change User Password Change Supervisor Passuord Change Language Setting Auto Configuration with Optimal Settings Auto Configuration with Fail Safe Settings Save Setti
287. t Access Read Only Full Depends on Password Passwords Read Only Password Cancel Apply 5070 241 Step 5 Set up the external PC s IP address and subnet mask 1 Double click My Computer icon on Windows desktop of the external PC And double click Control Panel The Control Panel window will appear 2 Inthe Control Panel window double click Network The Network dialog box shown in fig will appear In the Configuration tab select TCP IP display it in revers video and press the Properties button 3 The dialog box appears Select Specify an IP address and enter the IP address and subnet mask xxx xxx xxx xxx as shown in Figure D 8 The letters x represent the IP address and subnet mask of the 5070 5071 The letter y is different from the IP address of the 5070 5071 Press the OK button 358 Appendix D Computer Virus Check Computer Virus Check Figure D 8 Network Dialog Box IP Address Tab TCP IP Properties 2 Bindings Advanced 805 DNS Configuration Gateway WINS Configuration Address n IP address be automatically assigned to this computer If your network does not automatically assign IP addresses ask your network administrator for an address and then type it in the space below Obtain an address automatically Specify an IP address IP Address 192 168 0 2
288. t special incidental or consequential damages whether based on contract tort or any other legal theory Assistance Product maintenance agreements and other customer assistance agreements are available for Agilent Technologies products For any assistance contact your nearest Agilent Technologies Sales and Service Office Addresses are provided at the back of this manual Typeface Conventions Sample bold Boldface type is used when a term is defined or emphasised Sample Italic Italic type is used for emphasis key Indicates a hardkey key on the front panel or external keyboard labeled Sample key may be omitted Sample menu button box Indicates a menu button box on the screen labeled Sample which can be selected executed by clicking menu button or box may be omitted Sample block toolbar Indicates a block group of hardkeys or a toolbar setup toolbar labeled Sample Sample 1 Sample 2 Sample 3 Indicates a sequential operation of Sample 1 Sample 2 and Sample 3 menu button or box may be omitted Contents 1 General Information PrecautiOns oce ka uma aaa Saag ikan nus Q 16 Software uyu A ge S am Xanten us 16 Organization of Service 1 4 4 17 Instrument Covered by This Manual
289. t of the front panel now in pressed down ZL position to the popped up Eb position Send the shutdown command from an external controller These operations will start the 5070 5071 shutdown process required software and hardware processes for turning the power off and the power will turn OFF after a few seconds Under normal circumstances always press the standby switch 5 or send the shutdown command from the external controller to actuate the 5070 5071 shutdown process Never cut off the power supply directly by disconnecting the power cable plug from the rear panel of the unit If the power supply is cut off directly by disconnecting the power cable plug or by disconnecting the power supply to the AC outlet the shutdown process will not be carried out and there is a risk of damage to the software or hardware of the 5070 5071 366 Appendix E 4 Messages The E5070A 5071A can display error messages as well as messages that indicate the internal operating status of the equipment This appendix explains what these messages mean by listing them in alphabetical order Messages showing the status of the E5070A 5071A are displayed in the lower left area of the E5070A 5071A LCD screen These messages include error messages that occur during 367 Messages the execution of GPIB commands and others that indicate the internal status of the equipment Er
290. t the controls as follows Control settings Key strokes Center frequency 50 MHz Center 5 0 Frequency span 0 Hz 0 source power now 15 set to 0 dBm preset value Step 4 Press C and to make a Single sweep measurement Walt for frequency counter reading to settle Step 5 Record the frequency counter reading to a 1 Hz resolution in the performance test record Test result column for the Frequency accuracy test Chapter 2 27 159 4 Performance Tests 1 FREQUENCY ACCURACY TEST Figure 2 2 Frequency accuracy test setup 3GHz E5070A 5071A aea 5986 Frequency Counter CO 0000 gt Qd 2000 HE aood O N m BNC f Adapter 2000 L J BNC m BNC m Cable e5070ase034 Step 6 Connect the BNC cable to the frequency counter input channel measurable for a 3 GHz input signal See Figure 2 2 Step 7 Press Center 3 to set the frequency to 3 GHz Step 8 Perform Step 4 and 5 28 Chapter 2 NOTE Performance Tests 2 OUTPUT LEVEL ACCURACY AND FLATNESS TEST 2 RFOUTPUT LEVEL ACCURACY AND FLATNESS TEST Description This test checks the level accuracy and frequency flatness of the 5070
291. tVall Text CSng 20 Log10 MaxValA 0 frmDynamicRangel txtVal2 Text CSng 20 Log10 MaxValB 0 frmDynamicRangel Show Elself Ver E5071A Then SCPI CALCulate 1 PARameter 1 SELect SCPI CALCulate 1 SELected Function TYPE MAX SCPI CALCulate 1 SELected Function DOMain STARt 30000004 SCPI CALCulate 1 SELected Function DOMain STOP 1500000000 SCPI CALCulate 1 SELected Function DOMain STATe True SCPI CALCulate 1 SELected Function EXECute MaxValC SCPI CALCulate 1 SELected Function DATA SCPI CALCulate 1 SELected Function DOMain STARt 1500000000 SCPI CALCulate 1 SELected Function DOMain STOP 4000000000 SCPI CALCulate 1 SELected Function DOMain STATe True SCPI CALCulate 1 SELected Function EXECute MaxValD SCPI CALCulate 1 SELected Function DATA Chapter 2 Performance Tests 6 SYSTEM DYNAMIC RANGE TEST SCPI CALCulate 1 SELected Function DOMain STARt 4000000000 SCPI CALCulate 1 SELected Function DOMain STOP 6000000000 ELected Function DOMain STATe True SCPI CALCulate 1 SCPI CALCulate 1 SELected Function EXECute MaxValE SCPI CALCulate 1 SELected Function DATA SCPI CALCulate 1 SELected Function DOMain STARt 6000000000 a SCPI CALCulate 1 SELected Function DOMain STOP 75000000004 SCPI CALCulate 1 SELected Function DOMain STATe True SCPI CALCulate 1 SELected Function EXECute MaxV
292. talk Test System dynamic range Test Dynamic accuracy test Uncorrected system performance A6 RF Switch Temperature Controller Board No adjustment needed Troubleshooting Using Internal Test on page 156 A7 Source Step Perform the following required Troubleshooting Using Internal Test on Attenuator Opt adjustments using the Att for page 156 214 314 414 214 314 414 in Spot Adjustment of Troubleshooting Using External Test on the program page 177 Source Power Adjustment RF Output Level Accuracy and Flatness Test Test Port Characteristics Adjustment RF Output Level Linearity Test Trace Noise CW Test Crosstalk Test System Dynamic Range Test Dynamic Accuracy Test Uncorrected System Performance Test 10 Analog No adjustment needed Inspect the Booting Process Motherboard When the symptom of failure is out of specification perform the performance test A20 Digital Set jumpers and BIOS parameters on Inspect the Booting Process Motherboard the A20 For details see To configure the A20 Digital Motherboard and BIOS on page 216 A21 Analog Perform the following required Inspect the Booting Process Interface Board adjustments using the Analog Interface in Spot Adjustment of the program Writing ID To Check the Front Panel on page 167 To Check the External Trigger Input on page 170 Chapter 7 327 N o T x D v
293. tart Test button The instruction dialog box opens as shown in Figure 4 63 Follow the instruction Clicking Select button checks all the check boxes Clicking Select None button clears all the check boxes Click Exit to return to the External Test dialog box Chapter 4 197 Troubleshooting Troubleshooting Using External Test Figure 4 63 10dB 1 amp 2 dialog box Connect 10dB ATT between Port 1 and Port 2 e5070bse123 Connecta 10 dB fixed attenuator and an type N m coaxial cable in series between the test ports in accordance with Table 4 15 Make the connection as shown in Figure 4 64 Figure 4 64 10 dB attenuator and cable connection E5070A E5071A Opt 413 414 E5070A 5071A n 10dB Fixed Attenuation N m N m Cable 5070 159 Table 4 15 IF tests setups Test name Objective of the test Connect a 10 dB Center Span freq IFBW attenuatorandan N Nop and RF power settings cable between Automatic Port 1 IF signal level ranging operation Port 1 and Port 2 50 MHz 0 Hz 1 kHz BW 101 of test channel receiver for Port 1 15 dBm Port 2 IF signal level ranging operation Port 1 and Port 2 50 MHz 0 Hz 1 kHz BW 101 of test channel receiver for Port 2 15 dBm Port 3 IF signal level ranging operation Port 1 and Port 3 50 MHz 0 Hz 1 kHz BW 101
294. tem Within the USA Agilent can supply parts through a direct mail order system There are several advantages to this system Direct ordering and shipping from the Agilent Parts Center in Mountain View California maximum or minimum on any mail order there is a minimum order amount for parts ordered through a local Agilent office when the orders require billing and invoicing Prepaid transportation there is a small handling charge for each order No invoices In order for Agilent to provide these advantages please send a check or money order with each order Mail order forms and specific ordering information are available through your local Agilent sales office Addresses and telephone numbers are located in a separate document shipped with the manuals Exchange Assemblies Under the rebuilt exchange assembly program certain factory repaired and tested assemblies are available on a trade in basis These assemblies are offered al lower cost than a new assembly but meet all factory specifications required of a new assembly The defective assembly must be returned for credit under the terms of the rebuilt exchange assembly program Any spare assembly stock desired should be ordered using the new assembly part number 234 Chapter 5 Replaceable Parts Replaceable Parts List Replaceable Parts List Power Cables and Plug Configurations Figure 5 1 Power Cables and Plug Configurations OPTION 900 United King
295. tem Frequency range Hz Test limit dB Test result dB performance Directivity 3M 3G lt 10 Directivity 3G 6G lt 6 Directivity 6G 85G lt 4 Source match 3M 3G lt 15 Source match 3G 6G lt 10 Source match 6G 85G lt 10 Load match 3M 3G lt 17 Load match 3G 6G lt 12 Load match 66 856 lt 12 Port 4 Options 413 and 414 only System Frequency range Hz Test limit dB Test result dB performance Directivity 3M 3G lt 10 Directivity 3G 6G lt 6 Directivity 6G 85G lt 4 Source match 3M 3G lt 15 Source match 3G 6G lt 10 Source match 6G 85G lt 10 Load match 3M 3G lt 17 Load match 3G 6G lt 12 Load match 6G 85G lt 12 Chapter 2 131 D s 3 D 5 o Performance Tests E5071A Performance Test Record 132 Chapter 2 gt 2 3 5 Adjustment This chapter provides the adjustment information for the E5070A E5071A ENA Series Network Analyzer to ensure that the it is within its specifications The adjustment must be performed Agilent s qualified service personnel If you need the adjustment for your E5070A E5071A it should be sent to the nearest Agilent Technologies service office 133 Adjustment Safety Considerations ss Safety Considerations This manual contains NOTEs CAUTIONSs and WARNINGS that must be followed to ensure the safety of the operator and to keep the i
296. tep 3 Step 4 Step 5 NOTE Figure 6 14 Replacement Procedure B1 Fan Removal B1 Fan Removal 2 o 3 5 X 1 Tools Required Pozidriv screwdriver pt size 2 medium where Pozidriv screws are in use TORX screwdriver T10 and T20 T15 where TORX screws are in use Procedure Remove the outer cover as described in Outer Cover Removal on page 282 Remove the power supply as described in A50 ATX Power Supply Assembly Removal on page 290 Disconnect the fan cable from the fan amp switch control board Remove parts and cables which may block operation Remove the four screws fastening the fan The center fan is fastened by the pozidriv screws The other fans are fastened by the TORX T20 screws Fasten the fan in the direction as shown in Figure 6 14 The direction of the fan Rear View Chapter 6 303 Replacement Procedure A5 Crystal Oven Board Opt 1E5 Removal 5 Crystal Oven Board 1 5 Removal Tools Required Pozidriv screwdriver pt size 2 medium where Pozidriv screws are in use TORX screwdriver T10 T15 T20 where TORX screws in use Procedure Refer to Figure 6 15 for this procedure Step 1 Remove the outer cover as described in Outer Cover Removal on page 282 Step 2 Remove the two cables item 1 and 2 connected to the A5 crystal oven board Step 3 Remove three TORX T10 screw
297. the E5070A E5071A See Table B 1 Data That Will be Deleted Initialized and Data That Will be Not Affected by the Table B 1 NOTE Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Step 4 NOTE Step 5 Step 6 Execution of System Recovery Data That Will be Deleted or Data That Will be Not Affected Initialized User data written in Drive C See below User files created in Drive D user directory User installed driver software deleted LAN settings initialized GPIB control modes I initialized 1 System controller mode addressable only mode Operating Steps This operation requires a keyboard Shut down the 5070 5071 Connect a keyboard to the 5070 5071 Press the standby switch of the E5070A E5071A to turn on the power Wait for a moment and as soon as you see the following message in the upper part of the screen Push R key to enter recovery mode R N Press R on the keyboard If you do not want to perform system recovery simply wait a couple of seconds or press N When you see the following message on the upper part of the screen Recover Hard disk C drive Y N Press on the keyboard To stop executing system recovery press Under this condition the E5070A E5071A starts up normally When Figure B 1 is displayed on the upper part of the screen press on the keyboard 344 Appendix B Figure B 1 Step 7 NOTE Figure B 2 Step
298. the New Mass Storage Disk Drive The Backup files is stored in the flash ROM on the analog interface board The file must be Chapter 6 285 Figure 6 4 Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Step 4 Step 5 Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Step 4 Step 5 Replacement Procedure A27 Mass Storage Disk Drive Replacement restored in the new mass storage disk drive with the adjustment program For detail of the adjustment program refer to Chapter 3 Adjustment on page 133 Run the adjustment program Input the GPIB address of the E5070A E5071A Input the serial number of the E5070A E5071A Choose Spot Adjustment Choose HDD Calibration of the Touch Screen When you have replaced the HDD on a E5070A E5071A equipped with an Option 016 touch screen you have to calibrate the touch screen Follow the procedure described below to calibrate the touch screen Press System Press Service Menu Press Test Menu Press Adjust Touch Screen The touch screen calibration screen Figure 6 4 appears Touch Panel Calibration Screen Device 1 Touch the center of each cross as it appears Calibration will terminate if no touch is received within 10 seconds Press escape to abort the calibration process 6507030 26 Touch the x mark the upper left with your finger The mark x appears also the lower left upper right and lower right Touch the x marks in that order with your finger Touching the four locations described above
299. the uncorrected system performance test Source match test for port 1 5 d Set Parameter Response Port and Stimulus Port as shown in Figure 2 50 Figure 2 50 Source match test window Parameter Source Match Response Port 1 Stimulus Port gt z About 5070 256 Press button maximum value in each frequency range is displayed as shown in Figure 2 51 or Figure 2 52 Figure 2 51 Source match for E5070A 3M to 36 Figure 2 52 Source match for E5071A Frequency Ranges Hz Maxval dB 3M to 3G Hz 3G to 6 Hz 6 G to 8 5 G Hz 5070 257 f Record the displayed values in the performance test record Test results dB column in Port 1 table for the uncorrected system performance test Chapter 2 89 Performance Tests 8 UNCORRECTED SYSTEM PERFORMANCE TEST Load match test for port 1 g Set Parameter Response Port and Stimulus Port as shown in Figure 2 53 Figure 2 53 Load match test window Parameter Load Match _ Response Port 1 Stimulus Port 2 _ About 5070 258 h Press OK button The maximum value in each frequency range is displayed as shown in Figure 2 54 or Figure 2 55 Figure 2 54 Load match for E5070A Frequency Ranges Hz Maxval dB 36 Hz ETIS e5070ase262 Figure 2 55 Load match for E5071A Frequency Ranges
300. thers are indicated on the 10 4 inch color LCD display External keyboard The external keyboard be used for the entry of Refer to To Check the numerical and character data when it is connected External Keyboard on to the keyboard interface connector PS 2 on the page 169 rear panel Mouse The mouse can be used to move the pointer on Refer to To Check the LCD display select a function and change a Mouse on page 169 setting when it is connected to the mouse interface connector PS 2 on the rear panel 4 Floppy disk drive The 3 5 inch floppy disk drive on the front panelis Refer to To Check the 5 used to save the E5070A E50714 setup state and FDD on page 170 measurement data 3 5 inch 1 4 MB floppy disk in MS DOS compatible format e Video output An external color monitor can be used to display Refer to To Check the the same information as the E5070A E5071A Video output on page 170 LCD display when it is connected to the Video output connector 24 pin D Sub on the rear panel External trigger input The external trigger input terminal BNC on the Refer to To Check the rear panel allows an external trigger source to be External Trigger Input on used for measurement trigger page 170 Chapter 4 165 Troubleshooting Function Specific Troubleshooting Table 4 2 Major functions and troubleshooting procedures Function Description Troubleshooting LAN p
301. tion data before sending commands This error is not generated by front key operations B Block data not allowed Anblock data element has been received at a position where this instrument does not accept one C Calibration data lost This error occurs when a file containing the system calibration data is not found or in a damaged state at time of the startup of this instrument indicating a failure of this instrument Contact an Agilent Technology sales office or the company from which you bought the instrument Calibration method not selected This error occurs when the command for validating the calibration SENS CORR COLL SAVE is executed before the command for selecting a calibration type SENS CORR COLL METH xxxx is executed This error is not generated by front key operations Character data not allowed A character data element not violating the standard has been received at a position where this instrument does not accept one Double quotes are omitted where it is necessary to place a parameter in double quotes for example Appendix F 369 4 100 60 222 104 32 200 123 178 Messages Command error Command error A comprehensive syntax error has occurred showing that this instrument cannot detect a more detailed error This code simply shows that a command error defined in 11 5 1 1 4 488 2 has occurred Cont switching may damage source attenu
302. tion to the front panel keys To perform the external test properly the following conditions must be met 1 Environmental temperature 23 C 5 C 2 Warm up status indicator in the instrument status bar exhibits Ready in blue Do not operate front panel keys keyboard and mouse during the external test Changing the instrument settings while the external test is in progress will cause incorrect test results Connect a mouse to the rear panel connector Press key Press lt gt C keys or click Load Project to select Load Project function Open dialog box will be displayed as shown in Figure 4 57 Open dialog box pen L2 Look in al e J Agilent Files of type vea Project Files Cancel 2 Select User D preset state from menu in the Lock in box Double click Agilent folder to open it and to access its menu Double click Service folder to open it Click External Test VBA program file to select it from program menu Click Open button to download the external test program Press lt gt CY 5 CV 5 or click Select Macro to select Select Macro function Press or click Module1 main to open the Module1 main program file External Test window will be displayed as shown in Figure 4 58 This window shows the test items and their results 194 Chapter 4 Troubleshooting Troubleshooting Using External Test Figure 4 58 External
303. to 8 5 G Hz Exit Record the maximum RMS deviation values in the performance test record Test result dB column for the system dynamic range test Press Exit button on the SYSTEM DYNAMIC RANGE TEST window Press Avg Enter J 3 J to change the IF Bandwidth setting to 3 kHz and perform Step 50 through 52 Press Avg Enter 0 to change the IF Bandwidth setting to 10 Hz change the S parameter setting as shown in the fourth row in Table 2 11and perform Step 50 through 53 System Dynamic Range test program Coding procedure Press Macro Setup key Press to activate VBA Editor function Click Insert and select Module from pull down menu Project Modulel Code 62 Chapter 2 Program 2 2 Step 4 Step 5 Performance Tests 6 SYSTEM DYNAMIC RANGE TEST window screen for coding a program will be displayed Input the test program shown below Save the test program with a proper file name Test program Sub Main Dim Val 15 As Variant X 201 As Double Y 201 As Double Rms As Variant Dim I As Integer J As Integer K As Integer Dmy As Long Dim Ver As String Dim MaxValA As Variant MaxValB As Variant Dim MaxValC As Variant MaxValD As Variant MaxValE As Variant MaxValF As Variant MaxValG As Variant SCPI TRIGger SEQuence Source BUS SCPI INITiate 1 CONTinuous True For I 0 To 15 SCPI TRIGger SEQuence SINGl 5
304. ttenuator state is named DA10a Perform Step 13 through 24 Calculate the difference in Sxy x R dB values for the DA10 and DA10a by using the following equation D 3 D 5 o A Sxy x dB Sxy x R dB DA10a Sxy x R dB DA10 Adjust the source power for the following value on the power meter display Target value Pm db DA10a A Sxy x R dB It will be possible to promptly approximate the source power to the target value by decreasing the source power setting by A Sxy x R from that for the DA10 After this adjustment is performed the state is named DA10b Perform Step 13 through 24 Set the first attenuator of the Z5623A to 5 dB by executing the following GPIB control command GPIB OUTPUT 712 amp in OUTPUT 712 at 5 OUTPUT 712 at b 0 Perform Step 13 through 24 Calculate the dynamic accuracy using the following equation D A Sxy x DAS Sxy x R DA10b Pm DAS Pm DA10b Record the calculated D A in the calculation sheet Running D A dB column for DA5 Calculate the true dynamic accuracy using the following equation True D A Running D A dB DAS True D A dB DA10 Record the true D A in the calculation sheet True D A column for DAS Set the first attenuator of the Z5623A to 0 dB by executing the following GPIB Chapter 2 77 Step 75 Step 76 Step 77 Step 7
305. tup for the E5070A E5071A with 4 port option Opt 413 414 For 2 port and 3 port options Opt 213 214 313 314 connect the power sensor to Port 1 as well Press Preset and Enter to initialize the 5070 5071 Then set the controls as follows Control settings Key strokes Center frequency 50 MHz Center 8 9 W4 Frequency span 0 Hz 9 The source power now is set to 0 dBm preset value Press C gt and to make a Single sweep measurement RF output level accuracy test a Wait for power meter reading to settle b Record the power meter reading in the performance test record Test result column for the level accuracy test RF output level flatness test a Record the power meter reading same as that in Step 5 b in the calculation sheet Power meter reading Ref column for the level flatness test b Press Center 1 0 Wa to change the E5070A E5071A center frequency to 10 MHz which is the first one of the frequency flatness test frequencies listed in Table 30 Chapter 2 Performance Tests 2 RF OUTPUT LEVEL ACCURACY AND FLATNESS TEST 2 2 Table 2 2 RF output level flatness test conditions Agilent 5070 5071 Center Frequency 5070 5071 10 MHz 550 MHz 1 05 GHz 1 55 GHz 2 05 GHz 3 GHz 5071 only 4 25 GHz 5 05 GHz 6 05 GHz 7 05 GHz 8 05 GHz 8 5 GHz D 3 D 5 o NOT
306. twork Analyzer The manual contains information requisite to do performance tests adjustments troubleshooting and repairs Chapter 2 Performance Tests This chapter provides information on how to verify the 5070 5071 performance Chapter 3 Adjustment This chapter provides the adjustment information for the 5070 5071 ENA Series Network Analyzer to ensure that the it is within its specifications The adjustment must be performed Agilent s qualified service personnel If you need the adjustment for your E5070A E5071A it should be sent to the nearest Agilent Technologies service office Chapter 4 Troubleshooting This chapter provides procedure to isolate faulty assembly in the E5070A E5071A Network Analyzer Chapter 5 Replaceable Parts This chapter contains information for ordering replacement parts for the E5070A E5071A ENA Series RF Network Analyzers Chapter 6 Replacement Procedure This chapter provides procedure for removing and replacing the major assemblies in the 5070 5071 ENA Series Network Analyzer Chapter 7 Post Repair Procedures This chapter lists the procedures required to verify the E5070A E50714A operation after an assembly is replaced with a new one Appendix A Manual Changes This appendix contains the information required to adapt this manual to versions or configurations of the E5070A E5071A manufactured earlier than th
307. ug Argentine Resolution 63 Annex IV 250V 10A Cable 8120 2956 Cable 8120 6870 OPTION 918 OPTION 922 Plug JIS C 8303 125V 12A Plug GB 1002 250V 10A Cable 8120 4753 Cable 8120 8376 OPTION 921 OPTION 919 Israel Sy Plug CEI 23 16 250V 10A Cable 8120 6978 Plug Israel SI 32 250V 10A Cable 8120 5182 OPTION 901 Australia New Zealand OPTION 927 Thailand Plug NEMA 5 15P 250V 10A Plug AS 3112 250V 10A Cable 8120 8871 Cable 8120 1369 NOTE Each option number includes a family of cords and connectors of various materials and plug body configurations straight 90 etc Appendix E 365 Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Step 1 NOTE Power Requirement Turning the Power ON and OFF Turning the Power ON and OFF Perform the following steps to turn the power ON or OFF Turning the power ON If the standby switch in the lower left part of the front panel is in the pressed down position press the switch to the popped up position Lb Press the standby switch to the pressed down position This operation turns ON the power and the E5070A E5071A starts the self test Confirm that the self test indicates normal operation Normal operation is confirmed by the self test 1f no error message appears Turning the power OFF Use either of the following methods to turn OFF the 5070 5071 Press the standby switch in the lower left par
308. umber of points is set 2 or sweep type is set logarithmic segment sweep The gating function and transform function are automatically turned off when this warning message is displayed Appendix F 379 Messages DC bias overload Messages indicating the internal status of the equipment Messages that indicate the internal status of the equipment include equipment irregularities as well as the results of processing or current processing status These messages do not have numbers Messages indicating measurement failure DC bias overload During application of DC bias voltage a sudden change in the connection condition of the DUT has lowered the direct current impedance resulting in momentary over current at the DC bias source Do not remove the DUT during application of DC bias If this error occurs frequently during normal measurement this may be due to instrument failure PLL Unlock An error has been detected in the internal PLL Phase Lock Loop circuit of the E5070A 5071A The PLL is used to generate a stable frequency source This can occur due to an error of the external reference signal or when the power is turned ON low temperature environment If the external reference signal has not been inputted or shows no error instrument tuning or repair is necessary If the message does not disappear in a few minutes after turning the power ON instrument tuning or repair is necessary Power on test failed An error has bee
309. up the IP address subnet mask of the external PC as follows a Double click My Computer icon on Windows desktop of the external PC And double click Control Panel The Control Panel window will appear b In the Control Panel window double click Network The Network dialog box will appear In the Configuration tab select TCP IP display it in revers video and press the Properties button c The dialog box appears If Specify an IP address has been selected record the IP address and subnet mask d Ifthe Obtain an IP address automatically has been selected select the Speccify an IP address Enter the IP address xxx xxx xxx y and subnet mask xxx xxx xxx xxx as shown in Figure 4 30 The letters x represent the IP address and subnet mask of the 5070 5071 The letter y is different from the IP address of the 5070 5071 Press the OK button R o 6 o gt e o 2 Q Chapter 4 173 Troubleshooting Function Specific Troubleshooting Figure 4 30 Properties Bindings Network Dialog Box IP Address Tab Advanced 805 DNS Configuration Gateway WINS Configuration Address An IP address can be automatically assigned to this computer If your network does not automatically assign IP addresses ask your network administrator for an address and then type it in the space below Obtain an IP address automatically Specify an IP address
310. urs when the source attenuator power range is set at a value other than zero SOUR POW ATT command in a model not having the extended power output option This error is not generated by front key operations Out of memory Insufficient memory is available in this instrument to perform the required operation P Parameter error When a parameter related error other than Errors 221 through 229 occurs that error is displayed Parameter not allowed The number of parameters exceeds that required for the command For instance when a program message SENS1 SWE TYPE LIN SEGM is sent instead of a correct program message with a command SENS1 SWE TYPE LIN which requires a parameter the instrument receives the message as the number of parameters is invalid See the command reference to confirm the required number of parameters Peak not found This error occurs when after specifying a peak and executing the CALC MARK FUNC EXEC and CALC FUNC EXEC commands the specified peak is not found in the marker search analysis Phase lock loop unlocked This error occurs when the PLL circuit of this instrument becomes unlocked while the measurement is in progress The measurement value is not correct This error may occur when an external reference out of specification is connected to this instrument Should an error occur with an external reference not connected this instrument is faulty Contact an Agilent Technology sales office or th
311. use Flat edge screwdriver Procedure Refer to Figure 6 26 for this procedure Remove the front panel as described in Front Panel Removal on page 284 Release the clamped cables from the clamp item 1 on the cover Disconnect the cables item 2 and 3 from the touch screen controller if the option 016 is installed Remove the four TORX T10 screws item 4 fastening the cover to the front panel Disconnect the two cables item 5 and 6 connected through the cover The item 6 is not connected in the 5070 5071 without the option 016 Release the cable from the cable clamp item 7 on the LCD Disconnect the cable item 8 connected to the inverter Remove the four TORX T10 screws item 9 fastening the A51 LCD Display to the front panel 320 Chapter 6 Replacement Procedure A51 LCD Display Removal Figure 6 26 A51 LCD Removal 2 o 3 5 X e5070ase244 Calibration of the Touch Screen When you have replaced the LCD on a E5070A E5071A equipped with an Option 016 touch scr
312. uter Virus Check Computer Virus Check Click Tools Disconnect Network Drive on the menu of the Explorer Disconnect Network dialog box will appear 2 Select Network Drive you checked and press the OK button The drive will disappear from the Explorer If no drive has been infected proceed the next step If the drive C or D has been infected replace the A27 mass storage of the 5070 5071 Disable the C drive of E5070A E5071A 1 Double click My Computer icon on Windows desktop of theE5070A E5071A Right click on C and then click Sharing The Sharing dialog box will appear 2 Mark the Not Shared as shown in Figure D 10 Press the OK button Properties Sharing Dialog Box Ca100 Properties 2 General Tools Sharing Compression 5070 240 Restart measurement screen of 5070 5071 1 Double click Restart as instr icon on the Windows desktop ofthe 5070 5071 and the instrument will be restated and the measurement screen will appear Change the IP address and subnet mask of the E5070A E5071A if you selected Specify an IP address on the 4 of Step 2 1 Press key 2 Press Misc Setup Network Setup Network Configuration 3 The Network dialog box as shown in Figure D 11 will appear In the Configuration tab select TCP IP display it in reverse video and press the Properties button 360 Appendix D Computer Virus Check Computer Virus Ch
313. wer supply as described in 50 ATX Power Supply Assembly Removal on page 290 Disconnect the CPU fan cable item 1 from the A20 digital motherboard Keep pushing the heatsink clip item 2 then release it from the CPU socket tabs using the flat edge screwdriver Pull the CPU socket release lever item 3 laterally away from the CPU socket to disengage the level from the locking tab Then rotate the lever upward to release the CPU from the CPU socket Lift the CPU out of the socket To replace the CPU reverse the CPU removal procedure Install the CPU so that all pins on the CPU aligns with the holes of the PGA370 socket 292 Chapter 6 Replacement Procedure CPU Removal Figure 6 8 CPU Removal 2 o 3 5 X 1 e5070ase234 Chapter 6 293 Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Step 4 Step 5 Replacement Procedure DIMM Module Removal DIMM Module Removal There are two DIMM128MB memory module on the A20 digital motherboard Tools Required Pozidriv screwdriver pt size 2 medium where Pozidriv screws are in use TORX screwdriver T10 T15 T20 where TORX screws in use Procedure Remove the outer cover as described in Outer Cover Removal on page 282 Remove the A50 ATX power supply as described in A50 ATX Power Supply Assembly Removal on page 290 There are three DIMM sockets on the 20 digital mother board DIMM memory
314. whether the BIOS options are correctly set or not Auto configuration dialog box is displayed by choosing Auto Configuration with Optimal Settings using 1 and 1 keys and by pressing key at the BIOS Setup Utility main menu The dialog box prompts you to select Y Yes or N No about Load high performance settings Y N as shown in Figure 4 84 Press and to load the high performance settings As a result all the BIOS options are automatically configured to the optimal settings for the E5070A E5071A High performance setting dialog box AMIBIOS HIFLEX SETUP UTILITY VERSION 1 18 18 American Megatrends Inc All Rights Reserved Standard CMOS Setup Advanced CMOS Setup Advanced Chipset Setup Power Management Setup Auto Configuration with Optimal Settings Auto Configuration with Fail Safe Settings Save Settings and Exit Exit Hithout Saving Load configuration settings giving highest performance ESC Exit F2 F3 Color 18 amp Exit Standard CMOS Setup Standard CMOS Setup options are displayed by choosing Standard CMOS Setup using and keys and by pressing key at the BIOS Setup Utility main menu The current setup states are displayed as shown in Figure 4 85 If date or time is incorrect select it using 1 and 1 keys and change the setting by pressing and Lj keys If you want to exit from this page and return to main menu press s key Chapter 4 221 o 6 N
315. will be restarted and the measurement screen will appear Appendix C 351 x 3 D 5 D T Firmware Update Firmware Update 352 Appendix C 9 3 lt n gt 9 o Computer Virus Check This appendix describes an example of how to check the system of E5070A E50714A for computer viruses using computer viruses check software 353 Step 1 Step 2 Computer Virus Check Computer Virus Check Computer Virus Check The E5070A E5071A should be protected against computer viruses If you need to check the system of E5070A E5071A for computer viruses it s recommended that an external PC installed anti virus software 1 used to access E5070A E5071A s built in drive C and D via LAN and perform virus scan The E5070A E5071A has no virus function nor anti virus software installed The Windows operating system installed in this Instrument is customized for more effective operation Installing Windows based software including anti virus software for ordinary PCs into this instrument may affect the behavior of the instrument during measurement Required equipment E5070A or E5071A with keyboard and mouse e An external PC installed anti virus software such as Norton AntiVirus Acrossed LAN cable It enables the peer to peer communication between the E5070A E5071A and the PC How to check the drive C and D of E5070A E5071A The followi
316. x b Click Test button in the dialog box Then Handler I O Board tests dialog box opens as shown in Figure 4 55 Handler I O Board tests dialog box Not Done Exit Click the Test button in the dialog box message of Connect Handler I O Test Kit will be displayed d Connect handler I O test kit to the Handler 1 connector on the rear panel Click OK button The dialog box displays Now testing while the Handler I O Board test is in progress f When the tests are completed the dialog box displays Pass or Fail of test result as shown in Figure 4 56 Handler I O Board test result example Pass Exit g Ifthe Handler I O Board test failed refer to Table 4 20 External Test Failure Troubleshooting Information h To return to the External Test dialog box click Exit button NOTE To end the external test click Exit button in the External Test dialog box Chapter 4 193 es o 6 o gt e o 2 Q NOTE NOTE Figure 4 57 Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Step 4 Step 5 Step 6 Step 7 Step 8 Step 9 Step 10 Troubleshooting Troubleshooting Using External Test To Execute the External Test rev A 03 00 To isolate faulty board assembly in analog section execute the external test rev A 03 00 in accordance with the following procedure The test procedure needs to be performed using a mouse in addi
317. xample of no response for ping command amp 5 005 Prompt Minimum C MWINDOWS gt To Check the Printer Parallel Port Test equipment It is recommended that the following compatible printers be used Manufacturer Recommended printer as of February 2002 Hewlett Packard DeskJet 930C series DeskJet 948C series Printer cable Parallel cable Procedure Connect the printer cable between the printer and the E5070A E5071A printer parallel port Turn the printer on Press key to initialize the 5070 5071 Press key Click Printer Setup in the softkey menu es o 6 o gt e o 2 Q Depending on the printer used select either hp deskjet 930c or hp deskjet 948c from the pull down menu of the Name box Then click OK button Click Print in the softkey menu Confirm the printout of the display image If the printer fails to work the problem seems in the A20 digital motherboard printer driver or connection of the printer cable Chapter 4 175 Troubleshooting Function Specific Troubleshooting To Check the GPIB Procedure Perform the E5070A E5071A performance test program If the controller cannot detect the 5070 5071 the problem seems in the A24 GPIB card the connection of the GPIB cable 176 Chapter4 NOTE Troubleshooting Troubleshooting Using External Test Troubleshooting Using External Test Externa
318. y from which you bought the instrument 224 Port 4 receiver overload For Options 413 and 414 only The input to Test Port 4 exceeds the maximum input level The measurement value is not correct When a DUT is an amplifier or the like this error may occur damaging the receiver in the worst case Should this error occur with a passive part used as the DUT or with nothing connected to the test port this instrument is faulty Contact an Agilent Technology sales office or the company from which you bought the instrument 241 Power on test failed This error occurs when the power on test fails indicating a failure of this instrument Contact an Agilent Technology sales office or the company from which you bought the instrument 120 Printer error 4 This error occurs when the previous printing is still in progress the printer fails offline short of paper etc at time of outputting the display image on the LCD screen to the printer HCOP IMM command 121 Print failed This error occurs when printing fails for reasons other than Error 120 Printer error 284 Program currently running This error occurs when the PROG SEL STAT RUN command is executed with the VBA program in the Run state 112 Program mnemonic too long The length of the header exceeds 12 characters see 7 6 1 4 1 IEEE488 2 286 Program runtime error An error occurring when VBA is executed Q 430 Query DEADLOCKED The state that ge

Service Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents